| 
			  
				
					
						| 
			
			 
			by John A. Keel1971
 
			from IFile Website |  
			 
			  
			  
				
					
						| 
						Theories about "ultraterrestrials," 
						Men In Black,  
						glass mountains, 
						ancient maps,  
						and advanced 
						civilizations predating the caveman.  
						Are we being 
						manipulated for someone's amusement?   |  
			  
				
					
						
							
								
								CONTENTS 
								
								PART ONE 
								
								
								
								Chapter One: 'You Can't Get There From Here'
								
								
								
								Chapter Two: The Continent That Vanished 
								
								
								
								Chapter Three: If's a 
							Nice Place To Visit But… 
								
								
								Chapter Four: Towers of 
							Glass and Theories of Putty 
								
								
								Chapter Five: Strong Men and Stupid Enterprises
								
								
								
								Chapter Six: 
							A Funny Thing Happened on the Way to Extinction
								
								
								
								Chapter Seven: 
							Scientists in Collision 
								
								PART TWO 
								
								
								
								Chapter Eight; Mimics 
							of Man 
								
								
								Chapter Nine: Men-in-Black Lore and the CIA
								
								
								
								Chapter Ten: Rendezvous with the Damned 
								
								
								
								Chapter Eleven: Not 
							One of Them, etc...
								
								
								Chapter Twelve: The 
							Demise of the Gods 
								
								
								Chapter Thirteen: 
							Secret of the Ages  
								
								PART THREE 
								 
								
								
								
								Chapter Fourteen: 
							'Hello, Central - Give me Ganymede' 
								
								
								Chapter Fifteen: 
							Where Is Everybody Going?
								
								
								Chapter Sixteen: The 
							Revolution of The Mind  
			  
			  
			  
			  
			  
			  
			  
			  
			  
			  
			INTRODUCTION
 
				
				In September 1953,1 spent right 
				hours inside the Great Pyramid in Egypt producing a radio 
				program which was aired throughout Europe over the American 
				Forces Network (AFN) the following month.    
				Egypt so impressed me, and 
				archaeology so fascinated me, that I returned to Cairo the next 
				year and lived there for several months, wading through the 
				musty libraries and museums, prowling the desert, and visiting 
				the ancient tombs. During a trek to Aswan and the Upper Nile I 
				saw my first flying saucer, a metallic looking disk, with a 
				rotating outer rim, which hovered for several minutes above the 
				Aswan Dam in broad daylight.   
				I had written and produced a radio 
				documentary, Things in the Sky, in 1952, and my earlier 
				researches into unidentified flying objects had already 
				convinced me that such things not only existed, but that they 
				had been present in our skies since the dawn of man.
 Eventually my travels took me to Beirut, Damascus, Baghdad and a 
				thousand places in between. I walked among the ancient ruins and 
				puzzled over man's illustrious but forgotten past. In India I 
				wandered alone into the Himalayas and crossed the border of 
				Tibet (which has since been sealed by the Chinese).
   
				As I travelled, I interviewed 
				archaeologists, historians, and assorted experts and Spent 
				endless hours in remote libraries poring over rare old books. I 
				was puzzled at first to discover that none of the leading 
				authorities seemed to agree on anything. Indeed, a large part of 
				the scientific literature is devoted to theorization and 
				incredibly vicious attacks on the theories of other theorists.
				   
				Most perplexing of all was the fact 
				that some of the literature about the ruins I had visited 
				smacked of pure fiction, because the authors had not visited the 
				sites but laboured instead to couple fictitious theories with 
				dubious facts. This led, of course, to conclusions that bordered 
				on the imbecilic.
 An offshoot of this process is, understandably enough, an 
				enormous quantity of crank literature created by unqualified 
				researchers who attempted to interpret the scientific material 
				in their own ways. In many areas of the less popular sciences 
				the crank material outweighs the scientific because few if any 
				scientists have tackled those subjects. So 98 per cent of all 
				the available literature on Atlantis,
 
 flying saucers, Tibet, and prehistoric ruins falls into the 
				crank category. The task of setting all this out and developing 
				a valid synthesis is a formidable one - one which! have 
				undertaken with great trepidation.
 
 In his book, In the Name of Science, Martin Gardner defines the 
				characteristics of the common crank or pseudoscientist.
 
				  
				He lists 
				the four chief attributes as being:  
					
					(1) The crank considers himself 
					a genius… even a towering genius who is years ahead of 
					hi&time 
					(2) He considers his colleagues 
					and fellow researchers 'ignorant blockheads', largely 
					because they fail to recognize his genius. He assaults his 
					opponents by impugnation, questioning their honesty, 
					intelligence, and motives. They respond in kind, naturally, 
					and so great storms are whipped up in the trivial teacups of 
					the scientific and pseudoscientific journals. Controversy is 
					the lifeblood of crankism 
					(3) The pseudoscientist is 
					paranoid and feels he is the victim of a vast conspiracy 
					designed to suppress his brilliant work. In many instances 
					these imagined conspiracies become a vital part of the 
					subject itself, as for example, the endless literature 
					discussing how the U.S. Air Force has been keeping the truth 
					about flying saucers from the public 
					(4) The crank delights in 
					focusing his attacks 'on the greatest scientists and the 
					best-established theories'. He goes after big game. He is 
					wiser than Einstein, knows more about astronomy than Fred 
					Hoyle, and is better informed about the moon than Neil 
					Armstrong. 
				The crank also invents his own 
				terminology: a jabberwocky understood only by him and his 
				closest allies. So, we find the literature filled with confusing 
				and complicated terms which are merely displays of 
				pseudo-erudition, or what psychiatrists call neologisms.
 Over the years I have met the leaders of many peculiar cults and 
				pseudoscientific factions of belief. With very few exceptions, 
				they have all lived up to the above criteria. Most were friendly 
				and cooperative with me until they realized that I did not share 
				their beliefs in Atlantis or visitors from Andromeda.
   
				Then they turned on me with wrathful 
				vengeance and launched such campaigns of unfounded slander that 
				I could only be amazed and amused. I have now been accused of 
				being everything from a Communist con man to a secret agent for 
				the Central Intelligence Agency; from a religious fanatic (I'm a 
				lifelong agnostic) to a pawn of the devil. Typographical errors, 
				over which I have no control, in my many articles and books have 
				been lovingly dissected by these groups and prompted countless 
				letters and essays reviewing their sinister implications. 
				   
				After twenty-five years as a writer 
				and reporter dedicated
 to collecting the facts as objectively and as honestly as 
				possible, my integrity has been attacked from all angles.
 
 For these reasons this book is written in a style which 
				discusses known facts with the popular and unpopular beliefs 
				they have inspired. I am not supporting any of these beliefs, I 
				am merely discussing them. It may be that the great 
				civilizations of Atlantis and Lemuria once actually flourished 
				on this planet In this book I am only weighing the evidence pro 
				and coo.
   
				It may be that little green men from 
				Mars really are visiting housewives in Nebraska. I am only 
				reporting the claims of the housewives, not trying to prove that 
				Martians are really dropping in. The believers in Atlantis will 
				undoubtedly hate me. The believers in Martians already despise 
				me.
 Parts of this book are so obviously tongue-in-cheek that it 
				shouldn't be necessary to mention it. Yet I know from bitter 
				experience that some of my humorous comments will be taken 
				seriously and will prompt new venom. I am not attacking any 
				specific individuals or cults. I am attacking man's abysmal 
				ignorance and his impassioned effort to hide that ignorance from 
				himself.
   
				I have seen a large part of this 
				world and its mysteries. Wonder and curiosity have always been 
				an integral part of my life. I am only trying to share that 
				wonder with the reader.
 This book is based upon countless interviews, endless 
				correspondence, many in-depth personal investigations, and 
				hundreds of books covering everything from alchemy to zoology. 
				Wherever possible, I have tried to include key source references 
				for the benefit of those readers who might be interested in 
				pursuing some of these matters further. It has been impossible, 
				however, to list all my sources.
   
				Some of the books used in my 
				research were privately published and are quite rare. 
				   
				[But even some of these can be 
				obtained through Gray Barker, Box 2228, Clarksburg, West 
				Virginia 26301; and Health Research, 70 Lafayette Street, 
				Mokelumne Hill, CaK-fornia 95245.]
 Although unidentified flying objects are mentioned frequently in 
				these pages, the UFO controversy is not the main theme. Some of 
				the major UFO cases discussed are drawn from reports which 
				appeared originally in England's Ftying Saucer Review, the only 
				truly scientific publication devoted to the subject. [Queries 
				should be -directed to Flying Saucer Review, 49a Kings Grove, 
				London SE15, England.]
 
 I do not pretend to know any answers. After a lifetime of travel 
				and study I am still learning the questions. This is a journey 
				into man's past and the curious manifestations which have always 
				surrounded Mm and which have directed the human race upwards 
				from
 
 the caves to the moon itself. It is a Journey into a jungle of 
				myth, legend, and belief, and hopefully, it is another small 
				step towards the larger truth that man has always sought but 
				never really found.
 
 John A. Keel
 
			
 
			  
			  
			  
			  
			  
			PART ONE 
				
					
						
							
							Archaeology is not a 
							science, it's a vendetta.MORTIMER 
							WHEELER
 
 
			CHAPTER ONE
 'YOU CANT GET 
			THERE FROM HERE'
 
 While hairy, beetled-browed cavemen were labouring to invent fire 
			and the wheel, there already existed on this planet a highly 
			developed civilization of intelligent beings, they built massive 
			cities of stone, many of which are still standing.
 
			  
			They methodically constructed giant 
			mounds of earth all over this planet for some purpose which still 
			escapes us. They scattered peculiar artifacts of stone and metal 
			across every continent, and they sailed every ocean, mapping the 
			entire globe systematically.
 Then they vanished.
 
 Cavemen inherited the earth. They regarded the ancient cities as 
			sacred places. As the centuries ticked off, they became conscious of 
			other life forms around them. Life forms that seemed to possess die 
			power of invisibility, of life and death itself. They invented names 
			for these forms. They worshipped them. They recorded the 
			manifestations of that invisible world in myths and legends handed 
			down from generation to generation.
 
			  
			Eventually they perfected sciences 
			.based upon their observations of those manifestations. In time 
			those sciences developed new myths. The original owners of the 
			earth, the builders of those great cities, were forgotten. But as 
			men spread across the face of the planet, the traces of those lost 
			Elders were rediscovered Man's newfangled sciences couldn't fit such 
			traces into their new concepts, however, so the evidence was 
			ignored.  
			  
			As a result, the earth has two 
			histories: the history taught in our colleges and schools, and the 
			real but ignored history of a very ancient people and of strange 
			forces which have often supervised human events.
 Ten thousand years ago that unknown civilization carefully mapped 
			the entire surface of the globe. Their maps were copied and recopied 
			and passed along from one age to the next. Finally, copies of them 
			were rediscovered by Capt. Arlington H. Mallery in, of all 
			places, the library of Congress. Known as the Pin Re'is maps, they 
			were originally found among the relics in the former imperial palace 
			of the Sultan of Constantinople in 1929. Eventually they ended up in 
			the archives in Washington DC.
 
			  
			At first glance these maps which are 
			dated a.d. 1513, appear to be nothing more than a hopelessly garbled 
			view of the ancient world. No one paid much attention to them until 
			Captain Mallery came along. Working with the U.S. Hydrographic 
			Office and the Weston Observatory of Boston, he developed a grid 
			system which suddenly brought the maps into focus. The modern 
			Mercator grid system was not invented until 1559, so the ancient 
			surveyors had to develop a method of their own. Once Mallery had 
			unscrambled that method, he could hardly believe the results.
 These maps were incredibly detailed and as accurate as the latest 
			charts. Antarctica, for example, was not discovered until Captain 
			Cook reached it in 1773, and it was not fully explored until the 
			1950s. But the frozen continent is laid out with almost pinpoint 
			accuracy on the Pi'ri Re'is maps, including mountain ranges that 
			were not even known to us until 19521
 
 Even more astonishing, these maps outline glaciers and land areas 
			which are known to have existed in the Ice Age… before the last 
			great shift of the earth's crust an estimated ten thousand years 
			ago. This fact led Mallery to conclude that the, original on which 
			the 
			Piri Re'is maps were apparently 
			based had to have been drawn before the Ice Age.
 
 Professor Charles Hapgood, a science historian, heard of 
			Mallery's work and turned the maps into a class study project at 
			Keene State College. His students painstakingly compared each detail 
			with modern charts and found that the ancient maps were never more 
			than five degrees off… and those errors were probably due to land 
			movements that occurred after the originals were drawn.
 
			  
			Many of the details of the early maps 
			correlated precisely with modern surveys. The results of Hapgood's 
			studies, together with full-color reproductions of the maps, were 
			published in a book titled Maps of the Ancient Sea Kings,
 Modem scientists can't seem to agree on the age of mankind. Each 
			year produces a new bit of bone and new controversy. Some claim man 
			might be half a million years old. Others offer more conservative 
			estimates ranging between thirty to seventy thousand years. But all 
			seem to share the notion that our ancestors were embarrassingly 
			primitive ten thousand years ago. They certainly were not developed 
			enough to sail and chart the earth.
 
 It would have been impossible for anyone to contrive the maps in 
			1929, the year they were found in Constantinople, It would have been 
			even more impossible for someone to hoax them in 1513. And it is 
			downright ridiculous to think that someone could have surveyed the 
			earth before the Ice Age. Modern scientists have a very scientific 
			method for coping with such humiliating discoveries. They put them 
			in the basements of their museums and forget them.
 
 The museums are filled with such erratic, as they are called. A cube 
			of metal, carefully machined, notched, and rounded on one side, was 
			found in the centre of a block of coal in Austria in 1885. It's 
			still in a museum in Salzburg and no one has ever come up with an 
			explanation for it. Basing their conclusions on the age of the coal 
			bed. various experts have estimated it to be three hundred thousand 
			years old.
 
			  
			That makes it quite a bit younger than 
			the piece of gold thread that workmen found imbedded in eight feet 
			of rock at a quarry in Rutherford Mills, England. The London Times 
			announced the discovery on June 22nd. 1844… and the experts mumbled 
			that it had to be sixty million years old. Who could have dropped a 
			gold thread in England sixty million years ago? Or who could have 
			manufactured that iron and nickel cube three hundred thousand years 
			back?  
			  
			Maybe these things were the handiwork of 
			the same people who ma^e the strange pieces of very ancient pottery 
			which have been found in rock quarries and coal mines around the 
			world along with steel nails, perfect glass lenses, and even - 
			believe it or not -bones of prehistoric animals with bullets in 
			them. Giant chains have been found imbedded in great rocks in both 
			North and South America.  
			  
			Not merely imbedded but actually passing 
			through the rocks. They seem to predate the arrival of the Europeans 
			by thousands of years.
 Electric batteries have been found in ancient Egyptian tombs. A huge 
			slab of perfect green glass weighing many tons was found in a cave 
			in Israel a few years ago. It ranks as the largest piece of glass 
			ever cast and is very ancient. Who made it, how, and why are still 
			unsolved mysteries.
 
 Science tells us one thing: these artifacts put the lie to all the 
			scientific theories. Take man's earliest records - the cave 
			paintings. Scientists assert that the great saurians were extinct 
			long before man arrived on the scene. Yet cave paintings have been 
			found depicting dinosaurs. Other cliff carvings in the south-west 
			show men hurling weapons at gigantic creatures that look like 
			elephants or mammoths.
 
 Captain Mallery created a stir when he first revealed his work with 
			the Piri Re'is maps on a broadcast from Georgetown University in 
			1956. He dared to suggest that the maps may have been the product of 
			an aerial survey. Professor Hapgood was more cautious, however, and 
			merely implied they were the work of some lost seafaring culture. 
			The aerial survey hypothesis would have necessarily
 
 been dependent upon a highly advanced technological society. Not 
			only would flying machines have been required, but photography would 
			also be needed for such a survey. Did the Elders have cameras, too?
 
 A mere forty-seven thousand years ago somebody carved an intriguing 
			picture on the side of the Hunan Mountains in China. A picture of 
			cylinders in the sky with strange beings standing on them. Russian 
			and Chinese archaeologists could date it. but they couldn't explain 
			it Nor could they explain the drawing they found carved in a cliff 
			at Fergana in Central Asia in 1961. A Reuters dispatch described it 
			as resembling a man wearing an 'airtight helmet' with some kind of 
			mechanical contraption on his back. It has been dated at 7000 b.c.
 
			  
			Other peculiar cave and cliff carvings 
			have been found in South America, Japan, and the Sahara Desert. Some 
			of these pictures show giants with round heads towering over 
			ordinary hunters. Others depict circular objects with, odd creatures 
			coming out of them. These drawings were apparent; attempts to record 
			highly unusual and significant events, but today they are open to 
			all kinds of interpretation and speculation.
 Scattered throughout France there are many ancient caverns heavily 
			decorated with carvings and paintings dating back ten to thirty 
			thousand years. More than two thousand animals are depicted, 
			including 610 horses, 510 bison, 205 mammoths, and 176 ibex, 
			according to a study published by H. Breuil in 1952. 
			Alongside this impressive menagerie there are scores of other 
			designs which are far more mysterious. They show oval- and 
			disk-shaped objects some apparently standing on tripod legs with 
			ladders extending down from them. Archaeologists can't account for 
			them, but they look uneasily like the modern descriptions of flying 
			saucers.
 
			  
			The leading French authority, Aime 
			Michel, goes so far as to suggest that that is exactly what they 
			are.
 Ancient records in China describe flying saucers and mysterious 
			lights in the sky. They were usually regarded as dragons, and the 
			early Chinese noted that these things flew regular routes year after 
			year, century after century. Other early manuscripts preserved in 
			India mention 
			vimanas, 'aerial cars", as if they 
			were commonplace.
 
			  
			Five thousand years ago a sage named 
			Mahaüshi Bharadwaj wrote a thorough description of these vimanas. 
			telling how they could move in all directions silently, cover vast 
			distances, and even become invisible. They were supposedly propelled 
			by 'tunes and rhythms'… perhaps a poetic way of describing the 
			humming and whirring of intricate and little-understood machinery. 
			In appearance they resembled the flying cones which have been 
			frequently described in the reports of modem UFO witnesses around 
			the globe.
 Although this sort of evidence is superabundant, it has never been 
			systematically studied by trained scholars. Instead, this material 
			has fallen into, the hands of assorted cultists and students of 
			fringe pseudoscience. It has been used to advance belief in 
			everything from lost Atlantis to extraterrestrial visitants from 
			some distant planet.
 
			  
			To subscribe to any one of these 
			multitudinous beliefs is to exclude all other possibilities. We 
			should consider every possibility, avoid belief, and accept only the 
			hard facts.
 Two key facts are already clear:
 
				
					
					(1) There have always been 
					strange objects in the skies above this planet. They were 
					seen by early man and have been seen constantly ever since, 
					as the Bible and other available records still firmly attest 
					(2) Somebody mapped the earth 
					before the Ice Age. We have no way of knowing who they were 
					or how they did it. If the Piri Re'is maps were the product 
					of an aerial survey, then perhaps there was an advanced 
					civilization somewhere in the Americas or the Pacific, 
					removed from the random clusters of primitive men. 
					 
			But occasionally the advanced culture 
			dropped in on the cavemen or at least flew overhead.  
			  
			Thus, two cultures may have existed 
			simultaneously. One highly advanced and purposely aloof from the 
			other - the animal-like cave dwellers. It was inevitable that the 
			two cultures should occasionally cross and that the higher group 
			should affect the lower in many ways. At some point in early history 
			the higher culture was either destroyed by a monumental catastrophe 
			or withdrew in some fashion, leaving hardly a trace behind.  
			  
			So, our entire record of that 
			superculture comes from the observations of primitive man. Our only 
			evidence is the flimsy overlapping that took place: the residue of 
			the effect of the superculture upon the subculture.
 Primitive man was profoundly influenced by the superculture and 
			guided by it. There are even indications that members of the 
			super-culture actually appeared before primitive man and took over 
			as kings and god-kings to direct his early development Such 
			appearances helped to generate many of man's first religious 
			beliefs.
 
 Some 2,500,000 people believe in the Book of Mormon, the Mormon 
			bible, which is purportedly a record of life in North America 
			thousands of years ago. As with all such records from all cultures 
			and all religions, there are frequent descriptions of events in 
			which some unknown benevolent group supplied man with direct help in 
			an hour of need.
 
			  
			For example, here is how a compass was 
			introduced, presumably, to those long forgotten North Americans: 
				
				And it came to pass that as my 
				father arose in the morning and went forth to the tent door, to 
				his great astonishment he beheld upon the ground a round ball of 
				curious workmanship; and it was of fine brass. And within the 
				ball were two spindles; and the one pointed the way whither we 
				should go into the wilderness.  
				(1 Nephi 16:10)  
			One of the most popular theories bandied 
			about in cultist circles is that man was seeded on this planet by 
			some inter-planetary group and that that group has kindly, but 
			remotely, observed and guided our progress ever since. 
			  
			If this were true, they have been doing 
			a lousy Job in recent centuries. We need a lot more help than they 
			have been giving us.
 In H. G. Wells' prophetic Things to Come there is a vision of a 
			world ravaged by war and divided into fierce tribes ruled by 
			warlords. A handful of surviving scientists and thinkers band 
			together and begin the task of restoring civilization by flying over 
			the planet. They call their organization Wings over the World (WOW). 
			Much of the UFO evidence suggests that a real WOW has always 
			existed. Maybe one of their members handed a caveman the first 
			flaming brand and the first wheel, just as some unknown party 
			allegedly deposited the first compass outside that Mormon tent.
 
 A friend from WOW could have handed the original Piri Re'is map to 
			some ancient Egyptian. After him it may have passed from the library 
			at Alexandria to the palace in Constantinople. The key to the grid 
			system was lost, so the map became useless.
 
			  
			However, it is known that Christopher 
			Columbus did have some strange maps when he set out for his 
			short-cut to India.1 
			  
			1 See Arlington H. Mallery. 
			Lost America.
 It is easy to speculate and even easier to leap to mind-blowing 
			conclusions.
 
			  
			We must try instead to assemble the many 
			fragments of tantalizing evidence and attempt to construct the 
			whole. To do this, we must first recognize some very unpleasant 
			facts. We must admit Just how stupid we really are.
 In recent months several different scientists attached to the 
			National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA) have issued 
			humble public statements admitting that our space program has 
			produced data which invalidates many of the most coveted conclusions 
			and beliefs of our learned astronomers. Ideas which have been 
			accepted as fact for many years have suddenly been proved completely 
			false.
 
			  
			The more we find out about the moon, the 
			less we know about it.  
			  
			Space probes to Mars and Venus have 
			tossed innumerable astronomical theories into a cocked hat Recent 
			radar probes to the planet Mercury discovered that that planet is 
			actually rotating slowly on its axis, even though millions of school 
			children have been taught for generations that Mercury does not 
			rotate. Leading astronomers are now arguing over the status of 
			Jupiter. Some now suspect that it isn't a planet at all but is 
			really a cold star.
 For the past two centuries astronomers have been peering through 
			telescopes, counting stars, and making mathematical calculations to 
			account for the motions and puckering they have observed. They hare 
			published and taught their learned conclusions as the gospel. Now we 
			know that they have been wrong in many key areas. Before the end of 
			this century all the textbooks will have to be scrapped.
 
			  
			All of the old ideas will be discarded. 
				
				"We used to think of the universe as 
				nothing more than abundant fields of stars arranged in 
				galaxies," Dr Frank Drake, Chairman of Cornell University's 
				astronomy department, said recently.    
				"But we underestimated the variety 
				and quantity of matter in space by a factor of about one 
				trillion. Which means that we were about as wrong as we could 
				be." 
			In the early 1960s deep-dished radio 
			telescopes discovered a maze of radio signals pouring in from outer 
			space.  
			  
			At first there were wild speculations 
			that we had made contact with some superdeification in some other 
			galaxy. But further study discounted this fascinating notion. 
			Instead, it was found that interstellar space is filled with 
			invisible objects which don't emit light rays but which do give off 
			powerful radio waves. These things have been dubbed quasars and 
			pulsars. They constitute one rather trivial aspect of a broad and 
			complex phenomenon.  
			  
			Our haunted planet has always been 
			bathed in mysterious electromagnetic propagation and radio waves, 
			some of them intelligent signals of unknown origin. We have been 
			aware of these signals ever since the invention of the radio 
			receiver, but we still can't account for them. All of this will be 
			discussed in depth in another chapter.
 Just as those funny flying saucers seem to be an environmental 
			mystery which has always existed on this planet, it also seems that 
			the earth's atmosphere has always been charged with unidentified 
			radio signals - some of which seem to radiate from the planet 
			itself… as if the earth were beaming signals into space in response 
			to the signals being received. Of course, the cultists contend that 
			WOW has established secret transmitters in underground caverns.
 
 Even gravity is a mystery. Newton discovered the hard way that if 
			you sit under an apple tree, you are apt to get hit on the head by a 
			falling apple. But we still don't know why. Recent experiments 
			indicate that gravity is really a slowly pulsing wave pouring across 
			space, beating about once per hour. The source of this wave and its 
			true nature are a puzzle. We thought we knew something about it 
			until our astronauts went into space and fumbled around in 
			weightlessness.
 
			  
			They found that even friction disappears 
			in space.
 R. Buckminster Fuller, the great thinker and designer, has 
			said,
 
				
				"Everything you've learned in school 
				as "obvious" becomes less and less obvious as you begin to study 
				the universe. For example, there are no solids in the universe. 
				There's not even a suggestion of a solid. There are no absolute 
				continuums. There are no surfaces. There are no straight lines." 
			Everything is up for grabs.  
			  
			We don't know anything about the 
			universe or outer space. We have in all likelihood constructed a 
			totally false history of our own race. And most humiliating of all, 
			although we have lived on this planet for at least forty thousand 
			years, we really don't know much about it. Worse still, we haven't 
			even explored it!
 Vast sections of this planet encompassing hundreds of thousands of 
			square miles have never been surveyed. There are enormous regions 
			that still have not been visited by a single scientifically trained 
			man.
 
			  
			Seasoned travellers are wearily familiar 
			with the problem of locating accurate maps. In many countries in 
			Africa, Asia, and South America detailed maps are simply 
			unobtainable because no surveys have ever been made. Those maps 
			which are available often have the rivers and mountains in the wrong 
			places. Here in the United States precisely detailed maps of many 
			areas just don't exist. There are blank spots in Maine and even in 
			New Jersey.  
			  
			The average road map doled out by 
			service stations includes only the major highways and the larger 
			towns. Unincorporated villages - and they number in the thousands - 
			can't be found on any map anywhere. The regional maps distributed by 
			the Geological Survey in Washington are often based upon surveys 
			made in 1880 or 1920, so many of them are virtually useless.  
			  
			New highways are being built so rapidly 
			that the average road map is two to five years behind.
 Travelers to inland Brazil find themselves trying to cope with maps 
			based on sketches drawn by missionaries a hundred years ago. 
			Visitors to the Himalaya Mountains have to deal with maps drawn by 
			amateur cartographers and guesswork. Vast sections of the earth's 
			oceans have not been adequately charted. There are count
 
 less islands everywhere that have never been visited, named, or 
			mapped. If WOW actually exists, they could occupy a large island in 
			the Pacific or Antarctica and nobody would ever he the wiser.
 
 We have, of course, flown over a great part of the earth. Back in 
			the 1930s Charles Lindbergh flew over Brazil and reported 
			seeing an enormous stone wall deep in the jungle. A wall that 
			stretched for miles. No explorer has ever penetrated to that wall 
			overland. We still don't know anything about it. Other flies in 
			other parts of the world have reported similar oddities and most of 
			them remain unexplored mysteries.
 
 In 1970 the United Nations issued a report which stated that 
			four-fifths of the earth's surface was inadequately surveyed and 
			charted and that tremendous areas remain unexplored altogether. The 
			cartographers who drew up the original Piri Re'is maps probably knew 
			more about our planet than we do.
 
 Despite all these facts, most of us like to pretend that our planet 
			is fully explored and that all of its many mysteries have been 
			adequately solved. We believe our history books. In fact, many 
			millions of people still cling to the thoroughly discredited 
			religious belief that mankind is only four thousand years old. 
			Science labours to ignore the mounting evidence that we may not be 
			the only intelligent life form on this planet.
 
			  
			Yet historians have always carefully 
			recorded the events which indicate that a para-human race does exist 
			alongside us. Millions of people have encountered them and thousands 
			of books have been written about those encounters.
 Now that we are zooming headlong into the Age of Aquarius, it is 
			time for us to take a new look at the world around us; time for us 
			to study those despicable erratic of archaeology and history; time 
			for us to think about the unthinkable. Our much-touted technology 
			has led us down the road to ruin, poisoned our environment, and 
			given us the implements for destroying the earth itself. If there 
			was a great superculture thousands of years ago, perhaps it followed 
			the same tragic course.
 
			  
			Perhaps even the Abominable Snowmen of 
			the Himalayas and their North American counterparts, the Sasquatch 
			of Canada, will inherit the earth, and ten thousand years from now 
			their descendants will be studying a frayed copy of an old road map 
			and speculating about us.  
			  
			Naturally, there will be scientists 
			among them who will sneer at the whole thing… and they will get back 
			to the business of trying to split the atom.
 
			  
			  
			  
			CHAPTER TWO
 THE CONTINENT 
			THAT VANISHED
 
 Every two or three years some adventurous scientist or peripatetic 
			deep-sea diver discovers lost Atlantis.
 
			  
			He usually announces Ms find during the 
			summer silly season when news is slow, and the papers are filled 
			with yarns about the Loch Ness monster and bathing beauty contests. 
			Atlantis has now been located in the Mediterranean (many times), 
			west of the Azores, south of the Azores, in the -Caribbean, off the 
			west coast of South America, off the east coast of South America, in 
			the North Pacific, in the South Pacific, of the coast of Florida, 
			and even in the Indian Ocean.
 Recently the ruins of an ancient temple of unknown origin were 
			discovered in the blue waters off the Bahamas. The newspapers 
			soberly revealed that Atlantis had been found at last. A year of so 
			later a mysterious stone pillar was spotted by divers deep in the 
			ocean off the coast of Peru. Atlantis rose again.
 
 This game has been going on for a very long time.
 
			  
			Researchers wading through 
			fifty-year-old newspapers have found them sprinkled with wondrous 
			tales of Atlantean finds. Professors and PhD's nave frequently 
			joined the clamor, bidding for publicity (and the often sizable 
			foundation grants that follow such publicity), keeping alive one of 
			the great fantasies of human history. 
			  
			It isn't even a myth or legend; there 
			isn't enough evidence of any kind to give Atlantis such stature. 
			Nevertheless, Atlantis has become an important part of our folklore. 
			Even the famous prophet Edgar Cayce discussed the lost continent 
			with the spirit world and passed along the prediction that it would 
			rise again in the stormy Atlantic in 196S-9.
 While the reality of Atlantis can be viewed with considerable 
			skepticism, the persistence of the belief in it provides some 
			interesting farts about the weird mechanisms employed by the earth's 
			phantom inhabitants to generate myths and camouflage their real 
			existence. Atlantis is no more real than visitors from Mars. Yet 
			there are millions of people who have believed wholeheartedly in 
			both. The members of WOW have carefully sowed the seeds of such 
			myths in their wake and have worked across the generations to 
			nurture them.
 
 First, how did the story of
			
			Atlantis begin?
 
			  
			It was launched by a single man named 
			Plato (427-347 B.C.). In his two dialogues Timaeus and Critias, he 
			offers a description of Atlantis and its demise nine thousand years 
			earlier. His source, he states, is a man named Critias, who had 
			heard the story from his great-grandfather Dropides, who had heard 
			it from a sage named Solon, who had heard it from an Egyptian 
			priest.  
			  
			So the whole foundation of the Atlantis 
			fantasy is based upon what a ninety-year-old man told a ten-year-old 
			boy (those are the ages given by Plato) about a tale spun by Solon 
			years before. Rather like having your great-grandfather tell you the 
			plot of a novel that someone else described to him after having 
			heard it from someone else in a far-off land.  
			  
			And that someone else hadn't read the 
			novel but had only heard about it, since the novel was nine-thousand 
			years old.
 Incidentally, the final pages of Plato's discourse are missing, so 
			even his record of this hearsay is incomplete.
 
 Scholars have devoted their lives to pondering Plato and searching 
			for archaeological evidence to support the existence of Atlantis. 
			Visit any library and you will find shelves of books on the subject. 
			New pro-Atlantis volumes appear each year. A small, indefatigable 
			cult of Atlantean believers has existed for a century or more, 
			pouncing upon each new archaeological discovery as proof of 
			Atlantis.
 
			  
			Ruins throughout Central and South 
			America have been credited to the Atlantis culture. Everything from 
			Stonehenge in England to the Great Pyramid in Egypt to the 
			monasteries in the Himalayas has been accepted by the believers as 
			further evidence of Atlantis.
 In Chapter One the premise was stated that mankind could be an 
			offshoot of some earlier superculture. The Atlantophiles have 
			recognized this partially and think of Atlantis as that superculture. 
			The psychic world has supported this contention for years by passing 
			along endless messages about the past glories of Atlantis through 
			mediums, Ouija boards, and the like.
 
			  
			Many of these messages have served as 
			the basis for some of the peculiar books that have appeared. 
			Surprisingly, some of the data in this torrent of gibberish can be 
			authenticated historically, but a pattern is hard to establish.
 There are people around the world who claim to have actually met the 
			Atlanteans themselves. These percipients (witnesses) describe 
			stately men and women dressed in colorful robes and headdresses, who 
			appear suddenly like ghosts or apparitions. People who have never 
			given Atlantis any thought at all are suddenly confronted
 
 by these entities. Such visits can last for hours according to the 
			percipients. The Atlantean takes great pains to describe the history 
			of Atlantis in detail and when the witness scurries to a library, he 
			or she finds some of the things mentioned in the literature. 
			Eventually the percipient may write a book or pamphlet himself, 
			combining what he has read with what he has been told by the entity.
 
			  
			His work is entered into the literature 
			and quoted again and again in new books by others.
 This same phenomenon occurs constantly in religion, spiritualism, 
			and ufodom, In the latter the entities claim to represent some other 
			planet and they pass along convincing (to the percipient) 
			descriptions of life on other worlds. like the Atlantean entities, 
			the UFO pilots share the disturbing ability to appear and disappear 
			in thin air.
 
			  
			The tall, bearded Atlanteans with their 
			high cheekbones and Oriental eyes are undoubtedly close brethren of 
			the picturesque spacemen who, incidentally, are most often described 
			the same way.
 In occult lore these entities have been described for centuries and 
			are called elemental. The phenomenon take many forms and undoubtedly 
			inspired the massive folklore on fairies and leprechauns, vampires, 
			and demons, and the multitude of ghouls, goblins, and banshees who' 
			have always occupied our haunted planet. They appear to have the 
			ability to assume any shape or disguise.
 
			  
			Some, if not all, seem to be the product 
			of some complicated hallucinatory process which is able to feed 
			false images into the minds of the percipients. Thus, a group of 
			people in a room can sometimes come up with contradictory 
			descriptions of an apparition. Some of the people might not see it 
			at all
 There are, of course, all kinds of psychological factors which could 
			explain some of these hallucinations and apparitions, too. But it is 
			quite remarkable that some of the messages passed along by our 
			elusive Atlanteans are identical to messages passed along to 
			unrelated witnesses who have chatted with spacemen from Ganymede (a 
			satellite of Jupiter). The same mechanism, be it psychic or 
			psychological, is clearly at work in all these cases.
 
 The phenomenon utilizes many other frames of reference. An 
			apparition might pose as an ancient Greek philosopher or as Abraham 
			Lincoln or a deceased pope. There are cases of all these. The 
			folklore of all cultures also takes into account apparitions which 
			pose as exact duplicates of living persons. In Germany such entities 
			have long been known as doppelgangers.
 
 The manifestations have also led to the creation of many minor 
			cults, such as the believers in
			
			Lemuria (which is supposed to be another lost continent) 
			and Mu, Here again, we find that a large part of the literature is 
			based upon the alleged experiences of those who have encountered 
			Lemurians.
 
			  
			In the Middle Ages many people insisted 
			they had visited the underground palaces of the fairies, and volumes 
			were written about the secret commonwealth of the little People. In 
			modern times the Dero (detrimental robots) myth has blown up around 
			the stories of people who claim they have been taken to the secret 
			caverns occupied by the ancient secret Dero culture.
 In 1944, Amazing Stories, a science fiction magazine, published 
			Richard Shaver's 'I Remember Lemuria'. Editor Ray Palmer was amazed 
			when he was swamped by thousands of letters from people who swore 
			they had experiences with Deros and Lemurians. They often described 
			things identical to the flying saucer phenomenon (which did not 
			explode on the American scene until 1947).
 
 The myth-making machinery of WOW has always been in operation and 
			the earliest thinkers and scientists recognized it. Strange 
			illusions and purposeful distortions of reality have always haunted 
			the human race. Some cults have defined the culprits as Masters of 
			Illusion, the Black Mentalists, and the X Group. For centuries it 
			was popular to accuse the devil, witches, and warlocks for these 
			bewildering manifestations. Whole religions sprang up around the 
			evidence supplied by the phenomenon.
 
 In Sweden the great mathematician Emanuel Swedenborg 
			(1688-1772) wrote huge tomes about his experiences with the 
			elementals and offered solemn warnings such as:
 
 When spirits begin to speak with a man, he must be aware that he 
			believe nothing that they say. For nearly everything they say is 
			fabricated by them, and they lie: for if they are permitted to 
			narrate anything, as what heaven is and how things in the heavens 
			are to be understood, they would tell so many lies that a man would 
			be astonished. This they would do with solemn affirmation j,, 
			Wherefore men must beware and not believe thems.«
 
 Sir Walter Scott (1771-1832), the famous novelist, made a 
			serious study of these matters, and in 1830 he published a series of 
			essays summarizing his conclusions. He noted that when trained 
			psychics encountered fairies and visited their splendid palaces 'the 
			illusion vanished1.
 
			  
			He explained: 
				
				The young knights and beautiful 
				ladies showed themselves as wrinkled carless and odious hags…
				   
				The stately halls were turned into 
				miserable damp caverns - all the delights of the Elfin Elysium 
				vanished at once. In a word, their pleasures were showy but 
				totally unsubstantial - their activity unceasing, but fruitless 
				and unavailing - and their condemnation appears to have 
				consisted in the necessity of maintaining the appearance of 
				industry or enjoyment, though their toil was fruitless and their 
				pleasures shadowy and unsubstantial.    
				Hence poets have designed them as 
				'the crew that never rest'. Besides the unceasing and useless 
				bustle in which these spirits seemed to live, they had 
				propensities unfavorable and distressing to mortals. 
			Educated theologians and scholars 
			attached to the Vatican made a sober investigation into the 
			burgeoning fad of spiritualism in the 1850s. This examination led to 
			the issuance of a Papal Bull which warned Catholics that 
			spiritualism was dangerous and the 'work of the devil'.
 Despite all these warnings, millions of people were gripped in the 
			hopeful effort to communicate with the spirit world, and the 
			elementals played the game with relish, implanting a whole new lore 
			about life on other worlds or planets. New cults were spawned and 
			dozens of frames of references were established, all based entirely 
			on the seemingly sincere messages of these characters.
 
 We were guided from beliefs in fairies and their secret commonwealth 
			to new, more scientific beliefs in interplanetary visitors and their 
			great Intergalactic Councils. The flying saucer phenomenon generated 
			a whole new set of theories and beliefs as more and more people had 
			encounters with Venusians and Martians in the back hills of Kentucky 
			and the deserts of Arizona. The crew that never rest were up to 
			their old tricks in a new guise.
 
 Once the skilled investigator recognizes just how intangible the 
			manifestations really are, he is catapulted into the more esoteric 
			world of philosophy. He struggles with the task of interpreting 
			these unreal events, trying to understand their hidden purposes. 
			This is unfortunately the route to madness. The phenomenon is fond 
			of creating allegorical situations which can not be interpreted 
			without excessive scholarship.
 
			  
			The problem is to sort out the 
			meaningful from the rubbish and to search for the hidden 
			consistencies buried in the mountains of communications from the 
			past and present.
 The scriptures of all the great religions do contain a number of 
			subtle correlations. Much of this literature deals vaguely with 
			rumors of some great past civilization. Isolated Indian tribes in 
			North and South America have legends and myths very similar to the 
			stories found in the Bible, including tales of a great deluge which 
			destroyed most of mankind thousands of years ago.
 
			  
			The Toltec Indians, for example, even 
			had a tradition about a zacuaü, a very high tower they erected, and 
			according to Ixtikochit,  
				
				"Presently their languages were 
				confused, and, not being able to understand each other, they 
				went to different parts of the earth." 
			Atlantean scholars have labored to 
			assemble all this lore as further proof that Atlantis did indeed 
			exist as a real continent, which was destroyed by some great natural 
			catastrophe.  
			  
			However, much of the information passed 
			along by the Atlantean elementals states that Atlantis was an evil 
			place, dominated by a warlike technology very similar to our own, 
			and that the Atlanteans eventually destroyed themselves - or were 
			deliberately destroyed by some greater force which took a dim view 
			of their militarism.
 In flying saucer lore we have tales passed on by the spacemen of a 
			great planet located between Mars and Jupiter and identified 
			variously as Maldek, Clarion, and a dozen other names. The 
			inhabitants of this planet learned to smash the atom and soon 
			succeeded in smashing their entire planet. It was broken into 
			thousands of bits and pieces and those fragments now constitute the 
			asteroid belt.
 
 So, one important thread runs through all this literature: a great 
			civilization once existed prior to the appearance of modern man, and 
			it was either destroyed or destroyed itself. The surviving physical 
			evidence, which will be discussed further on, indicates that such a 
			civilization did exist on this planet and that its inhabitants 
			vanished before, or soon after, man crawled out of his caves.
 
 It may be that the elementals are actually a part of the human 
			psyche and that they have been presenting us with some scrambled 
			racial memory of the distant past. like the Garden of Eden, Atlantis 
			may be nothing more than an allegory designed to give us a clue 
			about our own history. In flying saucer lore there is elaborately 
			detailed literature asserting that Venus was actually the Garden of 
			Eden and that Adam and Eve were Venusians planted here to colonize 
			Earth. Another variation on the Noah's Ark theme.
 
 Even more interesting are the contiguous activities of the para-human 
			group which has remained in constant touch with us throughout 
			history and has greatly influenced our theological and philosophical 
			ideas. They are proven liars and mischief makers, but it is also 
			possible that they have been slyly trying to tell us something about 
			ourselves. In recent years the flying saucer occupants
 
 have passed along innumerable warnings about how we have been 
			upsetting the balance of the universe with our atom bombs. They have 
			laced these warnings with bloodcurdling tales about Maldek.
 
 A controversial UFO report from Mendoza, Argentina, is rather 
			typical of these warnings.
 
			  
			On September 1st, 1968, Carlos 
			Peccinetti, twenty-six, and Fernando Jose Villegas, twenty-nine, 
			were driving home from their job at the Mendoza casino at 3:30 a. 
			m., when their car suddenly stalled. They got out to look under the 
			hood and discovered a huge circular machine hovering nearby. Three 
			beings in coveralls appeared, they said, and they found they were 
			paralyzed, unable to move.  
			  
			A foreign-sounding voice rang in their 
			heads.  
				
				'It was as though they had put into 
				our ears the tiny earplug speakers used with transistors,' 
				Peccinetd said.   
				'We have just made three journeys 
				around the sun,' the voice told them, 'studying customs and 
				languages of the inhabitants of the system… Mathematics is the 
				universal language.' 
			Then a circular screen, similar to a 
			television screen, appeared next to the object, and the two men were 
			treated to a series of images. The first was a waterfall in lush 
			country; the second, a mushroom-shaped cloud; the third, the 
			waterfall scene again but without water.
 After the entities clambered into the machine and flew off. the two 
			witnesses were able to move again. Their story contains all the 
			familiar ingredients of thousands of other UFO contact tales. First, 
			their automobile stalled, then they were paralyzed, next they heard 
			a telepathic voice, and finally they were given a simplified 
			message… and the meaning of that message is quite obvious.
 
 Police officers, doctors, lawyers, college professors, government 
			officials, and just plain folks by the thousands have shared similar 
			experiences in recent years. The members of WOW have really been 
			engaged in an all-out effort to convince us of some impending 
			disaster. It is not unusual that they should relate their warnings 
			with tales about past civilizations that followed the same woeful 
			path.
 
 The Atlantis story seems to acquire another meaning in view of all 
			this. Atlantis could be a part of our future instead of our past. 
			Perhaps we are the Atlanteans.
 
 
			  
			  
			  
			CHAPTER THREE 
			IT'S A NICE PLACE TO 
			VISIT BUT…
 Soon after be became president of the United Arab Republic, the late 
			Gamal Abdel Nasser ordered a giant eighty-foot statue moved from the 
			desert to a park in Cairo.
 
			  
			The statue had been standing for 
			uncounted centuries near the famous Steppe Pyramid. A battery of 
			engineers and workmen descended on it, equipped with builders, 
			tractors, and monstrous cranes. They struggled with the project for 
			weeks, first perplexed, then annoyed, and finally humiliated by the 
			discovery that modern technology simply could not budge the mammoth 
			piece of stone.  
			  
			This raised the even more troublesome 
			question: how had the ancient Egyptians moved the statue into place 
			to begin with?
 Archaeologists have been arguing for years about the methods 
			employed by the ancient stone masons. Some quite moronic theories 
			have not only been suggested but have been widely accepted as the 
			answer. These theories are, as usual, taught to schoolchildren. The 
			mystery is regarded as solved. Nobody asks questions.
 
 There are over ninety pyramids in Egypt alone. (There are dozens of 
			others all over the world, the largest of all is located deep in 
			China.) Most of the Egyptian pyramids were once used as the burial 
			places for pharaohs, but the Great Pyramid at Giza was never 
			employed for this purpose, and no one has an inkling why it was 
			built.
 
			  
			Some of the gigantic stones in these 
			structures and in the great temples spotted, around Egypt were 
			apparently taken from quarries hundreds of miles away. The popular 
			archaeological theory is that these stones were floated up the Nile 
			on rafts and then moved into place on wooden rollers. Since some of 
			these blocks weigh as much as five tons, this means that in order to 
			float them, the Egyptians would have had to build huge rafts capable 
			of displacing over five tons of water.  
			  
			Otherwise, they would just sink to the 
			bottom with their load. The Egyptians didn't amount to much when it 
			came to building ships. No evidence of these super-rafts has ever 
			turned up.
 There are other flaws in these theories. We are told that hundreds 
			of thousands of slaves were pressed into pyramid building during 
			certain seasons of each year. This leads us to the problem of 
			logistics. It would take a complex organization to feed these 
			hundreds of thousands daily and administer to their needs.
 
			  
			Various modern engineers and experts 
			have applied their slide rules to the problem, and the most liberal 
			estimate of the time required to construct the Great Pyramid is six 
			hundred years.
 Strangely, although the ancient Egyptians left profusive records of 
			everything else, no one has ever turned up even a single piece of 
			papyrus describing the planning or building of these massive 
			monuments. The stones were cut and dressed with such perfection that 
			a piece of paper cannot be inserted between them. Obviously those 
			early stonemasons were superb craftsmen.
 
			  
			And obviously there were a lot of them 
			in order to undertake and complete such enormous tasks.
 When there is a mystery which can't be logically explained by 
			science, cults develop which create explanations of their own. Our 
			Atlantophiles naturally agree that the Egyptians didn't build the 
			pyramids at all. Our UFO buffs claim they were built by the 
			wonderful space people.
 
 Morris K. Jessup, an astrophysicist and an early student of 
			urology, reviewed the question and suggested:
 
				
				Levitation is the only feasible 
				answer. I believe that this lifting machine was a spaceship, 
				probably of vast proportions; that it brought colonists to 
				various parts of the Earth, probably from other terrestrial 
				areas; that it supplied the heavy lift power for erecting great 
				stone works; and that it was suddenly destroyed or taken away. 
				Such a hypothesis would underwrite all of the movements of stone 
				over which archaeologists and engineers have pondered. 
			This presents us with a splendid 
			contradiction. 
			  
			If some super-society in the sky had the 
			technology to build a spaceship 'of vast proportions' and fly it all 
			the way to our humble planet, why would they have the need to play 
			around with stone blocks? If they wanted to leave behind evidence of 
			their visit, they did a poor job of it, for we never have figured 
			out the real meaning of these monoliths.  
			  
			Couldn't they have engraved a nice 
			little message for us inside the Great Pyramid, explaining the whole 
			thing in seventy-five languages? The only carvings found inside the 
			Great Pyramid are a few little scratchings in the roof of the upper 
			chamber which archaeologists regard as stonemason marks. Similar 
			marks have been found in other structures.  
			  
			Maybe they are just the ancient 
			equivalent of "Kilroy was here".
 For centuries the spirit mediums and the percipients who have 
			chatted with ghostly Atlanteans have told us that the Great Pyramid 
			really contains a hidden chamber which is crammed with goodies that 
			will explain everything to us when the proper time comes, for 
			wishing to be left out, many flying saucer contactees have repeated 
			the same promise.
 
			  
			An anthropologist named George Hunt 
			Williamson wrote in the early 1950s: 
				
				The builders of the Great Pyramid 
				buried one of their great spaceships near the structure. It will 
				be revealed - no doubt within a comparatively short time - that 
				there are many secret chambers within the Great Pyramid and that 
				its true entrance lies under the silent object that is like a 
				lion and yet like a man… the Sphinx It will not remain silent 
				much longer...*   
				* Neville Spearman Limited, 
				London.   
				On February 9th, 1960, a 
				fertilizer salesman named Reinhold Schmidt was picked up by a 
				flying saucer and flown to Egypt, according to his pamphlet, 
				Edge of Tomorrow.    
				The friendly space people conducted 
				him on a tour of those hidden chambers where he saw, among other 
				things, the true cross on which Christ had died. He was also 
				shown 'thirty-two tablets of a heavy-quality paper, rather dark 
				in color… imagine my surprise when I found the events of the 
				past, present, and future there described in modern day English, 
				in black ink, and written in beautiful longhand.' 
			These records indicated, Schmidt 
			claimed,  
				
				'The end of this present Earth cycle 
				will be 1998.' 
			So after the endless discussions of the 
			hidden chambers in the pyramid, we finally had a genuine eye-witness 
			who had been there and seen them. Unless, of course, Schmidt's 
			adventure was just another variation of the classical visits to the 
			underground fairy palaces of yesteryear.
 Science took over.
 
			  
			In 1969 a group of American scientists 
			beaded by Dr Luis W. Alvarez travelled to Egypt and set up expensive 
			cosmic ray detectors around the Great Pyramid. Their theory was that 
			any cosmic rays penetrating the pyramid and passing through hidden 
			chambers would be recorded as moving slightly faster than ray 
			particles travelling through solid stone. They fiddled with their 
			gadgets for months and did get some very eccentric readings at 
			first.  
			  
			But finally, in the February 6th, 1970 
			issue of Science, Dr Alvarez glumly announced that no hidden 
			chambers had been detected with his sophisticated apparatus. The 
			cultists all nudged each other and winked knowingly. Obviously it 
			was all a cover-up… part of the great conspiracy to keep the truth 
			from the public.
 Men have been scratching their heads over the Great Pyramid for at 
			least four thousand years. It has never really been dated, and it 
			could be considerably older. Whoever built it was so clever that 
			countless efforts to find an entrance met with failure for thousands 
			of years. Finally, in a.d. 820 the Caliph Al Mamaun launched 
			a full-scale attack on the structure, expecting to find it filled 
			with treasure.
 
			  
			His men chipped away at it, heating the 
			stones with fires and then cooling them suddenly by pouring vinegar 
			over them. Slowly the stones cracked and they worked their way into 
			the pyramid until they came upon a passageway. It was completely 
			empty.
 They found a larger passageway, now known as the great gallery, 
			which leads upwards to two small chambers. The lower chamber's 
			entrance is so small a man must enter on his hands and knees. The 
			upper chamber contains nothing but a crude stone tub which really 
			doesn't resemble the elaborately designed sarcophagi used by the 
			ancient Egyptians to entomb deceased royalty. The total absence of 
			artifacts and hieroglyphics has given archaeologists plenty to 
			speculate over. Some have suggested that the pyramid was used as a 
			kind of grain elevator and that wheat was measured out in that tub. 
			Others have tried to find astronomical significance to it.
 
 In the mid-nineteenth century the pseudoscience of pyramidology was 
			bom.
 
			  
			A writer named John Taylor published a 
			book in which he concluded that the whole purpose of the structure 
			was to preserve ardent Egyptian measurements. He was followed by an 
			astronomer, Charles Piazzi Smyth, who extended this notion to 
			include prophecies of the past and future. He measured every inch of 
			the pyramid, inside and out, and every angle. 
			  
			In 1864 Smyth published a 
			six-hundred-page book expounding his theories, and it caused an 
			uproar in archaeological circles for years afterwards. A small but 
			devoted cult still exists, still trying to validate his now 
			thoroughly discredited concepts. Most of the literature on lost 
			Atlantis also discusses Smyth and pyramidology. The UFO cults also 
			have their pyramidologists. Just as the pyramids are a cornerstone 
			in human history, they also serve as key evidence to many cults with 
			widely diversified causes.
 Aside from the few major population centers, ancient Egypt was a mud 
			hut culture. Then as now the masses lived under-nourished lives in 
			grinding poverty. Technical skills were rare. Yet somehow they 
			managed to quarry those gigantic stones, transport them, and put 
			them into place with geometric precision. We know that the Egyptians 
			did build the ninety odd pyramids (the village of Meroe on the Upper 
			Nile contains dozens of pyramids alone), plus numerous great temples 
			and tombs which are still standing.
 
			  
			But why did they build the Great 
			Pyramid?
 The Plain of Jars in Laos has been frequently mentioned in the war 
			dispatches from Indochina. Did you ever wonder how it got its name? 
			The answer is obvious: it is strewn with jars… huge stone jars. Some 
			of them are over six feet high. Some are so large they can hold six 
			men. There are over a thousand of these peculiar artifacts scattered 
			around a high plateau surrounded by mountains. They were apparently 
			carved out of limestone and granite boulders, and they've been there 
			forever. No one seems to know who carved them, when and why.
 
			  
			Why would anyone bother to spend weeks 
			carving a giant stone jar in such a remote place?
 Mysterious stone masons have left the fruits of their labours all 
			over our haunted planet. Many of these fruits make no sense at all. 
			In Costa Rica giant stone balls have been found deep in the jungles. 
			Some of these are as big as eight feet in diameter and weigh more 
			than sixteen tons. They are amazingly round and smooth. Scores of 
			smaller ones, some only a few inches in diameter, have also been 
			found. Scientists have been unable to come up with an explanation 
			for their purpose, although they are obviously man-made. Similar 
			stones have been found in Mexico and Guatemala.
 
				
				"One thing the scientists agree on 
				is that the spheres must have been very important to the 
				communities of people that made them like the jars of Laos, 
				these balls are made of granite and limestone." 
			Science Digest observed in June 1967.
			 
				
				"Using the tools they had, it must 
				have taken many years to make just one ball, even with many men 
				working on it." 
			The United States is covered with 
			strange artifacts and stone ruins of unknown origin.  
			  
			Every state boasts of several mysterious 
			sites. In West Virginia there are the remains of huge circular stone 
			structures apparently predating the Indians. In many states there 
			are rums which archaeologists have muttered about being of Roman 
			origin. Some of these sites have become minor local tourist 
			attractions. Others are marked only by brief highway signs. A random 
			few, such as Mystery Hill in North Salem, New Hampshire, have 
			attained some celebrity.
 Mystery Hill features several chambers - or tombs - topped by a 
			gigantic Sacrificial Table weighing over four tons.
 
			  
			It is supported on stone legs and is 
			carefully grooved. In 1969 the New England Antiquities Research 
			Association conducted carbon 14 tests 2 around the site 
			and concluded that it was probably built around 1000 b.c.  
			  
			2 Organic material contains 
			radioactivity which deteriorates at a known rate. The carbon 14 test 
			is a universally accepted method for measuring such deterioration 
			and determining the age of the material. The test does not work on 
			inorganic substances such as stone, of course. 
			  
			  
			Recent investigations have demonstrated 
			that some of the huge stones on Mystery Hill are carefully aligned 
			with certain stars. Each year the sun sets directly over the Winter 
			Solstice Monolith on the first day of winter, December 21, when 
			viewed from the centre of the site, the Sacrificial Table.
 The Delaware Indians have a tradition that a race of giants once 
			inhabited the region east of the Mississippi, living in enormous 
			cities and fortifications. There are innumerable references to 
			giants in other Indian lore and in ancient literature all over the 
			world, including, of course, the famous There were giants in the 
			earth in those days' biblical statement {Genesis 6:4).
 
			  
			South American Indians also have many 
			legends about giants and their special civilization. Most of the 
			tales, no matter what the source, assert that the giants were 
			unfriendly and even hostile to normal men. Bones of giants (who must 
			have been eight to twelve feet tall) have been found in the mounds 
			of Minnesota and several other places. So it is entirely possible 
			that a race of giants did exist in earlier times, and some of these 
			huge stone constructions may have been their handiwork.  
			  
			Unfortunately, science doesn't believe 
			in giants, so all this evidence has been ignored.
 There is also considerable evidence that Christopher Columbus was a 
			rather late arrival to the New World. He was probably preceded by 
			the Vikings and maybe even the ancient Phoenicians. Chinese 
			artifacts have been found in Mexico and California, so perhaps even 
			the Chinese beat Chris by several centuries.
 
 A knight from the Orkney Islands left a carving in Massachusetts in 
			the fourteenth century. Near Heavener, Oklahoma, there is a stone 
			twelve feet high, ten feet wide, and sixteen inches thick, covered 
			with ancient Scandinavian runic symbols. It was discovered by 
			Choctaw Indians in 1830, and archaeologists have been arguing about 
			it ever since.
 
			  
			Several other nine-stones have been 
			found, the most famous being the Kensington Scone, found by a farmer 
			sear Kensington, Minnesota, at the turn of the century. 
 Two more rune stones have been found in Oklahoma in recent years. 
			The last one was discovered by two school boys neat Poteau, 
			Oklahoma, in September of 1967. As usual, the archaeologists are 
			sharply divided over the validity of these discoveries. One group 
			cries hoax, even though it would requite an expert archaeologist and 
			linguist to perpetrate such a hoax.
 
			  
			Others, such as Frederick Pohl, a noted 
			Norse scholar, seem to think these stones may be authentic.8
 Fifty years before Columbus conned Queen Isabella into financing his 
			expedition, someone drew up a rough map of North America. A copy of 
			this map was discovered by Laurence Whitten, a rare book dealer from 
			New Haven, Connecticut, in 1957, It is now part of the rare document 
			collection in the Beinecke library of Yale University and is known 
			as the Yale Vinland Map.
 
			  
			Scientific investigators have dated it 
			at a.d. 1440, and as usual, the leading experts have been arguing 
			about it ever since. Some have branded it an out-and-out hoax, while 
			others regarded it as further evidence that the Vikings were 
			frequent visitors to the New World.
 More substantial evidence has been found in the form of ruins of a 
			Viking longhouse on the Ungava Peninsula in northern Canada. A team 
			from Laval University has dated it between the eleventh and twelfth 
			centuries. Numerous other ruins and artifacts have been found all 
			over North America. For example, two remarkably similar axes, both 
			apparently of medieval European origin, have been discovered in 
			Beardmore, Ontario, and Rocky Nook Point, Massachusetts.
 
 Archaeologists from the Smithsonian Institution uncovered a small 
			slab of stone covered with ciphers in 1885 near Bat Creek, 
			Tennessee. They decided it was probably the work of Cherokee 
			Indians, but modern specialists such as Dr Joseph B. Mahan of 
			the Museum of Arts and Crafts at Columbus, Georgia, have taken a 
			second look at it and disputed the old Indian theory.
 
			  
			Dr Mahan knows Cherokee and he persuaded 
			the Smithsonian to re-examine the Bat Creek stone.  
				
				"You simply can't ignore evidence," 
				Dr Mahan stated, "just because it doesn't fit current theory." 
			A similar stone was found by Manfred 
			Metcalf at Fort Benning, Georgia, in 1968.  
			  
			Metcalf was looking for stones to build 
			a barbecue grill in his backyard when he unearthed the stone. It is 
			nine inches square and covered with triangles, circles, and straight 
			and wavy lines. He passed it on to Dr Mahan, who thought the 
			markings appeared to be characteristically Mediterranean. 
 * See Frederick Pohl, 
			The VMng Explorers.
 
 
			Another scientist, Dr Cyrus H. Gordon, chairman of 
			Mediterranean studies at Brandeis University, agreed.
 
			  
			There were strong similarities between 
			the Met-calf stone and sampled of Minoan writing dating back three 
			thousand years to the Bronze Age civilization which flourished on 
			the Mediterranean island of Crete from 3000 to 1100 b.c. Dr Gordon 
			became the centre of another controversy a few years ago when he 
			announced that a sample of Phoenician writing found on a stone in 
			Brazil was authentic… after other archaeologists had denounced it as 
			a fraud.  
			  
			After all, it was hardly possible that 
			the ancient Phoenicians could have visited Brazil. Or was it?
 As for the Bat Creek stone, Dr Gordon thinks it might have been the 
			handiwork of Hebrews from Palestine during the Bronze Age. Both 
			scientists speculate that ancient Semitic tribes from the Middle 
			East may have visited North America thousands of years ago. This, of 
			course, revives memories of the lost tribes of Israel. Could they 
			have somehow found their way to this continent: and become that-lost 
			American culture described in the Mormon Bible? Dr Mali an believes 
			that some Indian tribes can be traced back to seafaring 
			Mediterranean peoples.
 
			  
			The Yuchi, he points out, are racially 
			and linguistically different from other North American tribes. Their 
			legends state, 'We came as the sun came, and we went as the sun 
			went.* Dr Mahan interprets this to mean that the YucM came from the 
			east, across the Atlantic Ocean, and then moved northwards from 
			Florida to Georgia.
 Some archaeologists tend to lump rune stones together with the 
			stones bearing Indian petroglyphs. Petroglyphs are designs carved 
			into rocks as path-markers, and thousands have been found all over 
			the Americas.
 
			  
			Although innumerable isolated Indian 
			tribes were obviously responsible for them, there are many 
			interesting similarities in the symbols used. Some of these same 
			symbols have been found carved on other ancient rocks in other parts 
			of the world, suggesting that this form of writing was universal at 
			one time… even though the races and tribes responsible could not 
			understand each other's languages and in most cases had little or no 
			contact. 
			  
			Archaeologists studiously try to 
			overlook the fact that some of these pictographs can be traced to 
			ancient Mediterranean cultures. But the runic writing is quite 
			distinct from the Indian petroglyphs. The runestones carry 
			alphabetic symbols, while petroglyphs bear picture writing loosely 
			related to the Egyptian hieroglyphs.
 The Kensington stone, as translated by Frederick Pohl, describes how 
			'eight Goths and twenty-two Norwegians' established a camp.
 
 One group went fishing, and when they returned, they found the ten 
			who had remained behind 'red with blood and dead'. The year is given 
			as 1362. Indian petroglyphs. on the other hand, were customarily 
			devoted to traU information, where to find water, and the like.
 
 One Indian pictograph of particular interest is a complex design 
			which has been found throughout North, Central, and South America. 
			It depicts a series of squares inside one another. The Hop! Indians 
			call this the Mother Earth Symbol. To the Pimas it is the House of 
			Teuhu:
 
				
				to the Cunas in Panama it is the 
				Tree of life. Anthropologist Harold Sterling Gladwin saw 
				something else in it when he studied this symbol carved on the 
				wall of Casa Grande, Arizona.  
			In his book, Men Out of Asia, he noted 
			that the Mother Earth symbol is identical with the Minoan labyrinth 
			depicted on coins from Knossos, Crete, circa 200 b.c.  
			  
			The famous labyrinth was said to have 
			been built by Daedalus to hide the half-man, half-bull Minotaur. Dr 
			Gladwin and Dr Clyde Keeler of Milledgeville, Georgia, both seem to 
			think that the Indians' use of the ancient labyrinth symbol is 
			evidence of the influence of the early Minoan culture.
 In the eariy 1960s Angelos Galanopoulos, a Greek scientist, proposed 
			still another theory for Atlantis. He suggested that sunken Minoan 
			cities of Crete might have supplied the basis for the Atlantis 
			legends. According to his theory, Plato got his dates wrong. 
			Atlantis may have disappeared only a thousand or so years before the 
			historian heard the tale, not nine thousand years before.
 
			  
			It may have been one of the Greek 
			islands, possibly Thera, Divers and archaeologists working in the 
			waters there in recent years have uncovered all kinds of evidence 
			indicating that the Minoan culture came to a very abrupt end. So 
			abrupt that craftsmen left their tools next to unfinished works and 
			fled. The explanation currently in vogue is that a sudden volcanic 
			eruption destroyed the islands. Dr Galanopoulos has been partially 
			successful in matching Plato's description of Atlantis with what is 
			now known about Thera.  
			  
			Dr Bruce C. Heezen, an oceanographer, 
			believes that the eruption occurred around 1400 b.c. Needless to 
			say, other scientists and schools loudly dispute this date.
 We do know that early Crete was the centre of an impressive culture, 
			that great cities and temples were built there, and that it was a 
			major naval power. It is not likely, however, that Crete and Thera 
			could have lived up to Plato's description of the super-civilization 
			of Atlantis.
 
 Still we have all the perplexing evidence of the rune stones and 
			other artifacts scattered around this continent, which demonstrate 
			that men from Europe and possibly from Crete and Thera did visit 
			America in pre-Columbian times. It is even possible that groups 
			settled here and built forts and temples, the remnants of which have 
			served to augment the beliefs of dozens of cults and fringe 
			societies.
 
 In a learned dissertation on petroglyphs published by the 
			Smithsonian in 1937.
 
			  
			Julian H. Steward frowned on the 
			arguments that attempt to prove that, 
				
				'Egyptians, Scythians, Chinese, and 
				a host of other Old World peoples, including the Ten Lost- 
				Tribes of Israel, invaded America in ancient days'.  
			He noted that, 
				
				'devotees of the subject have 
				written voluminously, argued bitterly, and even fought duels'. 
			Now, over, 
				
				"thirty years later the Smithsonian 
				is slowly changing its tune. They have stopped blaming the 
				Indians for all these carved slabs. The Indians have been 
				denying credit all along, of course.
 "When the white men first arrived here [in British Columbia, 
				Canada] in I860, the West Coast Indians had already incorporated 
				the carvings in their legends,1 Phil Thornburg, a petroglyph 
				expert in Victoria, Canada, said recently. They showed them to 
				white explorers and explained they were left by an ancient 
				civilization and were the hub of creation."
 
			Thomburg points to what appears to be a 
			carving of a Chinese dragon, known in Indian legend as a sisutl.
			 
				
				"There does seem to be an Oriental 
				background to them," he observes. 'Being carved in sandstone, 
				it's virtually impossible to say what age they are. I've found 
				some that were buried under more than a foot of topsoil.
 "Now this wasn't the kind of topsoil that would have washed over 
				them. This was formed there, placing the age of the carving 
				around five to seven thousand years - which is really ancient 
				for this country."
 
			Thomburg found one petroglyph on 
			Vancouver Island that had a hole worn completely through it by 
			dripping water - proof that it had been there for a very long time.
			   
			At another site he found a carving which 
			had crumbled when a massive tree grew straight up through it.
 Petroglyphs which were definitely the work of Indian tribes often 
			tell interesting stories about hunts and battles, and in several 
			instances, encounters with the little people and other phantom 
			inhabitants. Some contain solemn warnings that the valley or 
			mountain ahead is the abode of these sinister phantoms.
 
 The Cherokee Indians have legends about the strange entities who 
			resided around Chimney Rock. North Carolina. White people have also 
			seen them occasionally.
   
			In 1806 the Rev. George Newton 
			reported to the Raleigh Register, 
				
				"a very extraordinary vision of 
				thousands of beings in the air. They possessed a glittering 
				appearance resembling the human form and were seen on or about 
				Chimney Rode on the thirty-first of July last". 
			Researcher Angelo CappareHo found this 
			testimony by a Mrs. Reaves, one of the alleged witnesses: 
				
				I looked towards the Chimney. I was 
				absolutely amazed, for south of Chimney Rock and floating along 
				the side of the mountain was a huge crowd of white, phantomlike 
				beings. Their clothing (and filmy as it looked, I can only call 
				it 'clothing') was so brilliant a white it almost hurt my eyes 
				to look at them… Although I felt weak, somehow, it left a solemn 
				and pleasing impression on my mind. 
			Chimney Rock is only one of the 
			countless haunted places on this haunted planet.
 
			  
			  
			CHAPTER FOUR
 TOWERS OF GLASS AND THEORIES OF 
			PUTTY
 
 Vitrify is a ten-dollar word meaning to change into glass.
 
			  
			Glass is made by heating sand (silica) 
			and/or various oxides of silicon, boron, phosphorus, and other 
			materials, then cooling the result rapidly to prevent 
			crystallization. The process is fairly simple, and men have been 
			manufacturing glass for thousands of years. When the first atomic 
			bomb was exploded in New Mexico in 1945, it not only left a big hole 
			in the ground, but the tremendous heat melted the sand and fused it 
			together in glasslike fragments.  
			  
			These scorched particles were identical 
			to the objects known as tektites. Tektites have been found all over 
			our haunted planet and have baffled science for years. One recent 
			expedition found tektites scattered over an area six thousand by 
			four thousand miles from Tasmania to north of the Philippines and 
			from the East Indies to the east coast of Africa.  
			  
			These were analyzed as being 
			approximately seven hundred thousand years old.1 
			  
			1 See Tektites and Geomagnetic 
			Reversals', B. P. Glass and Bruce C. Heezen, Scientific American, 
			July 1967.
 
 Like nature, science abhors a vacuum. So most books on mineralogy 
			blandly assert that tektites are of 'meteoric origin'.
 
			  
			It is a nice little theory, and 
			everybody seems to believe it. However, a majority of all meteorites 
			are made out of solid iron, and most are vaporized by the intense 
			heat of friction when they enter our atmosphere. Substances capable 
			of melting into glass would, of course, burn up before they hit the 
			surface of the earth.
 In 1969 a group of NASA scientists dished up a delicious new version 
			of the meteorite theory. They announced that tektites were from the 
			moon.
 
			  
			Aeons ago, they speculated, a huge 
			meteor plummeted into the moon, striking with such force that its 
			impact hurled tons of moon dust into space. This lunar material 
			attained escape velocity and passed into an orbit around the earth, 
			where it gradually was sucked downwards by gravity, entered the 
			earth's atmosphere, melted, and fell into the Pacific Ocean.  
			  
			So another mystery was solved… unless 
			you happen to have an eighth-grade education, a slide rule, and a 
			basic knowledge of the mechanics involved.  
			  
			Then you would find that the impacting 
			meteor would have to be of enormous size and be travelling at 
			fantastic velocity in order to accomplish the first step - casting 
			debris beyond the moon's gravity. Such a meteor would, in all 
			probability, affect the moon in other discernible ways - such as 
			changing its orbit. Next, a long series of spectacular coincidences 
			would be necessary for the debris to enter the proper orbit at the 
			proper time so that it would lapse into a retrograde orbit around 
			the earth.  
			  
			Finally, since tons of tektites are 
			scattered in paths across the Pacific floor, and since we know that 
			less than 5 per cent of a mass entering the earth's atmosphere is 
			likely to survive and hit the surface, the quantity of lunar 
			material necessary to produce those tektites must have been larger 
			than the original impacting meteor.
 Hunks of glass have fallen from the sky, however. In fact, since 
			ancient times all kinds of odd junk has been dropping on us, ranging 
			from stone pillars and metal wheels to huge blocks of ice and vast 
			quantities of real blood and even raw meat. Science conveniently 
			ignores everything but the iron lumps which, they presume, are 
			pieces of old planets drifting around in space.
 
			  
			To astronomy's credit, we do know that 
			there are groups of this debris in the earth's orbit around the sun, 
			and we can predict annual meteor showers which occur as we pass 
			through this mess.
 One chunk of glass and metal crashed into a driveway in Cannifton, 
			Ontario in September 1968. Wesley Reid looked at it and saw that it 
			was too hot to handle. After it cooled, he found he had a brownish 
			object weighing about twelve ounces. When it was tested by experts, 
			they found it was made of glass laced with a small quantity of pure 
			zinc. Whatever it was, it didn't seem to be a part of a man-made 
			satellite (which contain very little glass anyway), and it 
			definitely fell out of the sky.
 
 Earth's phantom inhabitants are always dumping their garbage on us. 
			Flying saucer enthusiasts have been collecting and analyzing this 
			junk for years and have found pieces of pure aluminium, magnesium, 
			tin, copper, slag, and endless varieties of silicon. Unfortunately 
			for them, none of this aerial debris seems to support their 
			contention that UFOs are space ships from another planet. Nor has 
			any known meteorite strewn such materials or tektites in its path.
 
 The discovery of tektites and vitrified stones among the ancient 
			ruins of Baalbek has inspired another popular ufological myth: that
			
			Baalbek once served as a spaceport for rocket ships from 
			another world. A Soviet ethnologist.
 
			  
			Professor M. Agrest, proposed the 
			theory in an article in Moscow's Uteraturnaya Gazeta in 1959. 
			He also suggested that Sodom and Gomorrah were destroyed by an 
			atomic bomb. Lot's wife, he asserted, did not turn into a pillar of 
			salt but was actually reduced to a pile of ashes when she ignored a 
			warning not to linger behind Lot's fleeing party. 
				
				Baalbek is located in Lebanon, east 
				of Beirut and north of Damascus, Syria. In ancient times it was 
				a thriving city filled with great temples dedicated to Baal, the 
				sun god. The pillars and stone slabs (some weighing many tons) 
				still standing are impressive… but no more impressive than the 
				scores of other similar ruins scattered throughout the Middle 
				East.   
				Enormous ruins of this type can be 
				found deep in the heart of inhospitable deserts, raising once 
				again the question of how the ancient peoples managed to quarry, 
				transport, and erect these monuments with crude tools and a 
				minimum of mechanical aids. Yet, quite obviously, they did 
				manage… and managed well. 
			In 1948 an expedition from the 
			University of Chicago unearthed the remnants of an ancient village 
			thirty miles east of KMuk, Iraq.  
			  
			Dr Robert J. Braidwood estimated 
			that the village had been settled some eight thousand years ago. 
			Baalbek is, in comparison, a modern city.
 Professor Agrest's theories were a bombshell to the assorted cults, 
			particularly the flying saucer believers. He regarded the presence 
			of tektites as evidence that atomic powered rockets had once used 
			the vast stone platforms at Baalbek as launching areas. Apparently 
			he did not know that vitrified ruins are a common phenomenon all 
			over the world.
 
			  
			Forts and towers so old that there are 
			no legends to account for them can be found throughout northern 
			Europe and the British Isles and the walls of many of these are 
			vitrified. At some point in the distant past these structures must 
			have been subjected to tremendous heat, though not necessarily from 
			the blast of some nuclear powered rocket.
 Lightning is the explanation most frequently offered by science. But 
			there is no evidence to indicate that lightning bolts vitrify stone 
			or even sand, although we really know very little about lightning 
			and its effects. It would take dozens of lightning bolts all 
			striking the same spot to produce these vitrified monuments. In some 
			parts of the world, such as an area of eighteen thousand square 
			yards outside of Cuzco, Peru, whole hillsides have been vitrified.
 
			  
			Theories of volcanic activity and 
			glacial movements have been offered to account for these, but none 
			of these theories really work.
 There are legends describing how the planet was once bathed in fire. 
			Maybe more than once. So this vitrification could be the product of 
			some nearly forgotten natural catastrophe.
 
 On October 8th, 1871, a gigantic fireball or meteor roared over the 
			Midwest, causing a rash of disastrous fires in several states, 
			including the famous Chicago fire. Thousands of people were killed 
			in Illinois and Wisconsin, and vast areas were ravaged by flames 
			that night. A similar fiery visitor from space could have caused the 
			vitrifications.2
 
			  
			2 See Mysterious Fires 
			and lights by Vincent Gaddis foe a fully documented description of 
			the 1871 catastrophe.
 
			
			Another strange phenomenon could be to blame. From time to time 
			overpowering waves of heat from an unknown source are concentrated 
			in specific areas. Figueira, Portugal, suffered one of these 
			mysterious blasts of heat for two minutes on July 6th, 
			1949.
 
			  
			The temperature soared to 158 degrees. Hundreds of people 
			collapsed in the streets, while thousands of chickens and ducks 
			keeled over dead, and the Mondego River dried up suddenly in several 
			places, killing countless fish, We don't understand this phenomenon 
			at all, and it is possible that even more intense heat waves of this 
			type have occurred in the past.
 The followers of Agrest were not about to accept such mundane 
			explanations for the vitrification of Baalbek, however. A young 
			astronomer, Dr Carl Sagan, presented a paper before the American 
			Rocket Society on November 15th 1962, in which he repeated Professor 
			Agrest's speculations and urged that ancient myths and legends be 
			re-examined for possible clues to an early visit by an 
			extraterrestrial-civilization.
 
			  
			Other researchers scoured the ancient 
			records of India and found things such as the Mahabharata, a 
			document dating back more than three thousand years, which describes 
			a 'blazing missile' that hurtled out of the sky into the midst of an 
			attacking army, producing 'a radiance of smokeless fire' which 
			flattened chariots, ignited forests, boiled rivers, and produced 
			dark clouds of death.  
			  
			All of this sounded uneasily like an 
			atomic attack. In the Mausala Parva, another ancient historical 
			account, there is a vivid description of some kind of death-dealing 
			ray which began as a small, bright glow, grew into a shaft of 
			brilliant light, and then consumed its target. This phenomenon was 
			accompanied by violent winds, peals of thunder in cloudless skies, 
			and earth tremors.  
			  
			Terrible rakshasas, shaped like huge 
			mounds, attacked another Indian army from the sky and fired 'weapons 
			winged with gold', thunderbolts, and hundreds of fiery wheels.
 Even in the Bible we are told how the prophet Elijah was saved by 
			balls of fire which wiped out a hundred soldiers and their captains 
			(Kings II:i).
 
 
 
 That would have been around $96 b.c.
 
			  
			There are innumerable stories of this 
			type from all cultures indicating that WOW is armed with 
			spectacularly advanced weapons and doesn't hesitate to use them 
			against mortal men. So, one cultist conclusion about the vitrified 
			forts is that they were attacked by flying saucers which focused 
			deadly heat rays on them and their occupants. However, the entire 
			desert between Damascus and Baghdad is littered with blackened 
			cocks.  
			  
			Thousands of square miles seem to be 
			charred, not by the sun but by some long forgotten holocaust.  
			  
			Did WOW lay waste to all of Mesopotamia? 
			Or did some horrible natural disaster wipe out the great 
			civilization that once thrived there?
 
			  
			  
			CHAPTER FIVE
 STRONG MEN AND 
			STUPID ENTERPRISES
 
 Four thousand years ago Great Britain was populated by a small group 
			of people barely out of the Stone Age.
 
			  
			They had a few primitive tools made of 
			bones, and they probably eked out a living with only the greatest 
			difficulty. Anthropologists estimate that there were probably about 
			three hundred thousand of them. They were undoubtedly divided into 
			warring clans and factions, since factionalism is a natural state of 
			man.  
			  
			Yet somehow, thousands of these people 
			managed to get together to spend many generations quarrying huge 
			stones (some weighing thirty tons) in the Prescelly Mountains of 
			Wales and hauling these enormous blocks 240 miles to Salisbury. 
			There they systematically arranged these stones in a circle, 
			following measurements so precise that they were able to construct a 
			mathematically correct astronomical computer.
 It's called Stonehenge.
 
 Like the Great Pyramid, Stonehenge appears to have been a pointless 
			and impossible exercise. Thousands of workers had to be fed, clothed 
			and housed for generations as they laboured on the profitless 
			project. Top-flight administrative talent must have been necessary 
			to plan and organize the work and supervise its execution.
 
			  
			Architects had to design the monument 
			with care before the first block of stone was chipped out of the 
			hillside. Above all, we are asked {by the archaeologists) to believe 
			that these early primitives had the motivation necessary to dedicate 
			themselves to such an awesome task. We are also asked to believe 
			that they pushed and hauled these monstrous stones up and down 
			hills, across rivers, through forests and soupy bogs on sledges and 
			wooden rollers.  
			  
			Then somehow, they managed to stand the 
			slabs on end, lifted other stones on top of them, and built the 
			whole thing so securely that it would last for four thousand years.
 Plainly, the whole thing is quite absurd.
 
 In his definitive book, Stonehenge Decoded, astronomer 
			Gerald S. Hawkins catalogues these absurdities and offers the 
			educated estimate that the construction of Stonehenge required at 
			least 1.5 million man-days of physical labour. He calculates that it 
			took three centuries to build. That's ten generations.
 
			  
			Ten generations of primitive people who 
			were somehow convinced that it was worth while to arrange a pile of 
			giant stones in a circle on an English plain. 
				
				"For generations the work on 
				Salisbury plain must have absorbed most of the energies 
				-physical, mental, spiritual - and most of the material 
				resources of a whole people," Hawkins observed. 
			There are others, of course, who prefer 
			to believe that the early Britons didn't build Stonehenge at all.
			 
			  
			To them, it is obviously the work of the 
			Atlanteans or even the wondrous space people.
 If Stonehenge were the only existing megalithic monument of this 
			type in Britain, Hawkins' work would be more acceptable. 
			Unfortunately, there are several hundred of these stone circles 
			scattered about the British Isles, many of them just as mysterious 
			as Stonehenge. We must therefore assume that all the Stone Age 
			Britons were frantically engaged in monument building for at least a 
			thousand years.
 
			  
			If the scientists have dated Stonehenge 
			correctly, then its construction occurred around the same time that 
			the Minoan culture blossomed on distant Crete. The Great Pyramid had 
			already been built or was in the final stages. So far as we can 
			tell, the Indians had not yet appeared in North and South America.
 On Lewis, the northernmost island of the Outer Hebrides, many 
			hundreds of miles north of Stonehenge, there is another group of 
			giant standing stones arranged in a circle. Called Callanish, this 
			ring consists of thirteen blocks set around a large central stone. 
			It is erected in a desolate, hard-to-reach place, again posing the 
			questions, how and why did the early builders put it there?
 
			  
			Since Callanish is somewhat cruder than 
			Stonehenge, Hawkins speculates that perhaps it was built first, and 
			the builders applied what they had learned from that effort to the 
			later construction on the Salisbury plain. But the two sites are 
			separated by a vast distance and expanses of water. In order for the 
			theory to work, we need evidence that the early Britons were also 
			great travellers and had a society developed enough so that they 
			could travel in large groups. The small, wandering tribes couldn't 
			meet these criteria.
 Astronomers and scientists have been measuring and studying these 
			sites for centuries, and the general conclusion is that the stones 
			were arranged in such a way that they deliberately aligned with 
			certain stars and phases of the moon to form a crude computer which 
			acted as a calendar. Hawkins fed his own calculations into a modern 
			electronic computer and produced numerous charts and tables 
			demonstrating such correlations. In essence, when a man stands in 
			the centre of the Stonehenge circle specific stars (or the sun or 
			moon) appear directly over specific stones at specific times of the 
			year in a manner which had to be planned by the builders.
 
			  
			Hawkins noted: 
				
				Some 240 Stonehenge alignments 
				translated into celestial-declinations. For whatever reasons 
				those Stonehenge builders built as they did, their final, 
				completed creation was a marvel. As intricately as an 
				interlocking series of astronomical observing instruments (which 
				Indeed it was) and yet architecturally perfectly simple, in 
				function subtle and elaborate, in appearance stark, imposing, 
				awesome, Stonehenge was a thing of surpassing Ingenuity of 
				design, variety of usefulness, and grandeur - in concept and 
				construction an eighth wonder of the ancient world. 
			Considering the enormous amount of 
			effort that must have gone into its construction, Stonehenge ranks 
			as the costliest calendar in the world.
 Earlier investigators tried to explain Stonehenge as the work of the 
			Romans, the Danes (similar constructions stand in Denmark), and the 
			Druids, as esoteric priesthood which entered Britain from France in 
			500 B.C. Stonehenge had been around for at least one thousand years 
			when the Druids arrived, but nevertheless, Druidism has become 
			closely allied with Stonehenge.
 
			  
			Even today, members of the Most Ancient 
			Order of Druids make an annual pilgrimage to the site to perform 
			their rites - rites which they claim date back to the days of 
			Atlantis, incidentally.
 Hawkins discovered that a significant cycle occurs every 18.6 years 
			at Stonehenge. He calls it midwinter moonrise, for the moon rises 
			over one particular stone every 18.6 years. Then he points out with 
			some glee a statement by the ancient historian Diodorus (circa 50 
			b.c): The Moon as viewed from this island appears to be but a little 
			distance from the Earth and to have on it prominences like those of 
			the Earth, which are visible to the eye. The account is also given 
			that the god visits the island every nineteen years, the period in 
			which the return of the stars to the same place in the heavens is 
			accomplished.'
 
 What god visited the British Isles every nineteen years? Could 
			Stonehenge have been constructed to predict the appearances of some 
			alien being? This would have given those ancient stonemasons a 
			strong religious motive for constructing it.
 
 Who ever planned Stonehenge had to have a knowledge of mathematics 
			and astronomy. Did the Stone Age Britons possess such knowledge ? Or 
			was the information passed along to them somehow? Were they 
			following orders, just as Moses followed the specifications given to 
			him by Jehovah for the construction of a gold ark (Exodus 25)?
 
			  
			The gods and demons of all cultures have 
			always had a penchant for ordering men to build huge seemingly 
			useless temples, tombs, and artifacts.
 Soon after Gerald Hawkins published a summary of his findings in 
			Nature, October 26th, 1963, he became the centre of controversy. 
			Mathematicians, astronomers, and archaeologists who had never been 
			near Stonehenge assaulted his thesis and dissected his semantics. He 
			did leave many unanswered questions - largely because they were 
			unanswerable.
 
 Twenty miles from Stonehenge there is another ancient wonder - the 
			mammoth mound at Silbury.
 
			  
			This is a man-made mound of earth 130 
			feet high, covering over five acres. Scientists estimate that it was 
			constructed around 1800 B.C., which means that while thousands of 
			early Britons were starting work on Stonehenge, other hundreds or 
			thousands were pointlessly hauling baskets of dirt to Silbury to 
			build one of the largest mounds on Earth. 
			  
			In 1S48 a group of investigators 
			burrowed a tunnel into it, going from the top to the bottom in hope 
			of finding some clue. All they discovered were some picks made from 
			red deer antlers. Recently these objects were given the carbon 14 
			test and were found to be from around 800 B.C. This was most 
			upsetting to the theorists who believed the mound was at least a 
			thousand years older than that.  
			  
			At the present time a team of American 
			and British archaeologists are busy digging new holes in the Silbury 
			mound, searching for new clues.
 Man-made mounds of unknown origin and purpose number in the 
			thousands all over this haunted planet. In Ireland they are called 
			sidhe, or fairy mounds, and are purportedly the homes of the little 
			people. St Patrick is supposed to have stood on Croagh Patrick, a 
			mound in County Mayo, when he ordered the snakes out of Ireland. 
			Hundreds of these mounds are scattered throughout the United States, 
			where they are popularly called the Indian mounds, even though the 
			Indians have no legends to account for them.
 
			  
			Some of the mounds in Ohio, Minnesota, 
			and in the Southwest are skilfully laid out in geometric patterns 
			which can be seen only from the air. When viewed from above, they 
			represent elephants, birds, snakes, and other animals. Whoever laid 
			these things out apparently intended them to be seen from the air. 
			From the ground they appear to. be nothing more than symmetrical 
			hills with flat tops.
 Aerial surveys of South America have revealed elaborate, ridged 
			fields and earthwork (some covering fifty thousand acres and some as 
			long as a thousand miles) in at least five scattered locations. The 
			ridged field at Lake Titicaca in the Andes covers two hundred 
			thousand acres and is spread over 160 miles.
 
			  
			These man-made ridges and mounds may 
			have been part of a complex agricultural and irrigation system.1 
			  
			1 See "Pre-Columbian Ridged 
			Fields', J. J. Parson and W. M. Denevao, Scientific American, July 
			1967.
 Other mounds and ridges of this sort are spread throughout Europe 
			and Asia. Stone chests found in mounds in the Mississippi Valley are 
			identical to chests dug up in mounds in Yorkshire, England. But most 
			of the mounds have yielded little or nothing to patient diggers. Yet 
			the presence of these mounds everywhere is an indication of a 
			worldwide culture in prehistoric times which regarded mound building 
			as an important activity.
 
 We do know that mound building persisted as part of the burial rites 
			of ancient peoples. Early historians such as Homer and Herodotus 
			describe these rites. Alexander the Great is supposed to have spent 
			a fortune to erect a huge mound over the grave of his friend 
			Hephaestion.
 
			  
			The kinds of ancient Scythia on the 
			Black Sea were buried under mounds. Archaeologists assume that this 
			mound building practice led eventually to the development of the 
			Egyptian pyramids. The desert sand was. a poor mound-making 
			material, so the Egyptians switched to stone blocks.  
			  
			But how did mound building spread to the 
			Americas in the pre-Indian epoch?
 Flying saucer cults read great significance into the fact that many 
			modern UFO sightings seem to congregate around the old 'Indian' 
			mounds. Strange lights, bobbing and weaving and blinking in 
			intelligent patterns, periodically cavort above the mounds of the 
			Ohio and Mississippi valleys. Since UFOs have a tendency to appear 
			in the same geographical locations year after year, century after 
			century it is possible that ancient peoples saw them too and erected 
			the mounds for them.
 
			  
			Some flying saucer writers have borrowed 
			a page from Professor Agrest's Baalbek theory and suggested that the 
			flat-topped mounds were intended as UFO. airports.
 If the great mounds were merely monuments to the dead, they were 
			costly ones. Even with modern bulldozers and steam-shovels, it would 
			take much time and money to construct, a mound 130 feet - high and 
			five acres square, like the Silbury mound. It is difficult to 
			visualize tribes of prehistoric people engaging in this activity for 
			months or years. It is even more difficult to think of them planning 
			the mounds so they would present specific symbols when seen from the 
			air.
 
 Now. it has been established that while the early Britons were 
			simultaneously erecting Stonehenge and piling dirt for the Silbury 
			mound, they were also carving giant figures in nearby hillsides. The 
			figure of a great white horse is cut into the summit of a hill in 
			the Berkshire Downs.
 
			  
			At Ceine Abbas a giant caveman is traced 
			upon a hillside. He carries a club, and his male genitalia are 
			prominently displayed. A similar figure, the Long man at Wilmington, 
			was emasculated by early Christians. There are many others spotted 
			from Australia to Africa to the United States, all obviously meant 
			to serve as landmarks for unknown pilots cruising the virgin skies.
			 
			  
			The tradition for making these landmarks 
			survived until at least fifteen hundred years ago, for that is the 
			apparent age of the famous
			
			Nazca Lines found in the Peruvian 
			desert.  
			  
			Nobody paid much attention to these 
			lines until the early 1940s. Since then they have become an 
			important facet of Atlantean and, flying saucer lore.
 From ground level the Nazca Lines are merely a jumble of paths made 
			by brushing aside the stones and pebbles of the desert. There is 
			little rain or natural erosion in the area, so the lines have 
			remained intact for at least seven hundred years and possibly even 
			for fifteen hundred (estimates vary}. Seen from the air, the 
			clearances form the outlines of spiders, birds, fish, assorted 
			monsters or unknown animals, and numerous squares and rectangles… 
			some longer than two football fields.
 
			  
			Dr. Maria Reiche, a German 
			astronomer, has lived at Nazca for twenty years, carefully charting 
			all the lines by viewing them atop a high ladder.  
			  
			Daniel Cohen remarked in Science 
			Digest, May 1970: 
				
				In spite of such devotion to her 
				work, she is regarded by some scientists as a woman obsessed 
				with a theory, rather than a careful scientist. Dr Reiche had 
				produced all sorts of correlations between the lines and the 
				positions of the sun, moon, and stars. She postulates a gigantic 
				"desert calendar' with which the ancient Peruvians could mark 
				the passing of the years.    
				Her opponents argue that with so 
				many lines and so many astronomical bodies with which to make 
				alignments, it,is possible to work up many correlations, but 
				that they are meaningless.    
				The Inca-Nazca people who created 
				these lines were massacred in the wars which followed Francisco 
				Pizarro's invasion of Peru in the 1500s. The Inca civilization 
				destroyed by Pizarro apparently came along centuries after the 
				lines were laid out An ancient Inca road slices across the 
				desert, ruthlessly severing the lines. It would seem that the 
				Incas regarded the lines as insignificant.    
				Nevertheless, hundreds of people 
				must have worked for years, if not for generations, in planning 
				these lines and scratching away the topsoil to render them. The 
				Nazca lines remain as another of early man's energetic but 
				seemingly pointless enterprises. 
			On Easter Sunday, 1722, Dutch admiral 
			Jaakob Rogeveen landed on an island in the Pacific some 
			twenty-two hundred miles from the coast of South America. The first 
			things he saw were hundreds of giant statues squatting near the 
			water line, staring out to sea.  
			  
			They were huge, eyeless heads mounted on 
			small stone bodies. Some were as high as thirty-six feet.
 Admiral Rogeveen had discovered not Atlantis but
			
			Easter Island - a pitifully barren 
			volcanic island with an area of forty-five square miles, with almost 
			no trees, and with no wild-life except for hordes of bothersome 
			insects. It was populated by cannibalistic tribes of Polynesian 
			origin who had apparently migrated there centuries before.
 
			  
			The current population is 270, but at 
			one time it was considerably larger. Intertribal wars and raids by 
			early slave traders whittled the population down.
 The aku statues were quarried from volcanic rock. Some weigh as much 
			as thirty tons. Since wood is practically non-existent on the 
			island, the statues must have been hauled out of the quarries with 
			ropes and sheer muscle power, dragged down to the beaches and raised 
			"upright with more muscle power. Many of the monuments were topped 
			with a hat, or pukao, made out of red Tock.
 
			  
			Some of these pukaos weighed five tons. 
			How the natives raised these five ton carvings to the tops of the 
			erected statues is another puzzle.
 Like the builders of Stonehenge, the Easter Islanders had to 
			accomplish their task with the crudest kind of tools. Each statue 
			must represent months or years of labour. There are over six hundred 
			on the island. The statue building came to an abrupt end for some 
			reason. So abrupt that the workers dropped their stone chisels on 
			the spot. Their tools have been found in the quarry, next to two 
			hundred unfinished statues, some of which measure sixty-six feet 
			long.
 
 Various expeditions have visited Easter Island and tried to piece 
			together the story of the ahu builders, but the surviving natives 
			have only the vaguest legends. During the tribal conflicts of the 
			eighteenth and nineteenth centuries, many of the statues were 
			overturned
 
 and destroyed rather contemptuously. Remnants of the island's 
			culture were erased by the wars, slavers, a smallpox epidemic, and 
			missionaries who ordered the destruction of pagan artifacts. The 
			latter included ancient wooden tablets covered with an unknown form 
			of writing. Only a few samples of these tablets remain in scattered 
			museums.
 
 Scientists who have concluded that the Easter Islanders are 
			Polynesians blithely overlook the fact that megalithic structures 
			are virtually unknown in Polynesia and that the Polynesians never 
			developed a form of writing. One Easter Island legend stresses that 
			wars were waged between a tribe of long-eared people and a tribe of 
			short ears. The short ears won and presumably ate all the long ears.
 
			  
			Perhaps the long ears were the ahu 
			builders.
 Easter Island is so isolated that the early settlers must have been 
			marooned there, and lacking wood for boat-building, remained out of 
			touch with the rest of the world for centuries, while they developed 
			their own peculiar culture. They did have a complicated religion, 
			and it is possible that the statues were some part of it.
 
			  
			The red hats could have some meaning, 
			for even the American Indians have legends and prophecies about gods 
			in red hats. But there are also intriguing legends of red-haired 
			beings in such distant and isolated places as Borneo, and the 
			ancient gods of Europe and Asia were often described as having red 
			or blond hair. Modern UFO contactees claim that the space people who 
			ride around in flying saucers have long red or blond hair, too.
			 
			  
			So it is not surprising that some 
			cultists speculate that members from WOW may have visited Easter 
			Island and that the ahu statues are tributes to them, each statue 
			symbolizing one appearance of a god.
 Scores of giant red-haired mummies have been found in a cave 
			twenty-two miles from Lovelock, Nevada, in the last sixty years.
 
			  
			The first ones, discovered in 1912, were 
			between 6.5 and 7 feet tall. Artifacts found in the same cave have 
			been dated by carbon 14 tests. Apparently, the cave had been 
			occupied as far back as five thousand years. The local Piute Indians 
			have legends about these giants, describing them as being 
			cannibalistic. 
			  
			In her book, Life Among the Piutes 
			(1882), Sarah Winnemucca Hopkins wrote that the last of the 
			red-haired giants were exterminated by the Piutes in the nineteenth 
			century.  
				
				'They would dig large holes in our 
				trails at night,' Mrs Hopkins reported.    
				'Our people would fall into these 
				holes… That tribe would even eat their own dead. Yes, they would 
				even come and dig up our dead after they were buried and would 
				carry them off and eat them.' 
			Atlantis lore also describes giant 
			red-haired cannibals who behaved almost like traditional vampires.
			 
			  
			Some authors have speculated that the 
			red-haired giants invaded Easter Island from South America, and the 
			cannibalistic rites of the Easter Islanders were inherited from 
			them.
 There is now an American military base on Easter Island, and 
			recently the workmen and heavy equipment constructing an airfield 
			were diverted to raise one of the flattened statues. It took a heavy 
			crane to do the job that was once done by hundreds of dedicated 
			natives engaged in another of early man's impressive but pointless 
			enterprises.
 
 Easter Island has been a favorite of National Geographic for years, 
			and the cultists have had a field day inventing explanations for the 
			mystery. But there are many other Pacific islands even more remote 
			and very rarely visited which pose far more baffling questions.
 
			  
			The city of Metalanim on the 
			south-eastern shore of Ponape Island in Micronesia is now in ruins, 
			but it once could have housed two million people. No one knows who 
			built it or when. Some of the stone blocks in those ruins weigh 
			fifteen tons, and the stone used in the city is not from the island. 
			Gigantic waterways or canals intersect the city, some of them large 
			enough to float a battleship.  
			  
			Who built this enormous place, and how 
			did they move those huge stone blocks across the Pacific to the 
			island? Whatever happened to the two million residents?
 Three thousand miles to the south-east of Fonape Island, on tiny 
			Maiden Island in the line Island chain there are the ruins of forty 
			Stone temples whose architecture is identical to that of Metalanim, 
			Basalt roads lead from these ruins straight into the Pacific Ocean.
 
			  
			The island is uninhabited and covered 
			with guano (bird droppings). But if we draw an imaginary line 
			southwards from Maiden for twelve hundred miles, we arrive at 
			Rarotonga in the Cook Islands. Here another ancient road of basalt 
			blocks rises out of the ocean.
 Innumerable other hard-to-reach islands scattered throughout toe 
			Pacific are dotted with enigmatic ruins, canals, and roadways from 
			some long lost culture. They all seem to be interrelated, as if they 
			were all once part of some great civilization. It would be 
			prohibitively expensive to organize a proper scientific expedition 
			to visit and study all of these far-flung ruins systematically.
 
			  
			Besides, their existence doesn't fit in 
			with any of the current anthropological theories. Suppose some 
			scientist should find that they date back ten thousand years or more 
			and are the remnants of some super-civilization of the past? No 
			matter how substantial his evidence might be, he would be 
			immediately crucified by his colleagues and drummed out of all the 
			scientific societies.
 Obviously. Metalanim was built by cannibals with stone chisels, and 
			those canals served their religious rites to the water gods.
 
 Believers in the lost continents of Mu, Pan, and Lemuria (which may 
			have been one place) noisily embrace these tidbits as evidence that 
			a great land mass did exist in the Pacific at one time and that it 
			was populated with a highly advanced race while the Egyptians, 
			Britons, and Cretans were all fashioning stone axes.
 
			  
			One cultist tradition, passed along by 
			talkative elementals and members of WOW, is that Lemuria preceded 
			Atlantis. After Lemuria sank into the Pacific, the Atlantis culture 
			got underway and flourished for 14,000 years before it, too, sank 
			10,500 years ago.* 
			  
			* See Eklal Kueshana, The 
			Ultimate Frontier.
 
			A mystical archaeologist named 
			
			James Churchward is largely 
			responsible for the modern revival of interest in Mu. In the early 
			part of this century he travelled through Central and South America 
			probing into ancient ruins and trying to decipher stone carvings and 
			petroglyphs.
 
			  
			Then he published a series of books 
			which combined scientism and socialism (that is, he applied the 
			scientific method to dubious fragments of evidence) to support his 
			contention that a supercontinent once existed in the Pacific. In his 
			view, Easter Island served as a kind of factory, and the great stone 
			heads manufactured there were shipped off to other parts of Mu.
			 
			  
			The poorly investigated ruins of the 
			Pacific islands and the great island mounds (yes, huge man-made 
			mounds are found on many of these islands) were all a part of that 
			ancient civilization, he said. He leaned on scrambled translations 
			of stone carvings and vague legends of undefined origin. These were 
			mixed in with the flat statements of elementals and strange Vise 
			men.
 Churchward also saw evidence or traces of Mu in the ruins of the 
			Mayan civilization in Central America and the Aztec and Incan 
			cultures further south. He compiled charts which compared the 
			writing of Maya with the hieroglyphs of Egypt, and he constructed 
			the ancient alphabet of Mu. Ultimately, he produced precise maps of 
			Mu and tried to demonstrate how the mysterious ruins found in the 
			United States were linked to that remote continent.
 
			  
			Socialists everywhere leaped on to his 
			bandwagon, and an enormous body of Mu literature has developed, but 
			science remains unconvinced.*
 *
			
			See The Lost Continent of Mu. The 
			Sacred Symbols of Mu, Cosmic Forces of Mu, The Children of Mu, 
			Cosmic Forces of Mu - Book 2, all published by Neville Spearman.
 
 Actually, there is considerable merit in Churchward evidence, even 
			though his conclusions and his bold statements about Mu history can 
			be questioned.
 
			  
			A fantastic culture of stone builders 
			and mound builders, predating modern man by centuries or even 
			thousands of years, obviously did exist all over this planet The 
			only possible explanation for the many Pacific ruins, such as the 
			huge stone arch found on the coral atoll of Tonga-Tabu (two upright 
			columns weighing seventy tons each, topped by a crosspiece weighing 
			twenty-five tons), is that these islands must have somehow been 
			linked together by a land mass in the distant past.  
			  
			The culture of this mysterious land 
			spread throughout the world. Then an unthinkable catastrophe 
			occurred. A catastrophe which altered the face of the whole earth 
			and wiped out everything but the most durable constructions of that 
			doomed race. In effect the slate was wiped dean. The ancient world 
			was destroyed and a new race slowly emerged.  
			  
			But we are still haunted by racial 
			memories of our planet's past.  
			  
			Every race and every culture has 
			preserved - and even guarded - memories of that earlier epoch. 
			Unfortunately, modern science has boxed itself in and dedicated 
			itself to proving Darwin's theory of evolution and other theories 
			which supply a rational, but not necessarily valid, explanation of 
			man's origin and past. 
			  
			
			Back to Contents
 
			  
			  
			CHAPTER SIX
 A FUNNY THING HAPPENED ON THE WAY 
			TO EXTINCTION
 
 Want to discover a lost city and be entered in the annals of 
			archaeology?
 
			  
			It's easy, according to James Randi, the 
			famous magician and escape artist who has spent considerable time 
			probing into the ruins of Asia and South America. Just visit an 
			out-of the-way place and ask the natives for directions to the 
			nearest lost city, Randi explains. There are thousands of these 
			structures an every continent, and only a comparative handful have 
			been recognized by archaeology.  
			  
			Those prehistoric stonemasons were 
			ubiquitous, and they left their works everywhere.
 A young geologist named Karl Mauch found the lost city of 
			Zimbabwe in southern Rhodesia in 1871 simply by asking an ivory 
			trader for directions. Mauch's story is filled with high adventure. 
			The trader, a German-American named Adam Renders, rescued him from a 
			tribe of hostile natives and led him to the site of the ancient 
			ruins.
 
			  
			Mauch decided Zimbabwe was actually the biblical gold centre 
			of Ophir, where the fruits of King Solomon's mines were collected. 
			But all he and Renders found were a series of granite structures on 
			top of a steep bill, filled with winding passageways and tunnels. 
			 
			  
			The largest was the Elliptical Building roughly 830 feet in 
			circumference and thirty-three feet high. Nearby were two towers. A 
			cave on a cliff some distance away has proven to have unusual 
			acoustics.  
			  
			When someone speaks in the cave, his voice can be heard 
			in the Elliptical Building but nowhere else.  
				
				'Doubtless, the native 
			priests put this phenomenon to nefarious use,' L Sprague de Camp, a 
			reformed science fiction writer, notes. 
			Archaeologists have been arguing about Zimbabwe for one hundred 
			years.  
			  
			The ruins have been dated variously from a.d. 700 to 1500. 
			They have been credited to everyone from the Phoenicians and the 
			Egyptians to the naked Bantu tribesmen. Their workmanship is rather 
			crude when compared with the far more impressive structures of Asia, 
			the Pacific, and South America. Nevertheless, someone - we'll 
			probably never know who - went to the trouble of dragging thousands 
			of granite bricks to the top of a hill deep in the African
 jungle twelve hundred years age and building an elaborate 
			fortress-temple filled with labyrinths and passageways whose only 
			apparent purpose is to drive archaeologists mad,
 
 The city of Timbuktu was little more than a legend until the closing 
			years of the nineteenth century, when French adventurers crossed two 
			thousand miles of the Sahara wasteland and found it on the banks of 
			the Niger River in what is now the country of Mali. It was settled 
			in ajo. 1087 and was once a large, thriving trade centre.
 
			  
			Today it 
			has a population of about eighty-five hundred.1  
			  
			1 Population figures for most parts of tie world are debatable. The 
			figures used in this book ate up-to-date estimates from theofficial 
			statistics of the United Nations and sources such as the Hammond 
			World Attas. 
			  
			The architecture of Timbuktu is not 
			particularly Impressive, and the city is most noted for the hundreds 
			of storks who reside there.
 Since a prominent city Uke Timbuktu could become lost, in modem 
			times it is not surprising that even larger and more impressive 
			cities,' such as Angkor Wat could get lost altogether. Angkor was 
			only a myth until explorers stumbled on to it in Cambodia in 1857.
 
			  
			It contains enormous temples and pyramid-like structures apparently 
			related to the mysterious structures of the Pacific islands. The 
			walls are covered with statues and bas-reliefs, and the origins of 
			the city are lost in a welter of half-remembered legends. Local 
			natives still speak of the great godlike beings who built the place. 
			Hard facts are rare, One story popular soon after Angkor's discovery 
			is that the city was abandoned suddenly (probably around a.d. 1300) 
			in the same way that the Easter Islanders threw down their tools in 
			their quarries and fled.  
			  
			At least it is obvious that Angkor was 
			the product of an advanced culture of engineers and stonemasons and 
			that their culture vanished rather suddenly.
 History demonstrates that men have often built imposing, elaborate 
			cities, flourished in them for hundreds or even thousands of years, 
			then deserted them to live in simple grass huts on their perimeters. 
			Wars and natural calamities often played a part in this pattern, of 
			course. Great cultures have risen and then died out. Men returned to 
			simpler ways of life. It is a natural order of things.
 
			  
			A thousand 
			years from now people may be living in thatched shacks in New Jersey 
			and on Long Island within full view of the decaying towers of 
			Manhattan. They may tell the children about the peculiar ancients 
			who built the towers as part of the strange region which worshipped 
			the great god Money.
 In the Middle East the little country of Jordan is filled with Roman
			ruins predating the Christian era. A large Roman theatre with a 
			seating capacity of four thousand can be found near Amman. There are 
			great temples and triumphal arches and countless stone columns 
			lining dead streets paved with large stone blocks.
 
 Far to the south of Amman, in the midst of the unfriendly desert, 
			the traveller enters a narrow, gorge which leads through the cliffs 
			to an ancient city right out of the Arabian nights. This is Petra, 
			carved out of the red sandstone cliffs and filled with stately 
			columns and temples. This Arab Shangri-la was constructed around 700 
			b.c. and must have housed thousands of people. Food, water, and 
			supplies had to be brought in through the gorge - the only approach 
			- from miles away.
 
			  
			Thousands of men must have laboured for 
			generations, hacking these monuments out of the walls of this hidden 
			valley. Some of the ruins are pre-Roman. There are ancient tombs, 
			and a narrow stone staircase leads to an area on top of a cliff 
			where two twenty-foot obelisks are located on 'the high place' - a 
			platform measuring forty-five by twenty feet.  
			  
			Perhaps Professor Agrest would regard it as another launching platform for nuclear 
			rockets.
 The culture that built Petra is lost in legend and archaeological 
			confusion, but in the city's final days it was used as a hideout by 
			desert bandits.
 
 For the most part, believers in Mu, Atlantis, and flying saucers 
			have ignored the ruins of the Middle East and Africa, concentrating 
			instead on the lost cities of Central and South America. The fairly 
			recent Mayan, Inca, and Aztec civilizations cannot account for all 
			these ruins. There is evidence that another, possibly far more 
			advanced, culture thrived in the Americas in earlier times. Remnants 
			of that civilization may have been handed down to the Indians who 
			followed.
 
 Tiahuanaco, a fabulous stone ruin high in the Andes Mountains, has 
			inspired more curiosity, speculation, and nonsense than any other. 
			It has been the subject of countless books and articles and has been 
			used to support the beliefs of nearly every outlandish cult going.
 
			  
			In recent years there have been innumerable flying saucer sightings 
			and appearances of little glowing green men around Lake Titicaca, 
			which is 12,644 feet above sea level, Tiahuanaco is at the 
			south-east end of the lake. Although the ruins cover only about one 
			sixth of a mile, they feature impressive tumuli (man-made mounds), a 
			fifty-foot high pyramid, and a number of stone platforms and 
			underground chambers.  
			  
			The famous Gateway of the Sun is an arch 
			weighing nearly ten tons. Archaeologists believe that the Tiahuanacans 
			were part of an empire that preceded the Incas by two thousand years, but they left no -written record, and there are no local 
			legends about them.  
			  
			When the Incas latest conquered the Lake 
			Titicaca region, they found Tiahuanaco abandoned.2
 
			2 See Road in ike Sky by George Hunt Williamson, Neville Spearman. 
			
			While many of tie structures in Petra were carved from the sandstone 
			cliffs in place, same of the walls in Tiahuanaco were whittled out 
			of huge blocks weighing as much as sixty tons and then somehow moved 
			into place. Giant statues also stand around the site.
 
			  
			One weighing 
			twenty tons has been moved to a museum in La Paz. In their book, The 
			Great Idol of Tiahuanaco, Hans Bellamy and P. Aljan offer an 
			interpretation of the symbols found in a huge statue discovered in a 
			Tiahuanacan temple. They claimed the symbols recorded astronomical 
			knowledge of a very advanced order.
 Erich Von Daniken, author of
						
						Chariots of The Gods, 
			visited the Andes is his search for evidence that spaceships had 
			visited the Earth in prehistoric times. He describes seeing a 
			twenty-thousand stone 
			block near the ruins of the Incan fort of Sacsahuaman.
 
			  
			Daniken 
			explains: 
				
				It is a single stone block the size of a four-storey house. It has 
			been impeccably dressed in the most craftsman like way; it has steps 
			and ramps and is adorned with spirals and holes… the whole monstrous 
			block stands on its head. So the steps run down-ward from the roof; 
			the holes point in different directions like the indentations of a 
			grenade; strange depressions, shaped rather like chairs, seem to 
			hang floating in space.    
				Who can imagine that human hands and human 
				endeavor excavated, transported, and dressed this block? What power 
			overturned it? What titanic forces were at work here? And to what 
			end? 
			The fortress of Sacsahuaman is surrounded by a wall sixty-feet high, 
			containing stones weighing as much as two hundred tons. Two hundred 
			tons!  
			  
			Morris K. Jessup, a qualified investigator, viewed the 
			fortress and described these stones.
 All of them crudely rough quarried and were then ground into their 
			designated niches in the structure by pushing them back and forth in 
			situ, until they fitted so closely, completely, and accurately that 
			a knife blade can not be inserted between them. This is a logical 
			and practical shortcut to effective stone fitting, which we have not 
			qualified in modern engineering.
 
 Science writer Joseph Goodavage questioned Jessup's theory in Flying 
			Saucers-UFO Reports, No. 4.
 
			  
			The stones, he pointed out, 
				
				… had to be lifted into the air. placed roughly into their proper 
			positions, and then by some force inconceivable to us, shoved back 
			and forth, grinding down the roughly hewn surfaces until they fitted 
			smoothly and perfectly into their proper niches.    
				To lift, swing into 
			position, then rub the massive weight back and forth (against 
			enormous friction) without loosening its snugly fitting neighbors 
			was no job for simple aborigines or even for an advanced Inca 
			culture; the fact is that Sacsahuaman was ancient long before the 
			Incas appeared on the scene. 
			To add to the mystery, some of the larger stones found in the Andes 
			ruins were quarried in a valley two hundred toiles away.  
			  
			Somehow 
			these enormous blocks of stone had to be transported up and down 
			mountains to their final resting place. Those fond archaeological 
			inventions, wooden rollers and rafts, couldn't have been used. So 
			how did the ancient builders accomplish this task?
 A possible explanation taken seriously by some scientists - and 
			loudly berated by others - is that these monuments were built in a 
			time when the surface of the earth was actually different from what 
			it is now. A time when the Andes were level with the rest of the 
			land. Hans Schindler Bellamy prowled around Lake Titicaca and 
			claimed that he found traces of marine sediment indicating that the 
			Great Deluge had once engulfed the area.
 
			  
			This of course was evidence 
			that the ruins had been built before the deluge and were many 
			thousands of years old.
 Two Frenchmen, Louis Pauwels, editor of the magazine Planite, and 
			Jacques Bergier, a nuclear physicist, seem to go along with Bellamy 
			in their book, 
			
			The Morning of the Magicians. They propose that the 
			Earth was once inhabited by a giant race which built the mounds and 
			monoliths and maintained a worldwide civilization with key centers 
			in the Andes, New Guinea, Mexico, Abyssinia, and Tibet.
 
			  
			They were 
			the true Atlanteans and were destroyed by some great cosmic 
			disaster.
 The evidence reviewed thus far does indicate that this planet was 
			once occupied by a single great culture or a series of intertwining 
			cultures which possessed secrets of engineering and stone building 
			beyond anything known by the ancient Minoans, Romans, had Britons. 
			They constructed their monuments in isolated places, such as the 
			islands of northern Scotland, the Pacific, and the Andes Mountains, demonstrating an incredible sense of purpose as well as 
			awesome perseverance.
 
 Our anthropologists and archaeologists have been struggling to 
			uncover and understand the history of the past four thousand years. 
			They have steadfastly refused to consider the possibility that 
			mankind may be only the latest race to infest the Earth, that other 
			races and other civilizations may have thrived here and died here.
 
			  
			One of the increasingly popular themes in science fiction is the 
			notion that an earlier super-race built space ships and sent their 
			members off to visit the stars.  
			  
			Now those space travelers are 
			returning to home base in their flying saucers, and they're looking 
			around in unhappy confusion, asking,  
				
				'Where did everybody go? Who 
			are all these pitiful little ants shooting at each other?' 
			Alfred Wegener, an obscure German meteorologist, died in 1930 after 
			suffering fifteen years of ridicule, slander, and contempt at the 
			hands of his peers and colleagues.  
			  
			He was branded a fool because he 
			believed that the earth once contained two large land masses which 
			had gradually split up and drifted apart to form the six continents. 
			Every schoolboy who has ever studied a map of the globe has reached 
			the same tentative conclusion, for the great land masses do seem to 
			conform like the pieces of a massive jigsaw puzzle.  
			  
			Wegener's 
			evidence was a bit more complicated than that, however. He 
			considered fossils from different continents, climatic changes, and 
			specific geological formations, such as mountains which seem to 
			display marked similarities on the different continents. But science 
			was not ready to consider the theory of continental drift in 1915. 
			It was easier to denounce Wegener, dissect his ideas with more 
			popular theories, and consign the books to the scrap heap.  
			  
			When 
			Wegener died in 1930, his theory seemed to die with him.
 In the late 1950s, the Wegener controversy long forgotten, a new 
			crop of scientists began to explore the oceans, and new data were 
			fed into computers. Mountain ranges were discovered under the 
			oceans, laid out in ways which confirmed Wegener's earlier 
			speculations. Almost overnight the continental drift theory became a 
			new scientific fact. The National Science Foundation has now 
			committed $5.4 million for new tests and studies.
 
			  
			Alfred Wegener may 
			soon have the last laugh.3
 3 The Confirmation of Continental Drift, Patrick M. Hurley, 
			Scientific American, April 196S. Also, 'Jigsaw of the Primeval World", 
			Life, January 30th, 1970.
 
 
			
			Rock layers at specific levels in South America have been found to
			match identical layers in Africa, indicating that both land masses 
			were once a single unit.
 
			  
			The current guess is that 150 to 200 
			million years ago there were two supercontinents. They broke apart 
			and drifted away from each other slowly. They are still moving 
			slowly, almost imperceptibly, and their movements have been measured 
			by satellite photos and other means. North America is moving away 
			from Europe at the rate of an inch per year.
 New instruments are able to measure the magnetic fields of rocks on 
			the ocean's bottom. These measurements indicate that the Earth's 
			magnetic field has frequently shifted, the North Pole becoming the 
			South Pole and vice versa. Such magnetic shifts have occurred at 
			least 171 times in the past seventy-sfac mil Bon years -further 
			proof that the Earth's crust is wriggling about.4
 
			  
			4 See "Reversals of the Earth's Magnetic Field'. Allan ^px. 
			Scientific American, February 1967. 
			
 What all this means is that, about two hundred million years ago 
			during the age of the great reptiles - the Paleozoic age - this was 
			an entirely different planet. Perhaps it harboured life forms now 
			unimaginable to us.
 
			  
			Then it broke up, and new continents were 
			formed, new climatic changes occurred, the physical environment 
			itself may have changed. These changes could have brought about the 
			sudden or gradual change of the life forms as they altered to adapt 
			to the new conditions. Some of the puzzling erratics discussed in 
			Chapter One could have been produced by a form of intelligent life 
			now lost and forgotten.  
			  
			But a lot of other changes can occur in two 
			hundred million years. It is doubtful if even the most advanced 
			civilization could produce any quantity of monuments and artifacts 
			which could withstand millions of years of erosion and geological 
			change.
 The Atlantophiles are not too happy with the continental drift 
			theory because it virtually excludes the possibility that any large 
			land mass could have existed between North America and Europe. It 
			might not rule out Mu or Lemuria, however. Other stubborn cultists 
			are already leaping on to the continental drift bandwagon and 
			claiming one of those two land masses as their favored lost 
			continent.
 
 Our flimsy knowledge of the very ancient past is based entirely upon 
			the discovery and interpretation of fossils found in the various 
			lock layers of the Earth's crust. This inexact science called 
			paleontology is only two hundred years old. We haven't dug deeply 
			enough or studied things thoroughly enough to reach reliable 
			conclusions about the distant past.
 
			  
			So many of the facts commonly 
			accepted today are only educated guesses.
 If the Earth has suffered truly cataclysmic changes in the past two 
			hundred million years, we must first know of and understand those 
			changes completely before we can accurately assess the meanings of 
			rock formations. It seems unlikely that we will ever be able to 
			develop methods for collecting evidence that will give us conclusive 
			truths about the Earth's past. Astronomers and mineralogists were 
			astounded and upset by the rocks our astronauts scooped up off the 
			surface of the moon, because they indicated that the moon was four 
			billion years old or even older, and it may be even older than the 
			Earth itself.
 
			  
			Some astronomers had been pushing the theory that the 
			moon was really just a chunk of the Earth that had been scooped out 
			of the Pacific Ocean area and tossed into space somehow.  
			  
			That theory 
			and many others went down the drain when our first space module 
			dropped on to the Sea of Tranquillity.
 Geologists and paleontologists have developed reasonable evidence 
			that the Earth has passed through several glacial periods, or ice 
			ages. These seem to be cyclic, with minor ice ages occurring every 
			twelve thousand years or so and with major glacial periods taking 
			place over longer periods. These ice ages suggest a really major 
			catastrophe - a sudden shift of the Earth's entire axis.
 
 If you lived on the planet Uranus, the seventh planet from the sun, 
			you would be exposed to a pseudo-ice age every 21.5 (Earth) years.
 
			  
			Our knowledge of Uranus is admittedly flimsy, and when and if we 
			ever manage to visit it we may find that many of the currently 
			accepted facts about the planet are erroneous, just as our moon 
			landings disproved many of the previously accepted facts about our 
			own satellite. In any case, the best astronomical information 
			indicates that Uranus has a very wobbly axis and that it flips over 
			about four times for each of its circuits around the sun. (A Uranus 
			year is 84 Earth years.)  
			  
			A resident living on a fixed point on 
			Uranus would find himself shifting drastically away from or towards 
			the sun every 21.5 years. If the planet were closer to the sun, 
			these shifts could produce dramatic changes of climate.
 It is possible that the Earth's orbital mechanics include similar 
			fluctuations of the axis over longer periods. Scientists have 
			figured out that there are minor climatic changes on Earth every 170 
			years due to minor axis shifts. The magnetic polarity of our planet 
			is quite unstable. The magnetic South ^ole is not a fixed point but 
			moves steadily in a two-hundred-mile circle. As already noted, the 
			poles reverse themselves every few million years. Studies of the 
			rock levels of the last Ice Age have produced evidence that major 
			shifts of the Earth's crust or the planet's entire axis occur every 
			12,000 years or
 
 so. Such shifts would change the climate completely; frigid areas 
			would suddenly be in the tropic zones, water would inundate land 
			areas, and of course, all life would be affected. Sea shells and 
			fossils have been found in the heart of the Sahara desert, 
			indicating that it was once covered with water.
 
 In a stimulating article in the Saturday Evening Post of January 
			16th, I960, zoologist Ivan T. Sanderson documented the 
			amazing results of one of these planetary inversions. Prehistoric 
			mammoths found preserved in the frozen muck of Siberia had mouthfuls 
			of unswallowed 
			plants, as though they had been quick frozen while munching happily 
			on their feeding grounds.
 
			  
			Sanderson pointed out that the only way 
			these animals would have been so splendidly preserved was to have 
			been exposed to an incredible drop in temperature. TMs could have 
			occurred in several ways, he pointed out cautiously. The earth's 
			crust could have shifted very suddenly, carrying the animals farther 
			north very rapidly, the entire axis could have tucked over, or some 
			cloud of frigid gases from space could have suddenly engulfed the 
			entire planet.  
			  
			Whatever the case, the discovery of these animal 
			carcasses is solid evidence that some unexplained calamity took 
			place with fierce suddenness thousands of years ago.
 Decades earlier an Austrian mining engineer named Hass Horbiger had 
			developed a fanciful theory to explain the Earth's early history. He 
			envisioned huge spheres of ice crashing into the planet and talked 
			of captive moons, which predate our present moon, entering 
			retrograde orbits, their gravity tearing up our seas and reshaping 
			the Earth's surface.
 
			  
			His eight-hundred page Glazial Rosmogonie, 
			published in 1913, enraged the astronomers and scientists of Germany 
			and Austria.  
			  
			The late Willy Ley, the German rocket authority and 
			science writer summed it up when he said. To pick flaws in this 
			theory is about as easy - and as pleasant - as gathering Japanese 
			beetles from an infested flower bed.'
 But Horbiger found a powerful ally, another Austrian named Adolf 
			Hitler. In 1925 Horbiger delivered this ultimatum to the scientific 
			world:
 
 The time has come for you to choose - whether to be with us or 
			against us. While Hitler is cleaning up politics, Hans Horbiger will 
			sweep out of the way the bogus sciences. The doctrine of eternal ice 
			will be a sign of the regeneration of the German people. Bewarel 
			Come over to our side before it is too late!
 
 Powerful backers materialized, and Horbiger set up offices and 
			recruiting campaigns for his doctrine of eternal ice. His scientific critics were soon subjected to 
			horrifying harassment and cringed in terror as Wei took on all the 
			dimensions and power of a poetical party.
 
			  
			Every good Nazi had to 
			declare,  
				
				'I swear that I believe in the doctrine of the eternal ice.' 
			With the disintegration of Nazi Germany Wei also seemed to melt 
			away.  
			  
			But recently Horbiger's concepts were resurrected by 
			Pauwels 
			and Bergier in The Dawn of Magic.  
				
				"There have been four geological 
			epochs," they state flatly, "because there have been four moons." 
			The earlier epochs were influenced by gravitational changes and 
			factors which produced giant animals and plants, 
				
				'… and in a world 
			peopled by monsters there appeared this first man of immense size 
			bearing also no resemblance to us and possessed of a different kind 
			of intelligence.'  
			Cosmic rays became stronger in those days, they 
			tell us, and produced a vulgar mutation. Survivors of this race of 
			giants overlapped into the modern epoch and are mentioned in the 
			folklore of many races, usually being described as evil and violent 
			characters.
 One of Horbiger's disciples was Hans Bellamy, who sifted myth and 
			legend to find farther proof for the doctrine of eternal ice. It is 
			not unusual that the Wei believers turned to the Atlantis literature 
			and found in it some of the evidence they sought.
 
			  
			The Atlantophiles 
			had also scoured folklore and uncovered innumerable references to 
			earlier global disasters.
 Although scientists sneer at the use of myths as evidence, it is 
			obvious that all the isolated races of mankind managed to preserve 
			the same kind of stories. Of all the bits and pieces assembled from 
			these ancient tales, the most common is the universal account of a 
			great flood which occurred simultaneously over the entire planet (if 
			the assorted legends have been dated correctly).
 
			  
			Many Indian tribes 
			in the Americas have myths about arks and Noah-like personalities 
			who survived the flood. If we take these things at their face value, 
			we can assume that the Earth did experience a phenomenal rising of 
			the waters in fairly recent times, that a large part of the land 
			surfaces were inundated, and that some human beings escaped because 
			they had been warned in advance and had fled to high places or had 
			constructed ships which were sufficiently seaworthy to withstand the 
			torrents.
 The flood legends form the cornerstone of the Atlantis myth. A 
			colorful politician named Ignatius Donnelly was responsible for the 
			revival of interest in
			
			Atlantis in the late nineteenth century. He 
			collected hundreds of fragments of archaeological erratics and wrote
			a number of best selling books.
 
			  
			He also managed to find time to 
			serve as a U.S. congressman and state senator and even ran for 
			vice-president on the Populist ticket in 1901.  
			  
			Donnelly's 
          
          				
						Atlantis - The Antediluvian World
			is still in print and makes some sense, even 
			though it fails to prove the existence of Atlantis. It does prove 
			that other civilizations existed before the present epoch. Donnelly 
			also advocated a theory claiming that a visiting comet had upset the 
			balance of the Earth in earlier times and produced catastrophic 
			effects. Horbiger carried the theory several steps further.
 Comets have always served as a kind of scientific catchall. Although 
			we actually know very little about these celestial objects (since 
			we've never managed to catch one), astronomers like to believe that 
			these fireballs are made of ice and that the huge chunks of ice that 
			have crashed out of the sky for centuries were really from the tails 
			of comets.
 
			  
			In recent years many prominent scientists have seriously 
			explained flying saucers as being the debris from comets' tails.
			 
			  
			During the UFO flap of 1966 the late Senator Robert F. Kennedy sent 
			out form letters stating that,  
				
				'One explanation of this phenomenon 
			connects the lights that are seen with the gaseous tails of comets.' 
			If a comet ever did strike the Earth, it might make life here rather 
			uncomfortable.  
			  
			Scientists have estimated that if a solid meteorite 
			only a mile in diameter should strike the planet intact, the impact 
			and concussion could destroy a large part - or all - of life here. 
			There are a number of large meteor craters, all very ancient, which 
			prove that such collisions have taken place.
 Ancient civilizations could have been destroyed by any one of these 
			potential catastrophes as well as such things as enormous 
			earthquakes and volcanic eruptions. Our planet is really unstable. 
			Mountains are always blowing up. The crust is constantly shifting, 
			generating earthquakes which take a frightening toll in lives and 
			property every year. Rivers overflow and floods occur with appalling 
			regularity. Enigmatic fireballs can sweep down oat of the sky 
			suddenly and unexpectedly and burn up whole cities like Chicago.
 
 On top of all these hazards, we have the most dangerous factor -man 
			himself. He has made war an economic and political necessity. The 
			ruins of the Middle Hast and Europe stand as testimony to his 
			ability to destroy whole civilizations by himself without any 
			outside help.
 
 Among the traditions of the Hopi Indians is the story of Kuskurza, 
			the third world or epoch, which lay 'in the east' (Atlantis again!). 
			They developed flying machines called patuwvotas according to
 
 Frank Waters in his Book of the Hopi:
 
				
				'Some of them made a patu-wvota, and with their creative power made it fly though the 
			air. On this many of the people flew to a big day, attacked it, and 
			returned so fast no one knew where they came from. Soon the people 
			of many cities and countries were making patuwvotas and flying on 
				them to attack one another. So corruption and war came to the 
				Third World as it had to the other.' 
			With present day inflation, theories are the cheapest commodity 
			around, costing less than a penny a gross. It is better to stick 
			with the available facts.  
			  
			Those facts are that one or more 
			civilizations preceded early man and left behind magnificent 
			megaliths as proof of their artistic and engineering abilities. 
			Something destroyed those civilizations, or perhaps they destroyed 
			themselves. Great civilizations have risen and died within the past 
			two thousand years alone.  
			  
			Our own civilization may be following the 
			same unhappy route, and two thousand years from now the Earth may 
			again flip over on its axis. Great sheets of ice may bury the rubble 
			of our cities. Silt and stones will wash over our towers and 
			fortresses. And somewhere a handful of beings, reduced to savagery 
			by necessity, will tell tales around their camp fires about us and 
			how we even dared to reach for the moon.  
			  
			Thousands of years after 
			that, a new breed of anthropologist will collect those tales and 
			scoff, even though all the tribes from all parts of the planet will 
			have the same tales to tell. It is plainly impossible, those 
			scientists will say, that any super civilization could have existed 
			in prehistoric times. And primitive man could hardly have flown to 
			the moon.  
			  
			It is folly to even listen to such nonsense. It's far more 
			fruitful to measure and study those giant faces carved into Mount 
			Rushmore… faces that are obviously replicas of ancient gods.
 Probably they were carved by the same primitives who erected that 
			great ring of stones in the British Isles, they will observe sagely.
 
 Mankind is like a broken record repeating the same refrain over and 
			over again.
 
			  
			  
			  
			CHAPTER SEVEN
 SCIENTISTS IN COLLISION
 
 In 1950 a new meteor raced across the horizon, spewing a long trail 
			of crisp ideas that left the scientific establishment sputtering in 
			rage.
 
			  
			The meteor was a book dealing with history, astronomy, and archaeology. It was written by a psychiatrist and published by a 
			major Madison Avenue house. Science editors and book reviewers 
			across the country greeted it with awe, comparing its author with 
			Galileo, Newton, Darwin, and Einstein.  
			  
			The public responded by 
			making the book a best seller. It was titled Worlds in Collision and 
			written by Dr 
			Immanuel Velikovsky.
 Dr Velikovsky tore at the delicate underpinnings of modern science, 
			applying excessive scholarship to the problems of how the planets 
			were formed and what forces may have wrought changes in the Earth. 
			Along the way he was obliged to invent new theories based upon the 
			flimsy (by scientific standards) evidence of mythology. He dared to 
			throw out some of science's most coveted concepts, substituting Ms 
			own cosmology.
 
 The explosion followed almost immediately. The biggest names in 
			astronomy and physics organized and fulminated. They set out to 
			destroy this upstart by flooding his, publisher's office with 
			vicious letters threatening to boycott the firm unless Velikovsky's 
			book was withdrawn. Since the publisher also had a profitable 
			sideline of textbooks and was heavily dependent upon the academic 
			community for support, this ugly campaign had some effect.
 
			  
			An 
			assistant editor who had first suggested publishing the book was 
			fired, and publication rights were turned over to another publisher 
			who did not have a textbook business. 
				
				'Leading scientists gave public lectures denouncing Velikovsky. The 
			scientific journals were filled with critical anti-Velikovsky 
			letters and articles. It was modern science's darkest hour. There 
			was a response which for intensity and hostility was unequalled in 
			twentieth century scientific history,' the Los Angeles Times later 
			noted. 
			What triggered this emotional outburst?  
			  
			Velikovsky's main theme was 
			that the planet Venus was really a comet hurled out of the planet 
			Jupiter. It had brushed part the Earth, he said, on its way into
			orbit around the sun and had been observed by all the existing races 
			and recorded in the mythology.
 Immanuel Velikovsky was born June 10th, 1895, in Vitebsk, Russia. He 
			studied medicine and law at same of Europe's best universities (he 
			couldn't go to a Russian college because he was a Jew), received his 
			medical degree in 1921, and settled in Palestine in 1924. He 
			knew Freud personally and corresponded with the great man in the 
			last years of his life.
 
			  
			In 1939 Velikovsky and his family moved to 
			New York, intending to stay only eight months. But he was already 
			toying with his theories, and he spent the next nine years in 
			libraries conducting the exhaustive research which finally resulted 
			in Worlds in Collision. Today he lives quietly in Princeton, New 
			Jersey, rarely appearing in public. He has been more fortunate than 
			Wegener and his continental drift theory in that Velikovsky has Eved 
			to see his critics silenced and many of his seemingly far-out 
			concepts confirmed.
 Ever since the invention of the printing press, publishers have been 
			flourishing on best selling books covering the whole spectrum of 
			pseudoscience. Volumes of profound nonsense, such as the works on 
			pyramidology and Atlantis, have sold in amazing numbers generation 
			after generation. Nearly every major publisher has books of 
			astrology and flying saucers on his lists.
 
			  
			A large part of the 
			endless stream of theses, papers, and learned studies by 
			establishment scientists has in time proven invalid and more 
			crackpot than even the cultist literature. It was incredible that Velikovsky's contemporaries singled out his work - a book that had 
			taken nine years of careful study and research - for their venom. In 
			retrospect many of the anti-Velikovsky critiques read like the work 
			of deranged lunatics who had not even bothered to read the book they 
			were attempting to criticize.  
			  
			They were against the book simply 
			because it propounded ideas that were contrary to the accepted 
			theories of the day. They resented the fact that a psychiatrist 
			dared to speculate on astronomy and archaeology. He was an intruder. 
			 
			  
			Above all they resented the fact that his book was very well written 
			(most scientists are miserable writers). 
				
				'If I had not been psychoanalytically trained, I would have had some 
			harsh words to say to my critics,' Dr Velikovsky said loftily in the 
			early 1950s. 
			Orthodox scientists have always sneered at the works of Charles 
			Fort, an American humorist who published four books of oddities and 
			scientific anomalies, primarily because Fort delighted in attacking 
			the scientific establishment.  
			  
			Now they tried to lump Velikovsky
			together with Fort.  
			  
			Scientists and the untutored followers of sdentism spent years denigrating Velikovsky and generating the 
			legend that be was just another crackpot. The ageing psychiatrist 
			just ignored them and went on writing books expanding Ms central 
			thesis.1  
			  
			In a rare attempt at self-defence 2 he stated that he hoped 
			that future generations of scientists would understand his work more 
			dearly.  
			  
			1 Among these are: Earth in Upheaval, Ages in Chaos, and Oedipus and 
			Akhnatnn.2 Harper's. June 1951.
 
			  
			  
			He wrote off his contemporary critics, and this prompted 
			Martin Gardner to observe in 1952 that: 
				
				Dr Velikovsky is an almost perfect textbook example of the 
			pseudoscientist - self-taught in the subjects about which he does 
			most of his speculation, working in total isolation from fellow 
			scientists, motivated by a strong compulsion to defend dogmas held 
			for other than scientific reasons, and with an unshakable conviction 
			in the revolutionary value of his work and the blindness of his 
			critics. 
			One of the favorite points of the anti-Velikovsky critics was that 
			he relied upon ancient myths and traditions for his evidence. 
			 
			  
			Actually, in Worlds in Collision, he devoted many pages to this 
			problem. Since he was trying to reassemble events which transpired 
			in prehistoric times (before the advent of written records), he was 
			obliged to perform a comparative study of early legends.  
			  
			He 
			recognized that the problem of interpreting such material correctly 
			was monumental. 
				
				'Traditions about upheavals and catastrophes, found among all 
			peoples,' he wrote, 'are generally discredited because of the 
			shortsighted belief that no forces could have shaped the world in 
			the' past that are not at work also at the present time, a belief 
			that is the very foundation of modern geology and of the theory of 
			evolution.' 
			Those were fighting words to the scientific establishment. 
			 
			  
			Velikovsky compounded his felony by suggesting that numerous events 
			and catastrophes long accepted in religious lore as miracles and 
			acts of God were in reality observations of astronomical phenomena 
			which could be explained. This was totally unpalatable to the 
			scientific community and to many others as well.
 In 1950 the staid American Journal of Science ranted that 
			Velikovsky's book was 'best described as burlesque of both science 
			and history'. Seventeen years later Yale Scientific Magazine devoted 
			an entire issue to vindicating the good doctor.
 
 What had happened in those seventeen years? For one thing, the Old 
			Guard had changed to a degree, and many bright young men had 
			emerged, clutching their slide rules as they rode the tails of 
			man-made comets to Venus and Mars. For another, the stupefying and 
			stultifying atmosphere of the McCarthy Era of the early 1950s had 
			ended.
 
			  
			Professor Lloyd Motz of Columbia University scented the tide 
			of change, and in a letter in Harper's in October 1963. he 
			cautiously admitted,  
				
				'I do not support Velikovsky's theory, but I do 
			support his right to present his ideas and to have those ideas 
			considered by responsible scholars and scientists as the creation of 
			a serious and dedicated investigator and not the concoctions of a 
			charlatan seeking notoriety…' 
			Scientists and professors live in the uncomfortable atmosphere of 
			the academic rule, Publish or Perish.  
			  
			They grind out interminable 
			research papers and studies, not because they have something to say, 
			but because their livelihood often depends upon their ability to put 
			their names into print. This unfortunate system has spawned an army 
			of men whose academic credentials are sound enough but who indulge 
			in quasi research.  
			  
			Some even manage to acquire a considerable 
			reputation by publishing a steady stream of unread books. Professor 
			Mote's remark about 'the concoctions of a charlatan seeking 
			notoriety1 is revealing, because scientists are painfully aware of 
			the many charlatans in their own midst who thrive on such notoriety. 
			Over and over again in the past, leaders of the scientific community 
			have proven mere charlatans or, at best, competent organizers and 
			administrators, while their less notorious contemporaries made the 
			real contributions to their field.  
			  
			This spills over of course into 
			other fields such as literary criticism, where a man will write a 
			critical essay of a famous author, and then others will write 
			critical essays of the original critique.  
			  
			Soon the little literary 
			magazines are actually feeding upon themselves, and the professors 
			are quarrelling about their interpretations of said famous author.
 Velikovsky became the most prominent victim of this system. If he 
			had written a book about psychiatry {his own field) or sex and sold 
			a million copies, no one would have cared. But when he invaded the 
			turf of others, presented unpopular ideas in a logical and 
			successful manner, and got the book published… well, he had gone too 
			far.
 
			  
			To the scientists of the 1950s he had to be a 'charlatan 
			seeking notoriety', like Herr Horbiger of another era, they chanted,  
				
				'Ether you believe in us, or you 
				must be treated as an enemy.' 
			A decade later the main dish served at many a scientist's table was 
			crow.
 Astronomers were dead certain in 1950 that both Jupiter and Venus 
			were elderly planets, and after much peering through their 
			telescopes, they had constructed some fanciful facts about both 
			bodies. These facts were taught, as usual, to generations of school 
			students as. the gospel.
 
			  
			Assorted studies had "proven" that the 
			surface temperature of Venus was somewhere between 25° C, and 30° C 
			making it a relatively cool planet and possibly an inhabitable one. 
			Dr Velikovsky's theory was that Venus was actually an ex-comet and 
			had been in solar orbit for only thirty-four centuries. If he was 
			right, the surface of Venus would have to be considerably hotter.
 In 1961 Dr Frank Drake and other radio astronomers turned their 
			equipment on Venus and discovered that its temperature based upon 
			its radio emissions was at least 600° F, or 315° C. later the United 
			States and the Soviet Union sent unmanned space probes to Venus and 
			confirmed that it was a mighty hot place and that there might be 
			some source of surface heat other than solar radiation.
 
			  
			Venus is the 
			second planet from the sun after Mercury. Even the side turned away 
			from the sun radiates considerable heat.  
			  
			Another interesting 
			discovery was that Venus rotates slowly in a retrograde - that is, 
			clockwise - direction and has movements, which are in sharp contrast 
			to the other planets in the solar system.*  
				
				'Maybe Venus was created 
			apart from the other planets,' scientists at the Goldstone Tracking 
			Station muttered in 1962, 'perhaps as a secondary solar explosion or 
			perhaps in a collision of planets.' 
			* See 'Radat Observations of the Planets', Invin I. Shapiro, 
			Scientific American. July 1968. 
			  
			  
			There were other factors, such as the heavy hydrocarbon atmosphere 
			of the planet, which seemed to confirm Dr Velikovsky's 1950 
			speculations. Venus is definitely an oddball among the planets, but 
			the astronomers of 1950 didn't know any of this.
 Turning to the ancient records for his evidence, Dr Velikovsky 
			pointed out that early peoples had recorded Venus as an 
			exceptionally bright object trailing smoke. The Chinese, Mayas, 
			Toltecs, and Aztecs also recorded its motion… and the early Venus 
			apparently followed a much different orbit, or trajectory, than the 
			diminished orb now visible in our skies.
 
 The people of Mesopotamia did not even record Venus in their 
			astronomical records. Later the Chaldeans described it as a 'bright 
			torch of heaven' that 'illuminates like the sun' and 'fills the 
			entire heaven'. Other far-flung cultures preserved similar comments, 
			all of which suggest that Venus began as a comet which roared very 
			close
			to the earth at one point - close enough perhaps to cause tidal 
			waves and spew burring fragments on to the earth's surface.
 
 Another part of Dr Velikovsky's evidence consisted of the stories of 
			the 'rain of fire' which encompassed the earth, and he quoted from 
			Mexican texts as well as the records of the Assyrians. If he was 
			right then some of the oil deposits on earth were a result of that 
			celestial shower.
 
			  
			But geologists have always assumed that oil is 
			created by a process which takes millions of years. Since Worlds in 
			Collision was written, deposits of liquid hydrocarbons have been 
			found and dated in the Gulf of Mexico and elsewhere, giving every 
			indication they are only a few thousand years old! The ancient texts 
			described the comet Venus as coming from the fifth planet, Jupiter. 
			 
			  
			Was this possible? This was the flimsiest part of the Velikovsky 
			theory, and the most widely attacked.  
			  
			Ironically, the very men who 
			advocate the theory that tektites are the result of meteor impacts 
			on the moon (Chapter Four) are the same ones who deny that a Jovian 
			comet could come into being, perhaps by the same process. Velikovsky 
			proposed a collision of planets as a possible source. The asteroid 
			belt between Mars and Jupiter could be made up of surviving 
			fragments from that awesome event. 
			  
			Our ideas about Jupiter itself 
			have been revised considerably since 1950. We used to think of it as 
			a gigantic planetary body composed of gases and liquids, but in 
			recent years powerful radio waves have been detected coming from it. 
			Apparently, there are great electrical storms on the surface, and 
			some of these storms affect earthly radio waves as much, or more so, 
			than sunspots. 
			  
			Studies of all this have led to a new theory, now 
			quite popular among astronomers, that Jupiter may not be a planet at 
			all. It may be a cold star! Maybe one planet could not give birth to 
			another, but a star, even a cold star, could.
 Jupiter's diameter is approximately eleven times the diameter of the 
			earth - about eighty-six thousand miles. As nearly as we can 
			determine, it revolves very rapidly on its axis; a Jovian day is 
			less than ten Earth hours long. Through the telescope it appears to 
			be ringed with cloud-like bands, the most interesting feature of 
			which is the famous red spot.
 
			  
			This is an elliptical spot some forty 
			thousand kilometers long and thirteen thousand kilometers wide - 
			roughly equal in area to the entire surface of the Earth. This spot 
			was first observed by Robert Hooke in 1664. Astronomers have been 
			watching it ever since. It also rotates with the planet but at 
			different speeds. And it always remains in approximately the same 
			latitude, wandering only slightly.
 Morris K Jessup and other ufologists have advanced the notion
			that the ted spot is actually a great spaceship, a monumental Ark 
			from outer space, which transported the survivors of some dying 
			world into our solar system. Some modern flying saucer 
			contactees 
			even claim that the spacemen have taken them to Jupiter and shown 
			them this Ark.
 
			  
			Other contactees have been told stories about the ark 
			by the spacemen. It is waiting for the day when the Earth will be 
			evacuated by the kindly space people.  
			  
			Then we will all fly to the 
			stars aboard it. Well, not all of us. Just those lucky humans who 
			have been chosen by the space people. Several dry runs have already 
			been held in recent years with the chosen contactees closing down 
			their homes and businesses to sit on a hill or mountaintop and wait 
			for the evacuation to begin.  
			  
			A number of these dry runs are 
			documented in the author's book, UFOs - Operation Trojan Horse. 
			Jupiter's Ark is an integral part of modern flying saucer lore.
 Stanley Kubrick's epic motion picture, 2001, added to this lore by 
			having astronauts head for Jupiter after a mysterious monolith was 
			discovered on the moon. The monolith, a faceless grey slab, is used 
			throughout the film as the symbol of some extraterrestrial force 
			guiding man's destiny. In the dosing scenes of 2001, scenes which 
			have thoroughly baffled many moviegoers, an astronaut arrives on, 
			Jupiter only to enter into a new phase of evolution: a kind af 
			rebirth. Shorn of its cinematic mysticism, the film is a restatement 
			of what many cultists have been saying all along.
 
 The flying saucer buffs have been misled by astronomical 
			terminology.
 
			  
			Although the red spot is usually termed an 'object', it 
			could be almost anything. Bernard M. Peek, an amateur astronomer, 
			called it a raft and suggested it could be some form of water 
			floating like an iceberg in the Jovian atmosphere. Professor Raymond 
			Hide, of the British Meteorological Office, proposed in Scientific 
			American in February, 1968 that it could be the visible part of a 
			phenomenon known as a Taylor column - a stagnant cylinder of liquid 
			centered above some depression or topographical feature on the planet 
			below.  
			  
			The late Frank Edwards, a radio news commentator and author 
			of UFO books, poetically equated it with a giant eye always turned 
			towards (he earth. Some followers of Velikovsky have asserted that 
			the red spot is really the hole left behind when Venus was 
			catapulted out into space.
 In order for a body the size of Venus, which is only slightly 
			smaller than the earth, to be successfully hurtled out of Jupiter, 
			it would have to attain an incredible escape velocity to overcome 
			the great mass and gravity of the planet.
 
			  
			Achieving this velocity 
			would require a tremendous amount of energy, or as Professor Motz 
			put it, 
				
				'… to
			eject a planet like Venus, Jupiter would have had to release in a 
			manner of seconds or minutes as much energy as the Sun emits in more 
			than a year. Jupiter would therefore have appeared as bright as a 
			nova [an exploding star], which is about a million times as luminous 
			as the sun…' 
			Dr Velikovsky attempted to explain this by theorizing that a large 
			mass on a near collision course with Saturn and Jupiter may have set 
			the cosmic machinery in motion.
 Whatever may have happened, Velikovsky's main premise is that Venus 
			is a young planet. He predicted in 1950 that Venus would prove to be 
			hot and that it would display orbital eccentricities.
 
			  
			The claims 
			have now been verified. He claimed that the ancient records stand as 
			proof that Venus was not even present in the skies until fairly 
			recent times, that it first appeared as a comet hauling a tail and 
			followed a course somewhat different from its present one. Its 
			passage through our solar system caused massive disturbances on 
			earth and probably wholesale destruction. There are written records 
			of those disturbances and archaeological and geological evidence of 
			that destruction.
 In relatively recent times Venus posed a new mystery. Today's 
			astronomers agree that our sister planet has no moons. But a 
			satellite was observed orbiting Venus in 1672 by a prominent 
			astronomer named Casden. He saw it again in 1686. Other well known 
			astronomers, using primitive but adequate instruments, sighted it in 
			1740, 1759, 1764, and 1791.
 
			  
			They all noted that it seemed to be 
			about one fourth the size of Venus itself (giving it a diameter of 
			two thousand miles) and that it was very bright, almost luminous. 
			It's very hard to lose something two thousand miles across… even in 
			space. But no astronomer has seen this object since 1791. Flying 
			saucer cultists have taken Venus' vanishing satellite to their 
			bosom, claiming naturally that it was really a gigantic spacecraft. 
			  
			But the object's extreme luminosity could mean that it was a 
			fragment of the Venus comet itself, following a retrograde orbit 
			which eventually sent it into the planet's surface.
 We have followed a long and bizarre trail from the ancient rumors 
			of massive catastrophes to the Atlantis-bound theories of Donnelly 
			to the Ice Age notions of Horbiger's Wei and finally to the 
			carefully researched and thought-out conclusions of Dr Immanuel 
			Velikovsky and his still controversial concept of colliding worlds, 
			These men and their many followers were probably mostly wrong… but 
			there is always a chance that they might also be partially right. 
			While their peers and colleagues have fumed, fussed^ fought.
 
 ridiculed, and attacked their body syntheses, a new generation of 
			scientists has steadily uncovered substantial scientific evidence 
			which seems to support them. New theorists will undoubtedly seize 
			upon this new evidence and construct concepts which will make them 
			seem pikers.
 
 We are beginning to realize that the Earth's crust is in constant 
			motion, that the continents are adrift. The whole planet may 
			flip-flop on its axis every few thousand years, causing water to 
			bury land areas, bringing new land areas to the surface, and 
			thrusting temperate zones into the Arctic cold to be smothered by 
			ice.
 
			  
			And if we can accept Velikovsky, our little mudball is running 
			the constant hazard of encountering objects and forces in space 
			which can wreak unbelievable havoc in hours or days. The moon could 
			even fall on us one day, or the sun could suddenly explode. Our 
			whole technological civilization could be wiped out in a flash.
 It would not be too surprising, therefore, if other great 
			civilizations might have flourished on this planet many thousands of 
			years ago. Other great races, not necessarily linked to us 
			biologically, could have existed here.
 
			  
			The supergiants of Pauwels 
			and Bergier could have been real. All that has survived of that 
			ancient race are the puzzling stone monoliths and the great mounds 
			and ridges. It was a logical step for a super-civilization to move 
			from the construction of mounds and earth-works to the building of 
			the more permanent pyramids of Egypt, China, and South America. 
			Their culture, or remnants of it, survived and were imitated by 
			early man.  
			  
			For thousands of years superb stonemasons laboured all 
			over this planet, erecting pyramids, then temples, then great 
			cities. Our sciences have timidly attempted to reconstruct the 
			history of the past three or four thousand years, never daring to 
			look beyond.  
			  
			And woe to anyone - such as Velikovsky - who does dare. 
			  
			  
			  
			  
			  
			PART TWO
 
				
					
						
						If the religious projections 
						of man correspond to a reality that is superhuman and 
						supernatural, then it seems logical to look for traces 
						of this reality in the projector himself.Peter L. Berger
 
						A Rumour of Angels 
			  
			  
			CHAPTER EIGHTMIMICS OF MAN
 
 The animal world is filled with incongruous redundancies.
 
			  
			There are 
			insects that resemble twigs and sticks, fish that look like harmless 
			underwater plants, animals that appear to be rocks and ferns. Some 
			non-poisonous snakes imitate the coloring and appearance of their 
			deadlier cousins. Numerous tasty insects discourage their enemies by 
			imitating poisonous centipedes and scorpions. The animal and insect 
			world is thronging with fakers and imitators and cunning masters of 
			camouflage.  
			  
			One insect is so cleverly disguised that it can march 
			along with formations of fierce army ants unnoticed. It even 
			imitates the scent of the any ants.
 Man, the most vicious and wanton killer of the animal world and the 
			natural enemy of all wild things, has his imitators, too. Overt 
			contacts between man and paraman have numbered in the millions 
			throughout history. Legend and lore are rich with such incidents of 
			contact. Our great religions are founded upon encounters with angels 
			and demons.
 
			  
			The annals of psychic phenomena are filled with accounts 
			of seemingly chance meetings with these ultraterrestrials. Some of 
			them seem dull and inconsequential and even easily explainable; 
			others are witnessed by groups of reliable people and produce 
			testimony that would have been written by a drunken science fiction 
			author.
 'Living among us undetected may be creatures (not necessarily alien) 
			with all the outward appearances of human beings,' urologist Alex 
			Saunders wrote in Quest magazine. October 1969. The mimic would of 
			necessity be a "lone wolf", likely living in a large, bustling city 
			where the eccentric and the odd may flourish unhindered. For it is a 
			curious fart of nature that that which is in plain view is often 
			best hidden.*
 
 Another famous ufologist, Ainte Michel, has also commented on these 
			mysterious mimics.
 
				
				"Certain cases have been checked and found to be 
			perfectly authentic. But they are so absurd (because they are 
			mimetic) that folk do not dare to talk about them. No useful 
				research can ever be done so long as absurdity produces 
				complexes in us." 1 
			1 The Humatwüs. Neville Spearman.
 
			
			Early man was very aware of the existence of these mimics and tended 
			to separate them into two groups - gods and demons.
 
			  
			All religions 
			have always warned their followers to be cautious of false angels 
			and demigods. The Bible repeatedly discusses these entities and 
			their influence upon man, always describing them as humanlike beings 
			usually travelling in threes and possessing remarkable superhuman 
			powers. 
				
				"Be not forgetful to entertain strangers, for thereby some have 
			entertained angels unawares,' we are warned in Hebrews 13:2. 
			Three men, usually of Oriental countenance and dressed in 
			somber 
			black clothing, play important roles in both flying saucer and 
			religious lore.  
			  
			For years the (lying saucer researchers who 
			encountered these Men In Black (MIB) believed they were secret 
			agents of the CIA seat to harass them. These MIB have been seen most 
			often riding about in large black automobiles, usually Cadillacs, 
			and they have engaged in frightening tactics, harassing amateur UFO 
			sleuths.  
			  
			There are hundreds of reports from all over the world in 
			which these mysterious gentlemen have approached UFO witnesses and 
			investigators, warning, even threatening, them to be silent about 
			what they had seen. Since these entities and their big black 
			automobiles have an uncanny talent for disappearing into thin air, 
			investigators examining the stories of their victims have tended to 
			dismiss such accounts as lies and hallucinations.  
			  
			Then, as has 
			happened in so many cases, when these skeptical investigators had 
			MIB encounters of their own, they have panicked in confusion. There 
			has been an appalling number of sudden deaths, suicides, and nervous 
			breakdowns among UFO investigators in the past twenty years.
 On the religious level these same MIB, answering the same 
			descriptions of the UFO harassers, have always been regarded as 
			agents of the devil - or the devil himself. The antics of these 
			characters have kept the devil myth have into modern times, and 
			there are still numerous religious cults hopelessly engaged in 
			battling and trying to outwit them… but they always manage to stay one 
			jump ahead of their pursuers. Most of their deeds and manipulations 
			appear to be nothing more than mischievous games.
 
 The activities of these parahumans are largely confined to specific 
			areas of this planet, where they appear and reappear century after 
			century.
 
				
				"The angels keep their ancient places," poet Francis 
			Thompson wrote.  
			Thus there are many 'haunted' places all over the 
			world, shunned by ancient man or made sacred by him. These are 
			precise geographical locations, and anyone digging into the history 
			and lore of such locations will find thousands of accounts of 
			ghosts.
 demons, monsters, and flying saucers pinpointed within a few square 
			miles and covering a thousand years or more of time. To UFO cultists 
			such places are Windows: entry points for spaceships front some 
			distant planet. Occultists teach that these are Gateways: weak spots 
			in the Earth's etheric envelope through which beings from other 
			space-time continuums seep through into our reality.
 
			  
			Sussex County 
			in England is one Gateway, as are the Mississippi Valley, the Ohio 
			Valley, and parts of our western states, such as the area around Frescott, Arizona. There are literally thousands of these weak spots 
			all over our planet. Paranormal and supernatural activities in these 
			areas seem to be controlled by complicated cyclic factors. 
			 
			  
			Periodically, all hell breaks loose in all these places 
			simultaneously, and then we have a flap, or wave, of UFO sightings, 
			apparitions, poltergeists, sudden inexplicable disappearances of 
			animals and human beings, mysterious fires, and even a form of mass 
			madness.
 Researchers are only now beginning to untangle the cycles involved. 
			For some unknown reason a high proportion of all these activities 
			seems to occur on Wednesday and on the twenty-fourth of the month. 
			This has been a stable factor throughout history. The biblical 
			prophet Zachariah reported (Zachariah 1:7) an angelic visitation 
			Upon the four and twentieth day of the eleventh month', circa 520 
			b.c.
 
			  
			The most famous flying saucer sighting of modern times, that of 
			private pilot Kenneth Arnold near Mount Ranier in Washington, 
			occurred on June 24, 1947. Note that many of the events discussed 
			throughout this book took place on the twenty-fourth of the month.
 Paranormal events also seem to duster around the tenth of the month- 
			Early peoples were aware of these factors and linked them with the 
			phases of the moon. They thought the full moon influenced human 
			behavior and produced lunacy. Appearances of DFOs and assorted 
			apparitions do seem to increase during specific periods of the lunar 
			cycle, and as noted in Chapter Two, the human mind does seem to be 
			involved.
 
			  
			Many of these things have been carelessly dismissed as 
			hallucinations because only certain people can see these things at 
			certain times. However, a great many factors are involved. Recent 
			studies indicate that persons of high psychic potential, who 
			experience prophetic dreams and flashes of extrasensory perception 
			(ESP), are more prone to see these things than people with little or 
			no psychic ability.  
			  
			Polls and tests conducted over the past century 
			by assorted scientists indicate that about one third of the 
			population possesses active or latent psychic abilities, They 
			constitute our main
			body of TOO witnesses.  
			  
			The other two thirds have never had any 
			personal experiences of tins sort and so. naturally enough, dismiss all of this as utter rubbish.
 Two independent statistical studies of available UFO reports were 
			conducted in 1970 and confirmed that the highest number of UFO 
			sightings took place on Wednesdays. An amateur group, the American 
			Flying Saucer Investigating Committee of Columbus, Ohio, ran a study 
			of 929 UFO reports from the year 1968 and found that Wednesdays 
			produced the greatest number -
			152.
 
			  
			A more elaborate professional computer study of 7,025 sightings 
			from tie years 1921 to 1969 was carried out by Dr. David Saunders of 
			Colorado University. He too found that the greatest number of 
			sightings (1,077) occurred on Wednesdays.  
			  
			The lowest number in the 
			Ohio study was 117 for Sundays; the lowest number in the Saunder's 
			study was 903 for Saturdays. Although these are only pilot studies 
			and much more work along this line will be necessary before any 
			definite conclusions can be reached, it is obvious that these things 
			are not random and sporadic but are governed by a definite time 
			cycle of some sort.  
			  
			Factors of coincidence, innocent errors, 
			misinterpretations of ordinary aircraft and mundane natural 
			phenomenon, weather balloons, and so on must be filtered out.
 Another computer study of twelve hundred anomalies and unusual 
			occurrences, sifted from the works of Charles Fort, was recently 
			carried out by C. L Mallows of the Bell Telephone Laboratories.
 
			  
			Here 
			it was found that a broader cycle of 9.6 years was seemingly 
			involved. The conclusion is inescapable that these cycles of 
			activity, which pass through our world like radio waves of enormous 
			length, must have a common cause, 
				
				'Damon Knight explained in his 
			book, Charles Fort: Prophet of the Unexplained. The cause of the 
			cycles, the controlling force that keeps them in synchrony, must lie 
			outside the earth.' 
			The Bell study includes such diversified phenomena as sky falls (odd 
			objects dropping out of the sky) unusual storms (rains of frogs, 
			etc.), things observed in space, and things seen in the sky.  
			  
			All of 
			these phenomena tended to duster - to occur simultaneously in 
			specific months and specific years. The waves or cycles of these 
			events were repeated approximately every 9.6 years. The study dealt 
			largely with data from the nineteenth century.
 Ancient magicians and seers were quite familiar with these cyclic 
			factors. The earnest religious and occult lore discusses rays which 
			periodically sweep our planet from some extraterrestrial source and 
			cause everything from miracles to sadness and catastrophes.
 
 Strangely, the Australian Aborigines, the South American Indians, 
			and the tribes of Africa, as well as the ancient Babylonians and 
			other early cultures, all pinpointed the Pleiades (a cluster of 
			seven stars), and the constellation of Orion as that source of these 
			rays. Rays from outer space are an integral part: of all human 
			folklore.
 
 In time all of these intangibles will be puttied down by courageous 
			scientific investigators (studies of this kind are still very 
			unpopular among scientists). Already we know (or have relearned) 
			that all paranormal manifestations have a tendency to occur in the 
			same places year after year; that they follow specific patterns 
			within our own time scale; that only specific people can witness or 
			become involved in these events.
 
			  
			The logical jumping off place for 
			any future investigation is to study the witnesses in depth and to 
			explore these Gateways carefully and methodically. Small groups of 
			psychiatrists, para-psychologist, geologists, and physicists are now 
			engaged in studies of this type.
 One significant factor, which is hardly a secret to the occultists, 
			is that the Window areas tend to be places where peculiar magnetic 
			faults exist. Our haunted planet is covered with magnetic faults, 
			and interestingly enough, many of them are grouped around the 
			ancient mounds, temple sites, and spots where flying saucers are 
			seen most frequently.
 
			  
			Psychically oriented people living in these 
			regions tend to have extraordinary experiences with elementals, 
			angels, MIB, and spacemen (numerous examples will be given further 
			on).
 A leading authority on mythology and mysticism, poet Robert Graves, 
			recently stated:
 
				
				"There are some sacred places made 
				so by the radiation created by magnetic ores. My village, for 
				example, is a kind of natural amphitheatre enclosed by mountains 
				containing iron ore, which makes a magnetic field. Most holy 
				places in the world - holy not by some accident, like a hero 
				dying or being born there - are of this sort. Delphi was a 
				heavily charged holy place." 
			Back in the Middle Ages 
			the Vatican pointedly ordered that new 
			churches should be constructed on the sites of old temples whenever 
			possible.  
			  
			The tradition of sacred places runs deep 
			and seems to be largely based upon the continuous observations of 
			paranormal manifestations. The entities who allegedly approached 
			human beings in miraculous events frequently ordered a church or 
			temple to be built on the spot. But we didn't need an order to erect tie great 
			churches at Lourdes and Fatima after the entities appeared there. 
			 
			  
			Remember the legendary nineteen-year cycle of Stonehenge, when the 
			god was supposed to appear? Multiply the Fortean cycle of 9.6 years 
			by 2.
 A magnetic survey of the United States was carried out by the
			government in the 1950s. Maps detailing magnetic variations in 
			nearly every state can be obtained from the Office of Geological 
			Survey in Washington. Comparisons of the concentrations of 
			paranormal manifestations with these maps show unique clusters 
			around the magnetic aberrations.
 
			  
			Could it be that periodic sweeps of 
			those rays from outer space set up some kind of physical or psychic 
			reactions in these fault areas? This is a question that could be 
			answered scientifically, if only someone would put up the money, 
			equipment, and personnel to make a study.
 We are only re-observing the things which awed early man and inspired 
			his superstitions and beliefs. Electro-magnetic energy plays a key 
			role in these manifestations. We are still learning about it. Our 
			planet may be constantly interchanging energy with some outside 
			force. This exchange of energy is an important part of occult 
			belief. It occurs we are told, on every level.
 
			  
			Chinese philosophers 
			of long ago contended that man was moon food (i.e., the energy of 
			individual souls was drained off and absorbed by some 
			extraterrestrial force which needed such energy to replenish 
			itself).  
			  
			Later, theologians extended this to form the classic 
			explanation that we were the subjects of a war between God and the 
			Devil… a war to win the souls of man and thereby control the planet. 
			Thus, the demons and MIB who appeared in earlier times were supposed 
			to have been after souls. They made lavish promises, according to 
			the records, and offered fanciful philosophies and cosmologies, but 
			as Swedenborg figured out, they always proved to be nothing but 
			splendid liars.
 Early investigators and thinkers soon realized they were dealing 
			with magical beings who could imitate man and his works.
 
			  
			Instead of 
			being solid physically stable assemblages of cells and matter, these 
			entities were apparently temporary manipulations of energy. So the 
			word 'transmogrification' was used to describe them. These 
			transmogrifications, according to the lore, could assume any form… 
			from a wolf or a cat to a house, ship or iridescent god of awesome 
			proportions. They could appear clothed in rags or in gold crowns and 
			expensive velvet robes.  
			  
			Worst of all, they had a penchant for 
			playing all kinds of games with us, manipulating our fears and 
			beliefs and even conning us into going to war against each other.
 One alarming facet of their countless messages to percipients and 
			contactees is their preoccupation with spreading racist propaganda. 
			The messages recorded throughout history are filled with such 
			propaganda. If the percipient was an Indian, the propaganda was 
			aimed at a nearby tribe. If he was Hindu, it was directed at the
			Moslems.
 
			  
			The elementals are purveyors of bate, and perhaps much of 
			the racial prejudice blighting the human race was originally the 
			product of their teachings.
 Even those wonderful space people and Brothers from other planets 
			manage to play this game. Long John Nebel, a New York radio 
			personality, has spent thousands of hours interviewing contactees 
			and UFO burls on the air over WNBC and in his book. Way Out World, 
			he offers this comment:
 
 A bit that has always bugged me is the racist propaganda which keeps 
			cropping up from one group to another. In this area, regrettably, 
			I'm unable to name names and cite occasions, since the allusions are 
			always so carefully phrased so that the offenders could easily deny 
			the intentions of their remarks. But the meaning is there, never 
			doubt it.
 
			  
			As is usually the case, the unflavored parties racially 
			speaking are the Jews and Negroes, and the themes of both Fascism 
			and Communism seem to echo from behind the scenes on more than a few 
			occasions. But it's all part of the action.
 Some contactees who claimed to have visited Mars blandly point out 
			that the planet is divided into zones with the Negro and Jewish 
			Martians carefully segregated from the others.
 
 Even contactees of liberal persuasions repeat with some dismay the 
			nastily racist remarks of the Venusians. The Jews are a favorite 
			target of this outer space propaganda, as if they haven't got enough 
			trouble already.
 
 Until the past five or six years racial prejudice was actually a 
			basic part of all the Western religions. After digging down to the 
			source of these racist beliefs, there are always the ancient 
			teachings of dubious messengers. They have kept the human race 
			stirred up and at each other's throats for thousands of years. Now 
			finally the Catholics are beginning to soften their traditional 
			anti-Semitism, and the Mormons are beginning to face the fact that 
			Negroes ate also human beings.
 
 Aside from their inveterate racism, the mimics are also fond of 
			exploiting tense political situations. A band of phantom Indians 
			plagued the settlers of Gloucester. Massachusetts, back in 1692.
 
			  
			They appeared night after night, skirmishing with the English and 
			firing bullet-less guns.  
				
				'Although the Indians never killed or scalped 
			anyone, the colonists were understandably upset and heavily 
			fortified their positions, the English became convinced that they
			were not real Indians,' Sir Walter Scott reported, 'but that the 
			devil and his agents had assumed such an appearance.' 
			The North American Indians have innumerable legends about an entity 
			they called the Trickster because he would turn up occasionally and 
			play wild and vicious pranks.
 Earth's phantom inhabitants play many other roles, especially in the 
			widely accepted sphere of psychic phenomena.
 
			  
			Telly Savalas, the 
			famous character actor, told Hollywood reporter Dick Kleiner a weird 
			story involving a black Cadillac. It happened when Savalas was young 
			and flat broke. His car ran out of gas on Long Island, and after he 
			started walking, a black Cadillac 'seemed to appear from nowhere', 
			and the driver offered him a lift.  
			  
			The driver was dressed entirely 
			in white - a refreshing switch - and said very little. But at one 
			point he offered Savalas a dollar to buy some gas. The actor 
			insisted that the nun write down his name and address on a slip of 
			paper so he could be repaid. They found a gas station, and the 
			driver waited while Savalas bought a can of gasoline.  
			  
			Then they 
			drove back to his own car in silence. 
				
				'I know Harry Agannis,' the driver said suddenly. Savalas asked who 
			Harry Agannis was. 'He's a utility infielder on the Boston Red Sox,' 
			the man answered. 
			That was the end of the conversation.
 The man waited while Savalas poured the gasoline into the car, gave 
			him a push to get him started, and then drove off with a wave. The 
			next day Savalas was shaken by newspaper headlines announcing the 
			sudden death of Harry Agannis. He decided to call the phone number 
			on the slip of paper given to him by the man in the white suit. It 
			was in Massachusetts, and a woman answered. Savalas told her he 
			wanted to speak to Bill, the name on the paper.
 
			  
			There was a pause, 
			and another woman came on the lire. 
				
				'I met Bill last night,' Savalas began, "and something happened, 
			and I wanted - '
 "You met him last night?' she interrupted, choking on sudden tears.
 
			Then she told him that her husband Bill had been dead for three 
			years.  
			  
			Later she met with Savalas in New York and told him that her 
			husband had been buried in a white suit. She showed him the last 
			letter her husband had written, and ha was startled to see that the 
			handwriting exactly matched the handwriting on the slip of paper 
			given him by the Cadillac driver.
 The whole fabric of psychic belief is woven from such stories, which 
			number in the many thousands and are accepted by millions as proof 
			of survival after death. But investigators informed in the antics of 
			the ultraterrestrial mimics are obliged to look deeper.
 
 These entities labour to cultivate belief in various frames of 
			reference, and then they deliberately create new manifestations 
			which support those beliefs. Savalas rode in a physically real 
			Cadillac and spoke with a seemingly real man. If the incident was 
			only a joke of some land, it was a very complicated and pointless 
			one.
 
 Phantom campers, vehicles with built-on trailers, have been widely 
			reported in the western states in recent years. And we have reports 
			of phantom airplanes and helicopters by the hundreds. In the 1930s 
			thousands of people in northern Europe saw formations of mysterious 
			aeroplanes over Norway, Sweden and Finland. Despite extensive 
			searches by the military forces of several countries, the source of 
			these ghost fliers, as they were called, was never determined.
 
			  
			During World War n military intelligence groups collected a number 
			of phantom aeroplane sightings from pilots returning from missions. 
			Crews of several bombers from the Ninety-Second Group reported the 
			following over Germany: 
				
				Four P-47s, thought to be friendly American aircraft flown by the 
			enemy, were observed on the approach to the initial Point at 22,000 
			feet, heading 120° magnetic. These aircraft flew out to the side and 
			parallel with the combat wing formation in the manner of fighter 
			escort. They suddenly executed a 90° turn in towards the head of the 
			combat wing formation. These aircraft were originally at 800 yards 
			on port beam.    
				They approached to 300 yards, when they nosed up and 
			away, showing a full-plan view of themselves. Positive 
			identification is claimed. The aircraft had brown fuselages, and the 
			wings were a very dark colour, almost black. No white cowling and no 
			white tail markings were observed. No insignia was observed, and the 
			aircraft did not open fire.    
				Several B-17s fired on them. The last 
			P-47 escort had long since departed, and the enemy aircraft had been 
			attacking for some time at this point.
 The opening theory expressed in this intelligence report - 
				'Four 
			P-47s, thought to be friendly American aircraft flown by the enemy' 
			- was proven invalid. The mystery planes did not fire at the American 
			bombers, but were fired on instead. If the Germans had attempted 
			such a ploy with captured aircraft, they certainly would have 
			painted appropriate insignia on the planes.
   
				And after having 
			succeeded in getting within 300 yards of the bombers (which is very
			dose), the pilots, if they were German, would certainly have opened 
			fire. Instead, they scooted away, never to be seen again. 
			2 For a full account of this interesting sequence of events see John 
			A. Keel, VFOs-Operatitm Trojan Horse.
 
			
			Low-flying mystery aeroplanes reported in 1969-70 were most often 
			described as resembling P-38s, the twin-engined, dual-fuselage 
			fighters used in the Pacific in World War II.
 
			  
			They were fast, noisy 
			aircraft, but our mystery planes move very slowly and in complete 
			silence. They execute impossible maneuvers, such as sudden right 
			angle turns, and disappear as mysteriously as they had come. Only 3 
			handful of P-38s are still operational, and they were not the 
			culprits in these cases. like the ghost fliers of 1934, they are a 
			dull grey and violate all regulations by failing to show any license 
			numbers or insignia.
 Could these phantom aircraft be part and parcel of the same 
			phenomena which produce phantom automobiles and campers? Could they 
			also be apparitions and transmogrifications of energy that can be 
			properly categorized with the disappearing Indians of Gloucester? 
			The evidence suggests that this could very well be the case.
 
 In other ages flying ships were sometimes reported. Flying Saucer 
			Review, May-June 1970, reprinted a fascinating story from 1743. A 
			farmer near Peibio, Wales, claimed he had seen a flying sailboat 
			that year. He estimated that it was about 1,500 feet in the air and 
			could have been about ninety tons. The keel of the ship was plainly 
			seen (thus ruling out mirages of ships far out to sea). Similar 
			phenomena had been reported in the same area about ten years 
			previous.
 
 Fairy lore is also filled with alleged sightings of fairy ships 
			complete with billowing sails.
 
 Our problem is compounded by these amazing, confusing, and alas, 
			scientifically inadmissible subjective observations. The UFO cults 
			have solved this dilemma by simply throwing out this material and concentrating only on those reports which describe 
			circular of cigar-shaped objects. We must, however, consider all the 
			forms reported with equal care if we are to arrive at any valid 
			conclusions.
 
 There is no way to investigate a flying saucer after it has flown. 
			But it is possible to study the people who saw it and the terrain 
			over which it appeared. If we are dealing with clever mimics and 
			transmogrifications of energy and if man has been observing these 
			things throughout his history, then the real clues may be found in 
			the thousands of volumes in all languages describing those 
			observation.; and encounters.
 
 One basic fact should be obvious from the foregoing: these entities and things are not necessarily from some other planet. They are 
			actually closely tied to the human race, are a part of out Immediate 
			environment in some unfathomable fashion, and to a very large extent 
			are primarily concerned with misleading us, misinforming us, and 
			playing games with us.
 
			  
			These mysterious members of the Well' sian 
			Wings Over the World are oat benefactors and our enemies. They 
			educate us and they torment us. They have given us hope, guided our 
			religions and philosophies, and watched us crawl out of the cares 
			and build rockets to the moon.
 They may have watched other civilizations come and go. They may have 
			sincerely helped us to preserve the memories of those lost ages and 
			those past mistakes.
 
			  
			Or it all may be rubbish, and we may be nothing 
			more than the pawns with which they play their mischievous games. 
			Theologians and philosophers have always been troubled by the nearly 
			impossible task of sorting the real from the unreal, the truth from 
			the false.  
			  
			Perhaps the only workable criterion is the ancient one of 
			judging them by their works. 
			  
			  
			  
			CHAPTER NINE
 MEN-IN-BLACK 
			LORE AND THE CIA
 
 There is no truth to the rumors that the flying saucers are from 
			Spain, or that they are piloted by Spaniards,' Gen. Carl Spaatz, Air 
			Force Chief of Staff, told a press conference in 1948.
 
			  
			This was an 
			astonishing statement since a review of all the UFO literature and 
			the fan magazines of the period has failed to uncover such a rumor. 
			It suggests that .people must have been reporting slight, 
			dark-complexioned pilots to the Air Force back in 1948, long before 
			the UFO buffs started taking flying saucer occupant sightings 
			seriously.
 In his detailed report on the Maury Island UFO 'hoax' of 1947, 
			Kenneth Arnold also describes meeting a small, dark foreign-looking 
			man who was tinkering with the motor on a beat-up boat in Tacoma 
			harbor. Ray Palmer, editor of Amazing Stories in Chicago, had 
			commissioned Arnold to investigate the puzzling Maury Island affair, 
			which began when a 'doughnut-shaped object' had rained 'slag' on to 
			a boat near Maury Island.
 
			  
			Pieces of that slag had killed a dog 
			aboard the boat and slightly injured a boy, the son of Harold Dahl, 
			who was piloting it. Early the next morning, according to Dahl's 
			story, a 1947 Bulck drove up to his home and a black-suited man of 
			medium height visited him. This man, Dahl said, recited in detail 
			everything that had happened the day before as if he had been there. 
			 
			  
			Then he warned Dahl not to discuss his sighting with anyone, hinting 
			that if he did there might be unpleasant repercussions which would 
			affect him and his family. Since Dahl and the others had not yet 
			told anyone of their sighting, and since UFOs were still publicly 
			unknown (Arnold's sighting over Mount Rainer and the attendant 
			publicity did not occur until three days later), Dahl was naturally non-plussed by his strange visitor. This was the 
			first modern MIB report.
 Dahl's boss, Fred L. Crisman (he also owned the boat), became a 
			central figure in the mystery. Dahl himself vanished soon after his 
			interview with Arnold, and efforts by later investigators {such as 
			Harold Wilkins, a British author) have failed to locate him.
 
			  
			Crisman 
			had been a flier in World War II, and he was suddenly recalled into 
			the service in 1947, flown to Alaska, and later stationed in 
			Greenland, In recent years the amateur sleuths engaged in 
			investigating
 the alleged conspiracy to assassinate President John F. Kennedy have 
			tried to implicate Crisman. District Attorney James Garrison of New 
			Orleans subpoenaed one Fred Lee Crisman of Tracoma, Washington, to 
			testify before the Grand Jury listening to Garrison's evidence 
			against Clay Shaw, according to wire service stories in November, 
			1963.
 
			  
			Crisman was identified as a radio announcer, but Garrison's 
			investigators implied that he was either a member of the CIA or had 
			been 'engaged in undercover activity for a part of the industrial 
			warfare complex'. He allegedly operated under a cover as a preacher 
			and was 'engaged in work to help Gypsies'. These stories caused a 
			chain reaction in UFO circles, since UFO believers have long accused 
			the CIA of being somehow connected with the flying saucer mystery. 
			 
			  
			Of course, the CIA was in its infancy in 1947 at the time of the 
			Maury Island case and was then largely staffed by naval personnel 
			from World War in intelligence units.
 Clay Shaw was tried early in 1969, accused by Garrison of having 
			conspired to murder President Kennedy. He was found innocent and 
			freed. The exact nature of Crisman's testimony before the Grand Jury 
			is not known. He did not testify at the actual trial.
 
 When Ray Palmer, one of the best-informed urologists extant, 
			summarized his own theories about the Maury Island mystery in the 
			book he coauthored with Arnold, The Coming of the Saucers, he 
			asked pointedly,
 
				
				"Was the Tacoma affair a hoax? 
				Whose?" 
			In recent years many seemingly solid flying saucer cases have 
			dissolved in confusion under close investigation.  
			  
			Often they appear 
			to be outrageous hoaxes perpetrated by some mysterious third party, 
			although the general tendency is to blame the innocent witnesses. 
			These bizarre hoaxes are often identical to the mischievous fairy 
			hoaxes and games of an earlier epoch.
 The Maury Island case fell apart in Arnold's hands. The slag samples 
			given to him by Dahl and Crisman were switched by someone; two 
			investigating Air Force officers, Brown and Davidson, were killed 
			when their plane crashed shortly after leaving Tacoma; Dahl 
			vanished; Crisman was literally exiled to Greenland for two years; 
			Tacoma newsman Paul Lance, who helped Arnold in his investigation, 
			died suddenly a short time later. Palmer claims that a cigar box 
			filled with original slag samples was stolen from his Chicago office 
			soon afterwards.
 
 At one point Ted Morello of the United Press took Arnold aside and 
			told him:
 
				
				You're involved in something that is beyond our power here to
			find out anything about. We tried to find out information at McChord Field [the Tacoma Air Force base] and drew a Wade, and we 
			have informants there who practically smell the runways for news… 
			We've exhausted every avenue attempting to piece what has happened 
			together so it makes some sense… I'm just going to give you some 
			sound advice. Get out of this town until whatever it is blows 
			over. 
			Arnold got into his private plane and headed for home.  
			  
			He stopped 
			in Pendleton, Oregon, to refuel, and shortly after he took off 
			again, Tüs engine stopped cold. Only quick thinking and expert 
			flying saved him from a serious crash.
 Despite the statements of General Spaatz and Kenneth Arnold in 
			1947-8, slight, dark-skinned men did not really begin to appear in 
			published UFO reports until around 1954. (There were, however, 
			descriptions of dark - or heavily suntanned - UFO occupants as far 
			back as 1897.)
 
			  
			The Men in Black phenomenon did not really grip the 
			UFO field until the early 1950s.
 A pioneer ufologist, Albert K. Bender of Bridgeport, Connecticut, 
			gave the MIB mystery new impetus when he suddenly closed down his 
			International Flying Saucer Bureau in 1953, vaguely hinting that 
			three men in black suits had terrorized him into abandoning his 
			research. Other UFO researchers studied his guarded remarks and 
			concluded that he had been pressured out of business by sinister 
			agents of the government.
 
			  
			Three years later Gray Barker, a UFO 
			investigator in West Virginia, published They Knew Too Much about 
			Flying Saucers, a book which dealt with numerous MIB stories from as 
			far away as Mew Zealand. The Bender case was the cornerstone of 
			Barker's theory that the MIB either represented some governmental 
			authority employing 'questionable methods' to 'silence' UFO 
			researchers, or that a more 'fantastic sponsorship is responsible 
			far their deeds'.  
			  
			Many of these dark-skinned. Oriental-featured 
			gentlemen visited UFO witnesses wearing Air Force uniforms. This 
			fact and the vast quantity of reported visits quickly led the UFO 
			buffs to believe that their enemy was indeed the U.S. Air Force. 
			 
			  
			Soon the UFO believers and their organizations were devoting most of 
			their time, energy, and money to investigating the Air Force and, as 
			the paranoia mounted, to investigating each other. The popular books 
			of Donald E. Keyhoe, a retired Marine Corps pilot, were largely 
			concerned with the alleged Air Force and governmental conspiracy to 
			hide the truth about flying saucers from the public.  
			  
			Other UFO 
			writers of the late 1950s followed Keyhoe's example, and this monumental conspiracy became one of the main 'facts' of 
			ufology.
 Ten years after he suddenly withdrew from UFO research, Albeit K. 
			Bender released his full story. Flying Saucers and the Three Men, 
			which was privately published by Gray Barker. It proved to be far 
			more unbelievable than any of the speculations. He claimed that he 
			had been visited by dark-skinned gentlemen with glowing eyes, who 
			materialized and dematerialized in his apartment.
 
			  
			On one occasion, he 
			said, he had been transported to a secret UFO base in Antarctica, 
			where he had been told the secret. The UFOs were here to collect a 
			rare and valuable element from the Earth's oceans. The project would 
			be completed in the early 1960s, he was told, and then the flying 
			saucers would leave our planet, and he would be tree to write about 
			his experiences.
 Bender's revelations made no sense to the UFO coterie, since few; of 
			them were acquainted with demonology and the fairy myths of the 
			Middle Ages. They did not realize that his purported experiences 
			followed classic patterns. In addition to Ms interest in flying 
			saucers. Bender had also been involved in a study of black magic, 
			and black magic, as we shall soon see. has always been a major 
			method for conjuring up elementals. He had been plagued by odors of 
			sulphur and strange poltergeistic manifestations during the period 
			of the visitations.
 
			  
			He also suffered certain medical effects, such 
			as chronic headaches and lapses of memory, which are common symptoms 
			of the contactee syndrome. The UFO buffs quickly branded Bender a 
			nut who was trying get rich from flying saucers (actually, his book 
			sold only a few thousand copies to the UFO hardcore and made him the 
			subject of considerable criticism and ridicule).
 Countless MIB-type stories have now been collected and published by 
			UFO investigators all over the world. Even the stuffy anti-UFO 
			report of Colorado University, a study which had been commissioned 
			by the Air Force in 1967, discussed a few cases. Case Number 52 of 
			the report occupies eighteen pages and discusses in detail the 
			strange experiences of a Santa Ana, California highway inspector 
			named Rex Heflin who took a series of Polaroid photographs of a 
			circular object near a Marine Corps air field on August 3rd, 1965.
 
			  
			He had copies made of these pictures, fortunately, and turned over 
			the originals to two men who claimed to represent the North American 
			Air Defence Command (NORAD). Later NORAD officials emphatically 
			denied that any of their personnel had visited Heflin, and the 
			original photos have never been located.
 Two years later, soon after scientists front Colorado University 
			began their investigation of the Heflin case, he received another
 
 group of strange visitors. They appeared at his home at dusk on 
			Wednesday, October 11th, 1967, dressed in Air Force uniforms. 
			Because of his earlier experience, Heflin inspected their 
			credentials carefully and wrote down their names and other 
			information.
 
			  
			They questioned him about the photos and asked him if 
			he knew anything about 
			the Bermuda Triangle (an area where many 
			planes and ships have vanished).  
				
				'During the questioning, the witness 
				says he noted a car parked in the street with indistinct 
				lettering on the front door,' the Colorado report states. 'In 
				the back seat could be seen a figure and violet (not blue) glow, 
				which the witness attributed to instrument dials.    
				He believed he was being 
				photographed or recorded In the meantime his FM multiples radio 
				was playing in the living room and during the questioning it 
				made several loud audible pops.' 
			Dr James E. McDonald, a meterologist from the University of Arizona, 
			and other investigators later tried to check out the identity of 
			these visitors.  
			  
			Again, they drew a complete blank. Despite their 
			credentials and uniforms, these men were apparently imposters. 
			Numerous other witness have also reported visits from men in big 
			black cars, usually Cadillacs, with peculiar purplish glows lighting 
			their interiors. There are even a number of witnesses who claim to 
			have been temporarily kidnapped in such automobiles. They have 
			described strange psychedelic lights on the dashboards which caused 
			them to fall into hypnotic trances.
 Some of these phantom vehicles have a special insignia printed on 
			their doors - a triangle with a bolt of lightning passing through 
			it. In other cases witnesses said the symbol was the classic 
			triangle with an eye - the ancient symbol for the deity  -  
			and the MIB identified themselves as 'agents for the Nation of the 
			Third Eye." Such stories are rarely given wide circulation and are 
			almost never published. So it is quite interesting that so many 
			far-flung witnesses manage to come up with the same identical 
			details.
 
 One of the first clues that a UFO flap was about to break on Long 
			Island in the spring of 1967 was a series of random reports 
			describing strange Oriental or Gipsy-like entities parading across 
			people's lawns in the middle of the night. One man living on an 
			isolated farm near Melville, New York, said he saw a metallic disk 
			hovering a few feet above one of his fields in broad daylight.
 
			  
			A 
			ladder was hanging down from it, he said, and as he watched, it was 
			retraced into the object, and the whole thing flew off soundlessly. 
			A few days later he answered a knock on his door and was surprised 
			to see a Gipsy lady standing there. She was dressed in a long grey 
			gown and wore sandals. Her skin was a deep olive and
			her eyes had an Oriental cast.  
			  
			She was about 5 feet 4 Inches tall, 
			and her hair was long and 'so black that it looked dyed'. 
				
				'I have travelled a long way,' she said in a low, accented voice. 
			'May I have a glass of water? I must take a pill.' 
			He gave her the water, and she took a round green pill, thanked him, 
			and left. He was puzzled that there was no car in sight. He lived on 
			an isolated back road, and visitors, especially visitors travelling 
			by foot, are very rare. 
				
				'I have travelled a long way' is an old Masonic pass phrase and is 
			frequently used in these contacts. Sometimes the simple phrase, 
			"What time is it?" or "What is your time?" is substituted. 
				 
			The 
			pill-taking ploy is also a common procedure. When a most peculiar 
			being visited a family on Cape May, New Jersey, early in 1967, be 
			also took a pill. He too had 'travelled a long way', and after 
			conducting an inane interview with the family, he stepped into the 
			night, got into a black Cadillac, and drove off with the lights out. 
			A full summary of this case was published in Flying Saucer Review's 
			second special issue.
 A woman living in an old house on the summit of a high hill in the 
			Melville, New York area had a visit from a strange quartet around 
			the same time that the Gipsy lady dropped in on the farmer. Four 
			Indians appeared on her doorstep after a heavy seasonal rainfall. 
			Three of them were stately, dark-skinned, with pointed faces and 
			Oriental features. They were dressed in expensively cut grey suits.
 
			  
			The fourth man looked different, more normal, she said, and was 
			poorly dressed in a frayed black jacket. They told her that their 
			tribe had originally owned her property, and they were going to try 
			to get it back.
 What frightened the woman most - and she was frightened she admitted 
			later - was that there was no mud on their neatly shined shoes, and 
			they had no car in sight. The road and her lawn were soupy with mud 
			at the time. After they left, she realized they had left no 
			footprints on her lawn.
 
 In case after case amateur UFO investigators have rejected the 
			testimony of sincere witnesses who claimed to have seen UFOs land 
			and entities dismount, because no footprints could be found on the 
			site afterwards.
 
 At 1.30 a.m. on Wednesday. March 1st, 1967, a man named Dewitt 
			Baldwin was hunting near Eden, New York when, according to his 
			story, he heard a funny noise and saw a circular gold-colored 
			object land.
 
				
				"I was scared. I didn't know what to do,' Baldwin said. "While I was 
			watching it, a door opened - like a sliding elevator door - and a 
			man walked out and down the incline of the machine. He was dressed 
			in a sort of black tight-fitting suit like a flier and had on some 
			sort of helmet and goggles.
 'He asked me what I was doing. He wasn't white, and he wasn't a 
			Negro. He talked very plainly with no accent. I told him I was 
			hunting. He asked me if I was born here, and I said no, that I was 
			born in Georgia. He took my gun, looked at it, and handed it back to 
			me. He told me he would be back, walked up the saucer, got in, and 
			seconds later zipped out of sight."
 
			Mr Baldwin found a crack in the muzzle of Ms shotgun after the man 
			had examined it. Neither the object nor the pilot left any marks in 
			the fresh snow. Local UFO investigators regarded this as proof that 
			Mr Baldwin bad fabricated his story and was merely seeking notoriety...
 An Iowa college professor who writes popular books under the 
			pseudonym of Brad Steiger has been investigating Men in Black cases 
			in the Midwest for several years.
 
			  
			In his book, Flying Saucer 
			Invasion, he disclosed another common MIB tactic which is being 
			widely employed these days to discredit investigators.  
			  
			Steiger 
			wrote: 
				
				'In the summer of 1968 Brad Steiger received a long distance 
			telephone call from a journalist friend who was covering a UFO flap 
			for his local newspaper' [Steiger wrote in the third person.] "Blast 
			Brad Steiger and Joan Whritenour [a Florida researcher who 
			collaborated with Steiger] and down with John Keell" he thundered.
 'Steiger, recognizing his friend's voice, asked him what the trouble 
			was.
 
 ' "I'm trying to cover this flap over here - my lordl Everyone has 
			seen these UFOsl - but every time I try to dig deep, the eyewitness 
			clams up and says. 'I won't say more. Brad Steiger says awful things 
			will happen to me if I tell too much!' One lady said that John Keel 
			had told her that she would be carried off by the saucer people if 
			she talked to anyone about her sighting."
 
 'Steiger knew that neither he nor Keel were in that particular area 
			at that time and that neither he nor Keel would say such things in 
			even a jesting manner if they had been in the locale, so he pressed 
			his friend for details.
 
 ' "Well, damn near everywhere I go the witness has been given a copy 
			of one of the Steiger-Whritenour books or a magazine with an article 
			in it by you or Keell"
 
 "And the books and articles are 
				supposed to frighten them?" Steiger 
			questioned. "Whoever is delivering these things must be
			adding their own interpretation. * > Who are the deEvery boys? Have 
			you seen them?"
 
 "Not until this afternoon," the newsman answered, "I guess I 
			arrived at this farmhouse just a few minutes after they did. Damn 
			unfriendly little monkeys . *. I was trying to talk to the farmer's 
			wife, while they were chattering at the fanner and waving a copy of 
			this magazine in their hands and telling the man how Brad Steiger 
			was warning all UFO sighters not to talk."
 
 "Could you describe them? "
 
 ' "They were short men in dark suits. All three of them had deep 
			suntans… I can't recall even seeing their eyes. Come to think of it, 
			they all wore dark glasses."'
 
			Small wonder there's so much paranoia in the UFO field. 
			 
			  
			These 
			mystery men have posed as Air Force officers, well-known 
			investigators, and members of the amateur UFO organizations, 
			deliberately sowing confusion and fear in their wake. There are even 
			reliable reports describing entities who resembled exactly the men 
			they were imitating (doppelgangers). On several occasions these 
			doppelgangers have visited witnesses who had been previously 
			interviewed by the author, creating considerable confusion.  
			  
			The 
			Colorado University study tried to shrug off the Heflin photos 
			because of the 'internal inconsistencies' in his story: his visits 
			from nonexistent military officers. Similar episodes have led to 
			extended feuds between amateur investigators and groups, each 
			believing that the other has been warning witnesses not to talk to 
			them.
 In many of these episodes the MIB appear on the scene immediately 
			after the sightings, before the witness has had a chance to report 
			it to anyone. They often flourish an identification card and 
			announce they are from Washington or the CIA (any real CIA agent who 
			went around openly identifying himself as such would soon be 
			standing in an unemployment line).
 
			  
			When they use the Air Force ploy, 
			they have the uncanny ability to use the name of an existing 
			officer, but they change their rank. Thus a Colonel Higgins may turn 
			up in a flap area where an actual sergeant named Higgins is 
			stationed nearby.
 Adding to the nonsense and confusion, we have the dreary face that 
			ufology has always attracted eccentric personalities, and a few (very 
			few) of these situations have proven to be their doing. One 
			quasi-scientific UFO group maintains an office in Washington, D. C., 
			and some of their members are fond of waving their membership cards 
			about authoritatively, giving the false impression that they 
			represent a government agency.
 
 The whole mess began in Tacoma in 1947. Since then the MIB 
			manifestations have created a body of myth and lore fingering the 
			federal government as the sinister silencer of UFO witnesses and 
			censor of UFO news in the press. (There is no UFO censorship, as the 
			publication of this hook attests.) The hardcore UFO buffs maintain 
			these myths, however. They ignore the massive evidence found in the 
			other frames of reference which points to the puzzling existence of 
			the parahuman mimics of man who have always been engaged in 
			mischievous - and sometimes malicious - shenanigans.
 
 Mrs. Coral Lorenzen, who has been running the Aerial Phenomena 
			Research Organization (APRO) since 1952, devoted a chapter of her 
			book VFOs over the Americas to the CIA's purportedly sinister 
			interest in the subject. Her evidence was a combination of hearsay, 
			speculation, coincidences, classic MIB manipulations, and the uneasy 
			feeling that APRO was being watched.
 
			  
			It is cot surprising, of 
			course, that some of the UFO organizations have occasionally been 
			monitored by the FBI and other agencies, since the leading 
			proponents of UFO beliefs have made a habit of publicly attacking 
			the government and the military establishment on radio and 
			television. Some UFO publications do border on the subversive. In 
			the 1950s a strong Communist influence was visible, and some major 
			groups collapsed when they turned more political than ufological. In 
			the 1960s ufology swung in the other direction as members of the 
			extreme right wing embraced the flying saucer cause.  
			  
			In 1969 the 
			long-suffering Air Force got out of the UFO business by closing down 
			
			Project Blue Book, its halfhearted flying saucer agency, thus 
			eliminating the favorite target of the UFO cultists' wrath.
 Another group of CIA-baiting researchers is now overlapping into 
			ufology. They are the comparatively small teams of amateur sleuths 
			dedicated to investigating the assassination of President Kennedy. 
			Here the black Cadillacs and the slight, dark men in black suits are 
			viewed as Cubans and CIA agents. Paranoia runs high because now over 
			fifty witnesses, reporters, and assassination investigators have met 
			with sudden death, some under the most suspicious circumstances.
 
			  
			The 
			full story of Kennedy's murder in Dallas in 1963 is filled with 
			incredible details, many of them similar to things found in the most 
			mysterious of the UFO incidents. Photos and physical evidence have 
			vanished or been tampered with just as in so many UFO cases.  
			  
			A wide 
			assortment of mystery men have been involved; including 
			doppelgangers of the late Lee Harvey Oswald.1 
 1 See Richard PopMn, The Second Oswald
 
 
			
			This other Oswald even 
			turned up at a public rifle range before the assassination,
			making a nuisance of himself (so the witnesses would be sure to 
			remember him?) as he fired an unusual gun which spat out balls of 
			fire at the target. He also visited an automobile showroom and went 
			for a demonstration ride in a new car. The real Oswald could not 
			drive.
 
			  
			His whereabouts at the time of these incidents are known, and he was nowhere near the rifle range and auto agency.
 The huge Warren Report contains numerous pieces of sworn testimony 
			describing MIB-type men in the vicinity of Dealer Plaza and the 
			School Book Depository building immediately before and after the 
			assassination. Long-haired men were seen. This may not sound 
			extraordinary, but remember that long hair was most unusual in 1963. 
			The Beatles did not begin to make an impression until 1964, and the 
			long-hair fad did not get underway until 1965-6.
 
 Elemental hair styles have always been on the longish side, as we 
			have already noted. The UFO lore is filled with accounts of pilots 
			with angular faces and long, shoulder-length hair, usually blond, 
			just as the gods, demons, and angels of earlier times sported long 
			hair, Another interesting consistency is the unnatural colour of 
			their hair, „. so unnatural that witnesses often comment on it.
 
			  
			The 
			late Mrs Mary Hyre, a newspaper reporter in Point Pleasant, West 
			Virginia, received visits from strange personages soon after she 
			began to write about local UFO sightings.  
				
				'Two of these strangers had 
			long, silver hair', she said. 'They were young men, and I couldn't 
			understand why they had dyed their hair such a funny color.' 
			Mrs Hyre also claimed encounters with darkly tanned, soberly dressed 
			gentlemen who rode up to her office in black Cadillacs.  
			  
			One of them asked her what she would do if someone ordered her to stop 
			publishing UFO reports, 
				
				"I'd tell them to go to hell," was her reply- 
			Jerome Clark, one of America's leading ufologists, has his own 
			theory about the present trend towards long hair.  
				
				'For a long time contactees and their followers talked freely of the New Age, while 
			the rest of us, merely sneered,' Clark wrote in Flying Saucer 
			Review, September-October, 1970.   
				'Now there is considerable talk, 
			even a popular song, about the coming of the Aquarian Age. One of 
			the features of the New Age, as contactees predicted years ago, is 
			the revival of interest in the occult: astrology, the Tarot, 
			palmistry, telepathy, spiritualism, magic, witchcraft, the ouija 
			board, and so'.  
			Also involved, of course, are such obvious 
			features as changes in clothing and hair styles… On, basic strategic 
			grounds it is easier now for "them" to walk in our midst unnoticed 
			(a long-haired blond male for example, would now attract little if 
			any attention in the
			streets of most good-sized Western cities, nor would "strange" 
			behavior patterns be any particular cause for alarm in a culture 
			born of nonconformity).
 There are millions of people today who do believe that Venusians, 
			Martians, angels, and demons are walking among us unnoticed, their 
			long hair and peculiar dress and manners no longer attracting 
			attention. Strange men in black turtleneck sweaters and wraparound 
			sun glasses (a favorite garb of our MIB) are being reported 
			everywhere The black Cadillacs are on the prowl.
 
 Have we been invaded by beings from outer space or from some other 
			space-time continuum as so many now believe, or is it that we are 
			just beginning to notice the funny folk who have been in our midst 
			all along?
 
 In any case it is understandable that so many researchers and 
			investigators double bolt their doors at night and spend their days 
			peering fearfully over their shoulders.
 
			  
			  
			  
			CHAPTER TEN
 RENDEZVOUS WITH THE DAMNED
 
 Sometime around the year a.d. 421 a group of artisans from a now 
			lost civilization painstakingly engraved a series of gold leaves or 
			plates with cryptic symbols and buried them in a stone box on the 
			west side of a hill near what is now the village of Manchester, New 
			York.
 
			  
			They remained there, unknown and untouched for fourteen 
			hundred years.  
			  
			Then on Friday, September 21st, 1821, an 
			eighteen-year-old farm boy named Joseph Smith awoke to a vision in 
			his bedroom near Palmyra, New York, A personage appeared, he said 
			later,  
				
				'… standing in the air, for his feet did not touch the 
			floor'. This being was dressed in a long robe 'of most exquisite 
			whiteness', was surrounded by light, and 'his countenance was truly 
			like light ring'.  
			He identified himself as Moroni, a 'messenger sent 
			from the presence of God", called the youth by name, and announced 
			that he had been chosen for a special task. In subsequent 
			appearances Moroni gave Joseph Smith the exact location of the box 
			and told him that he was to dig it up when instructed to do so.
 Six years passed before Smith received word to unearth the tablets 
			The date was September 22nd, 1827. That night the skies were aflame 
			with a spectacular display of meteors, falling stars, and luminous 
			spheres. One of the many witnesses was another young man who lived 
			in northern New York but was unacquainted with Joseph Smith.
 
			  
			His 
			name was Brigham Young.
 Smith dug into the hillside, found the box exactly as Moroni had 
			said, and discovered the gold plates along with 
			crystalline devices which became known as the Urim and Tkammim.
 
			  
			He 
			spent the next three years translating the strange writing -although 
			he had little formal education - purportedly with the aid of the 
			lens-like objects. Eleven of his friends and neighbors signed 
			formal affidavits swearing they had viewed the plates. But once they 
			had been translated, the gold plates vanished.  
				
				'The messenger called 
			for them,' Smith explained. 
			In March 1830 the translation was published by a local printer. It 
			was the Book of Mormon, a history of ancient North America. The 
			following month the Mormon Church was officially organized with
			six members in Fayette, New York. Today it has over 2.5 million 
			followers. 
			  
			Joseph Smith was murdered by a hostile mob in Carthage, Illinois, in 
			June 1844. Brigham Young became the leader of the harassed' band of 
			Mormons who worked their way across the country until they arrived 
			at the rather inhospitable wasteland around the 'Great Salt Lake in 
			Utah. In 1848, many of the Mormons were dismayed by Young's choice 
			for the site of their future city.  
			  
			But a year later the California 
			Gold Rush began and the gold-mad hordes charging westward all paused 
			at Salt Lake Oty for supplies. Within a short time the city was 
			prospering, and many of 
			
			the Mormons became rich overnight.
 This is essentially the history - and the legend - of the Mormons. 
			The controversy which raged around the authenticity of the Book of 
			Mormon and its teachings is too complicated to discuss here. The 
			point is this: there is enough evidence to believe that a spectre, a 
			vision, or an angel visited Joseph Smith, or else he ascertained the 
			location of those plates by some psychic ability - or by pure 
			accident.
 
			  
			And wouldn't it be interesting if the story were entirely 
			true? If the elementals, ultraterrestrials, or some other force did 
			select Joseph Smith, passed along the information about the platesj 
			and engineered the formation of the Mormon religion?
 All of our great religions were founded in almost the same way. 
			Muhammad (a.d. 570-632) was just an Arab tradesman until at the age 
			of forty he began to have visions and conversations with messengers, which led him to organize the Muslim religion and write the 
			Koran.
 
			  
			More recent religions, such as the Seventh Day Adventists and 
			Jehovah's Witnesses, were established by men who claimed 
			communication with supernatural beings and often issued amazing 
			prophecies which came true. Throughout history common men have had 
			uncommon experiences which have changed them instantly and in many 
			cases even changed the whole fabric of the period in which they 
			lived.  
			  
			A Jewish tentmaker named Saul was once on the road to 
			Damascus to help suppress the rise of Christianity when, according 
			to tradition, a blinding light appeared in the sky, and a voice 
			converted him on the spot. He became St Paul.
 Two groups or forces have always been involved in this cosmic 
			charade. Early man quickly learned to separate them into the good (prehuman) 
			and evil (antihuman) and gave each new god and demon a name. In the 
			interests of clarity, we shall label the good guys the Alpha Group 
			and the bad guys the Omega Group. The Alpha Group gave man a set of 
			ethics and moral principles, while the
 
 Omega Group fostered racism, greed, and violence. As time passed, 
			the two groups began imitating each other's tactics, and the task of 
			discriminating between them became impossibly difficult. In his 
			confusion man soon began to associate everything that happened 
			around him to one of the groups. Natural catastrophes and accidents 
			were automatically blamed on the Omega Group.
 
			  
			This led to the 
			development of pure superstition and the awesome, irrational fear of 
			all ultraterresrrials. Things reached a peak in the Middle Ages. 
			Then every new and radical invention was regarded as an invention of 
			the Devil, and men such as Galileo, who came up with new scientific 
			discoveries running contrary to the accepted cosmological view, 
			were jailed or burned at the stake.
 The Omega Group delighted in spreading false interpretations of the 
			universe and false religious teachings. For every Buddha and 
			Muhammad there were ten thousand Cyrus Teeds.
 
 Who was Cyrus Teed? He believed that the universe was a sphere and 
			that the earth was hollow and that we live on the inside of it.
 
			  
			Born 
			in 1839, Teed took up the study of alchemy in IMca, New York, and at 
			the age of thirty he received his first visit from a beautiful 
			female entity who materialized in his laboratory. Following the 
			pattern of such contacts, she first informed him of his past 
			incarnations, He had been mighty kings and great men in past lives, 
			naturally. (No one ever approached by these entities has ever been 
			identified as of lesser station.)  
			  
			Then she proceeded to give him a 
			detailed history of the cosmos, complete with her own special 
			terminology which, of course, he adopted. He began to write 
			pamphlets and books on this new Cellular Cosmogony, became a 
			powerful public speaker, and gradually built a following for his 
			profitable Koreshan cult (he used the pseudonym Koresh). He settled 
			finally in Fort Myers, Florida, where he established his New 
			Jerusalem with about two hundred followers. He died in 1908 of 
			injuries resulting from an altercation with the local sheriff.
 Teed had promised that he would rise again after death. He was 
			buried in a concrete tomb on the island of Estero, and a violent 
			hurricane carried his tomb off in 1921. His body was never 
			recovered. This event gave the Koreshan cult new impetus, and it 
			survived into the 1940s.
 
 Teed-Iike ideas permeate the thousands of books written in every 
			language by percipients and contactees. He proposed, for example, 
			the existence of a supersun which served as the ultimate source of 
			the universe. Albert K. Bender claimed that the space people 
			-.described this central body to him also. Many variations of this
			concept exist in the literature.
 
			  
			Long before Albert Einstein 
			published his famous theory of relatively in 1905.  
			  
			Einsteinian ideas 
			were being expounded by the ultraterrestrials and published by 
			enthused per-dpients. The Big Bang Theory currently in favour with 
			leading astronomers is that the universe began when all matter 
			condensed into a single enormous body, which then exploded. The 
			fragments of that explosion, including our own solar system, are now 
			hurtling outwards from the centre at tremendous velocity, but 
			eventually they will follow the curvature of space as envisioned by 
			Einstein and return to reform a new central body. Then the whole 
			cycle will start over again.  
			  
			Teed and his ilk have been talking 
			about this same thing in their own peculiar way for centuries.
 Scientists and doctors who have examined people claiming visions and 
			visits with ultraterrestrials have been puzzled by their apparent 
			normality. In many cases the percipients have seemed too 
			unintelligent, unimaginative, uneducated, and too sincere to have 
			simply invented the complicated, profusely detailed stories they 
			relate.
 
			  
			The contactee syndrome is not a form of insanity, but 
			insanity - particularly paranoid schizophrenia - frequently develops 
			after the contacts begin. Investigators, however, are still debating 
			which came first in some cases - insanity or contact.
 The first complete psychological study of a percipient took place in 
			the 1890s, when Theodore Flournoy, a professor of psychology at the 
			University of Geneva, investigated the strange phenomena surrounding 
			a girl known as Helene Smith. Beginning in March 1892, Miss Smith 
			started to receive messages through automatic writing {a process in 
			which the percipient merely holds the pen, and some other force 
			moves it).
 
			  
			Soon she was going into trances and speaking in a man's 
			voice with an Italian accent. He identified himself as Leopold and 
			proved to be something of a rascal, prefacing his communications 
			with phrases such as, 'I am here. I wish to be master of this 
			sitting.* Then all kinds of poltergeistic activity would begin. 
			Later, however, Victor Hugo, the deceased author, came through the 
			medium and offered advice on how to handle the evil Leopold.
 The clash between Leopold and Victor Hugo escalated into a classic 
			ultraterrestrial game, just as the modern UFO contactees are caught 
			up in the games waged between the spacemen and the evil Men in 
			Black. Then at 3.15 a.m. on the morning of September 5th, 1896, 
			Helene woke up and had a strange vision. She viewed, she said, a 
			foreign landscape with a 'beautiful blue-pink lake' whose shores 
			were, joined by a transparent bridge.
 
			  
			A crowd of 'peculiar people' 
			approached the bridge. A man 'of dark complexion, carrying an instrument somewhat resembling a carriage lantern in appearance, 
			which, being pressed, emitted flames and which seemed to be a flying 
			machine* stood on the centre of the bridge. Using this instrument, 
			he flew off the bridge, touched the water, and flew bade again.
 By the end of that September the dark compassioned man had become a 
			part of Helene's life. He appeared and disappeared suddenly when she 
			was alone and fully conscious. Often he spoke to her in a strange 
			unknown tongue.
 
			  
			His name was Astane, and he was from Mars, he told 
			her soberly. He looked more Wee an Oriental or last Indian. On a 
			number of occasions he guided her to Ms home on Mars (at least in 
			her visions and hallucinations). Usually he was dressed in 
			beautifully embroidered robes. Miss Smith described at length the 
			vehicles on Mars, stating they had neither wheels nor horses, and 
			people seemed to fly about in them.
 Helene quickly learned to speak the strange Martian language. Her 
			automatic writing also developed a new twist. She began writing in 
			unknown symbols but was able to decipher them and translate Martian 
			into French. These symbols had the Oriental characteristics which 
			have been so often described by modem flying saucer con-tactees who 
			claim to have been aboard the craft.
 
			  
			In later periods Helene would 
			sometimes lapse into this language in the course of normal 
			conversation without realizing she was doing so. It was not, Hournoy 
			noted, the kind of gibberish that children make up when they are 
			playing at being Chinese ot Indian. It was an actual - language 
			which could be broken down and studied.
 Other Martians turned up answering to the names of Ramie and Esenale. 
			Soon Helene's world was peopled with strange beings with long hair 
			and long fingers (both common characteristics of the UFO entities 
			described by contactees) who led her off on spiritual trips to other 
			planets.
 
 On November 2nd, 1898, Helene reported rising at 6.15 am and feeling 
			an invisible arm clasp itself about her waist.
 
				
				'I then saw myself 
			surrounded by a rose-colored light which generally shows itself when 
				a Martian vision is coming,' she said.  
			She found herself suddenly in, 
				
				'a section of country people by men 
				altogether different from those who inhabit our globe. The 
				tallest of all were three feet high, and the majority were an 
				inch or two shorter. Their hands were immense, about ten inches 
				long by eight inches broad; they were ornamented with very long 
				black nails, Their feet were also of great size.   
				These little men of 1898 resided in simple houses 'all low, long, 
			without windows or doors; and each house had a little tunnel about 
				ten feet long running from it into the earth. The roofs were 
				flat, supplied with chimneys or tubes.' 
			All of the things described in Flouraoy's 447-page study, 
			From India 
			to the Planet Mars, published in 1900, have been repeated endlessly 
			in the occult and UFO literature in other cases.  
			  
			The little men have 
			since earned a special place in flying saucer lore. Flournoy 
			speculated that Leopold and Astane could have been the same entity 
			in different guises. Perhaps he was aware of Swedenborg's warning 
			centuries earlier that the ultra-terrestrials could assume any 
			identity, and more interestingly, if the percipient accepted their 
			identity, they would eventually believe themselves that they were 
			Moses, Napoleon, or Astane.  
			  
			Joseph Smith and his friends were 
			treated with visits not only from Moroni but also from entities 
			claiming to be John the Baptist and the apostles Peter, James, and 
			John.
 Our ultraterrestrials are ham actors who delight in assuming roles 
			and adopting names from ancient mythology. Early theologians were 
			kept busy recording the endless names of angels and demons. Numbers 
			are also flourished indiscriminately in both religious and contactee 
			literature. The Bible contains long chapters giving elaborate but 
			seemingly meaningless measurements.
 
			  
			In Oahspe, a book produced by 
			automatic writing in 1880, we learn that Egypt had a population of 
			thirteen million at the tune of Moses birth; four million of these 
			were enslaved Hebrews. (Today Egypt's population is about forty 
			million - not much of an increase in two thousand years.) Page after 
			page in Oahspe lists the total number of spirits and angels and 
			druks (the Oahspe word for the Oraega Group).  
			  
			This numbers game has been extended to 
			the modern UFO phenomena. 'On August 7,1965, three prominent men in 
			Venezuela were present at a UFO landing and had a conversation with 
			two tall (seven to eight feet) beings with long yellow hair, large 
			penetrating eyes, and one piece metallic coverall-type garments. 
			  
			The witnesses, who included a well-known 
			Venezuelan doctor, claimed they communicated through telepathy, and 
			among the questions they asked was. 
				
				'Are there any beings like you 
				living among us?'
 'Yes,' came the reply. Two million, four hundred and seventeen 
			thousand, eight hundred and five.'
 
			That's a very precise answer.  
			  
			But many other contactees have thought 
			to ask the same question, and the answers are wildly variable… from 
			seventy-five to ten thousand (in the city of Los Angeles alone) to 
			up in the millions. Our long-haired friends also indulge in 
			nonsensical prophecy on a grand scale. Asked when the world is going 
			to end, they are apt to give a precise date in the near future,
 Some people have actually started building arks on their say-so. One 
			group in Denmark erected a hasty atom bomb shelter in 1967 and 
			settled down to await Armageddon that December. Who is going to be 
			elected President in the next election? The elemental announce with 
			grave authority that Frank Sinatra or Mae West is in line for the 
			job.
 
 The study of glossolalia has had a small group of scholarly 
			followers for years. This is the attempted translation of the 
			mysterious language(s) spoken by the ultraterrestrials, mediums, and 
			church groups who indulge in speaking in tongues.
 
			  
			It seems to be a conglomerate of many 
			languages, both ancient and modern, and Flournoy 
			wasn't the first to try to unravel it. There are books filled with 
			symbols and translations similar to, but never exactly like, Helene 
			Smith's Martian language. Dozens of these phony alphabets have been 
			published in dead seriousness* A retired teacher named John W. Dean 
			collected the testimony of flying saucer contactees and the 
			elaborate information passed along by the space people for his book, 
			Flying Saucers Close Up.  
			  
			The project must have taken years. He 
			devotes many pages to listing unknown planets far out in the cosmos 
			(as described by the ultra terrestrials), and giving encyclopedic 
			data about each one.  
			  
			Here's a sample from one of his tables: 
				
					
					Planet Colonized,Name Indigenous, Population Day Length Diameter Year
 Uninhabited in Billions in Hours in Miles Length
 Wamovaldam Un.  -  "36.6 9,810 0.95
 Tarmandre Col. 1.2 23.7 10,480 1.88
 Ophianche lad. 3.62 28.0 7,188 3,21
 Salumandran Lid. ' 4.23 24.1 9,170 5.66
 
			Dean lists hundreds of unknown planets in this fashion.  
			  
			The group in 
			this particular table happen to be from the star system of Alpha Tauri, 53.6 light years away. But anyone with) a basic knowledge of 
			orbital mechanics and a slide rule can check the mass of figures and 
			discover that many of these alleged planetary systems are quite 
			impossible. The cosmos of the ultraterrestrials must be filled with 
			colliding planets weaving and spinning in defiance of all the known 
			laws of motion.
 In Flying Saucers Close Up Mr Dean also presents a complete 
			vocabulary and the written language of the folks from the planet 
			called Korendor. Some of the symbols bear a striking resemblance to 
			runic ciphers. His book is only a minor example of the privately
			published material circulated to about two thousand hardcore flying 
			saucer believers.
 
			  
			Over the past twenty years the ultraterrestrials 
			have constructed a whole fantasy world through the contactees - a 
			cosmos which includes great Intergalactic Councils (as soon as we 
			grow up, we may be permitted to join).
 On other levels, in different frames of reference believers speak in 
			terms of other planes. The most common belief shared by every 
			culture on this planet is that there are seven distinct worlds or 
			realities. We have on the lowest rung of the ladder. If there is a 
			hell, we must be living in it
 
 Numerous religious sects are concerned with Holy Ghost apparitions 
			and the speaking in tongues phenomenon, which they accept as 
			verification of their beliefs. The United Pentecostal Church, for 
			example, finds great meaning in such manifestations… and they occur 
			constantly within the church. Church bulletins and publications are 
			filled with accounts of these events.
 
			  
			The newsletter, Global 
			Witness, June-July 1970, described the following, as reported by a 
			group in Peru: 
				
				On April 28th as they were praying, the ten-year-old daughter 
			suddenly went into what they thought was a 'fit of convulsions'. 
				   
				She 
			began to jerk and shake all over. Her terrified mother rushed to her 
			side to attempt to help her daughter, but an unseen hand restrained 
			her, and a voice urged her to leave the girl alone. In just a few 
			moments this little girl, who did not know what the Holy Ghost was, 
			began to speak in a strange but lovely new language.    
				The following 
			Tuesday night the oldest boy was marvelously filled with the Holy 
				Ghost. He rejoiced in the Spirit and spoke with tongues for over 
				an hour.
 Convulsive seizures are common to all the frames of reference. Many 
			UFO contactees suffer chronic headaches, muscular soreness, and 
			other symptoms of such seizures after their experiences. These fits 
			could be caused by some disorder of the frontal lobe. Primitive 
			peoples usually regarded such fits as demonic possessions.
 
 One of the world's foremost psychologists, the late Dr Carl G. Jung, 
			examined the pseudo religious aspects of the UFO rumors and 
				published a shrewd analysis, Flying Saucers: A Modern Myth of Things Seen in 
			the Sky in 1959.
   
				He correlated the UFO reports with psychic 
			manifestations and suggested that the phenomena were products of the 
			collective consciousness of mankind. The psychic aspect plays so 
			great a role that it cannot be left out of account,' Dr Jung
 stated. 
				The discussion of it leads to psychological problems which 
			involve just as fantastic possibilities or impossibilities as the 
			approach from the physical side.'
 
			Another scientist, Dr 
			
			Jacques Vallee, an astronomer and computer 
			specialist, spent several years sifting UFO accounts and comparing 
			them with the earlier fairy lore of Europe.  
			  
			He felt that the two phenomena shared a 
			single cause. In 
						
						
						Passport to Magonia, Vallee 
			offered a catalogue of 923 flying saucer landings from 1868 to 1968, 
			many of which included the classic characteristics of the more 
			universal psychic manifestations.  
				
				"Is it reasonable to draw a 
			parallel between religious apparitions, the fairy faith, the reports 
			of dwarf-like beings with supernatural powers, the airship tales in 
			the United States in the last century, and the present stories of 
			UFO landings?" he asks. 'I would strongly argue that it is - for one 
			simple reason: the mechanisms that have generated these various 
			beliefs are identical.' 
			The crux of the problem is to reach beyond the endless reports of 
			varied manifestations and seek out the source: the physical, 
			psychic, of psychological mechanism which has inspired these 
			beliefs.  
			  
			All of these incidents are subjective; that is, we have 
			only the testimony of the witnesses that these peculiar events 
			occurred. Although millions of people have claimed encounters with 
			the ultraterrestrials in the past two thousand years, many millions 
			of others have not had such experiences. Astronomers and physicists 
			are neither trained nor equipped to deal with a purely subjective 
			phenomenon.
 Only a few examples have been given, but it is apparent that,
 
				
					
					
					Joseph 
			Smith
					
					Cyrus Teed
					
					Helene Smith
					
					even John Dean, 
			...were all 
			confronted by the same basic phenomenon.  
			  
			Each approached it in a 
			different, individualized way, and each received information 
			structured to support Ms own beliefs. Albert K. Bender and Teed both 
			explored black magic and alchemy.  
			  
			Both claimed they received complex 
			cosmic theories from parahuman entities. Dean asked for and received 
			elaborate facts and figures about extraterrestrial beings and the 
			planets they supposedly inhabited. like Swedenborg and the biblical 
			prophet Enoch, Helene Smith was shown other worlds and led to 
			believe that she was visiting other planets.  
			  
			Reinhold Schmidt was 
			transported to the centre of the pyramid; Bender was taken to 
			underground bases in Antarctica; others have visited the underground 
			palaces of the fairies and the subterranean cities of the Deros. It 
			is not likely that any of these places exist in reality. It is more 
			likely that these people made hallucinogenic excursions, or
			mind trips, guided by some force which is capable of manipulating 
			the electrical circuits of the brain.
 The only, alternative explanation is that all these people were 
			liars, hoaxsters or lunatics. None of the scientists, psychiatrists, 
			and theologians who have investigated these matters have been able 
			to accept such a simple explanation.
 
 A remarkable man named 
			Aleister Crowley, born in 1875, became known 
			as the wickedest man in the world through his work in black 'magick'. 
			He too claimed to receive visits from an angel, and he was the 
			centre of a large cult around the turn of the century. He was noted 
			for sexually liberating Ms female followers, and he published a 
			number of books expounding on his personal cosmology.
 
			  
			Those books 
			are currently enjoying a revival of popularity among the youth 
			subculture.
 In 1939 a young rocket fuel scientist, John Whiteside Parsons, 
			joined the Crowley cult and burrowed into the dark world of 'magick' 
			and the occult. Another practitioner of the mysteries crossed 
			Parsons' path in 1946, and the two became close friends, combining 
			their efforts to conjure up demons and elementals. The newcomer, 
			Lafayette Ronald Hubbard, claimed he had a personal angel, a 
			beautiful red-haired entity whom he called the Empress.
 
			  
			The two men 
			donned robes and engaged in secret mystical rites. According to 
			Parsons, they had some success.  
			  
			On the night of January 14th, 1946, 
			the electric power failed as they were mumbling incantations, and 
			Hubbard was struck by something on the right shoulder, knocking a 
			candle from his hand,  
				
				'He called me,' Parsons wrote, 'and we 
			observed a brownish-yellow light about seven-feet high. I brandished 
			a magical sword, and it disappeared. Ron's right arm was paralyzed 
				for the rest of the night.' 
			During one of their rites, Parsons was given this prophecy:  
				
				'Babalon 
			[the whore of Babylon] is incarnate upon the earth today, awaiting 
			the proper hour of her manifestation. And in that day my work will 
			be accomplished, and I shall be blown away upon the breath of the 
			father…' 
			A rocket fuel explosion at a laboratory in Pasadena in 1952 did blow 
			away the ill-fated Parsons.
 Lafayette Ronald Hubbard went on to bigger and better things. Born 
			in Tilden, Nebraska in 1911, he served in the Marines, studied 
			engineering, and became a prolific science fiction writer. Sometime 
			around 1948 he began to develop a form of pseudopsychiatry which he 
			labeled Dianetics. John Campbell, Jr., editor of Astounding Science 
			Fiction, served as one of his first patients and was so impressed by Hubbard's concept that he persuaded him to write an 
			article about it for Ms magazine.
 
			  
			The article caused such a stir 
			among the science fiction fans that Hubbard quickly churned out a 
			full-length book, Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Healing. 
			It became an instant bestseller, and a new movement was born.
 Teed's neologisms (such as 'planets are spheres of substance 
			aggregated through the impact of afferent and efferent fluxions of 
			essence*) were nothing compared to Hubbard's new vision oi the human 
			mind and soul. All our troubles, he decided, were caused by 'engrams': 
			traumas stored in the unconscious or reactive mind. Patients were 
			guided by auditors - people who have already undergone the process, 
			unearthed their own engrains, and reached the exalted state of 
			'clear'.
 
 The American Medical Association, the U.S. Food and Drug 
			Administration and other authorities took a dim view of Dianetics, 
			and Hubbard's career had many ups and downs throughout the 1950s. At 
			one point he publicly claimed that he had even visited Venus, 
			Apparently the friendly Venusians were 100 per cent behind Dianetics. 
			But even with their support, Mr Hubbard suffered many setbacks and 
			his movement went into limbo for a, few years, reappearing in the 
			late 1950s as the Church of Scientology.
 
 Inside newsletters and publications distributed to the operators of 
			the Scientology offices or "org" (short for organization) are 
			written in Hubbaid's own unique jargon with emphasis on the magic 
			word sell. In 1962, the Food and Drug Administration raided the 
			Founding Church of Scientology in Washington, D.C., and seized 
			literature and a number of E-meters.
 
			  
			The E-meters are a simple 
			electrical device similar to a lie detector and are used by auditors 
			in counseling sessions. On August 30th, 1971, Federal District 
			Court Judge Gerhard A. Gesell in Washington ruled in favour of 
			Scientology and ordered the return of the confiscated materials 
			because the FDA failed to prove that the E-meters were being sold as 
			healing devices.
 In the 1960s Hubbard's movement spread throughout the world despite 
			the opposition of medical societies and legal authorities from Great 
			Britain to Greece. Hubbard now spends most of his time cruising 
			outside the twelve-mile limit aboard his magnificently appointed 
			yacht. The Church of Scientology is now a franchise operation with 
			Hubbard receiving a small percentage of the take.
 
			  
			He has come a long 
			way since those days when he and Parsons were drawing circles on the 
			floor and praying to unseen demons.
 The games of the ultraterrestrials never end.
 
 The latest entry is an outfit called Koscot Interplanetary, Inc. of 
			Orlando. Florida, who have 'had difficulties with law enforcement 
			agencies in several states', according to the Better Business 
			Bureau.
 
			  
			Koscot has been pushing 'Dare To Be Great', a motivational 
			course consisting of a series of four tapes which will tell you how 
			to get rich. The four tapes cost only seventy-seven hundred dollars, 
			but the investment can be quickly recouped by selling the course to 
			others. The whole scheme is based upon a pyramid plan with each 
			student peddling the course to new seekers of truth.  
			  
			Unfortunately, 
			the population of a state can not support an indefinite selling plan 
			that depends upon recruiting other sellers and students, and the 
			Better Business Bureau has labeled the whole enterprise 'doubtful 
			and unrealistic'.  
			  
			The tapes deal largely with the same philosophy 
			and cosmology found in all the occult lore.
 
			  
			  
			CHAPTER ELEVEN
 Not One of 
			Them, etc...
 
				
					
						
						Not one of them who took up in his youth with this 
						opinion that there are no gods ever continued until old 
						age faithful to his conviction.Plato
 
			A New Jersey sign painter named Howard Menger experienced a most revealing flying saucer vision in August 
			1956, when he came face-to-face with a godlike being. But according 
			to his book From Outer Space to You. Menger's story began years 
			earlier.  
			  
			As a boy he had encountered a beautiful female entity in a 
			wood and was told that he would one day serve the illustrious space 
			people. As a young man in,' the Army he was again contacted, this 
			time in Juarez. Mexico, by a man with long blond hair and suntanned 
			skin, riding in a taxicab. Then in the mid-1950s, Menger's real 
			adventures began.  
			  
			Strange aerial objects haunted the area around his 
			home near High Bridge, New Jersey, there were innumerable 
			witnesses, including lawyers, physicists, and reporters. 
			  
			The space 
			people began to drop in on him for coffee and friendly chats about 
			the state of the universe. They asked him to buy dark sunglasses 
			with red lenses, and on several occasions they even pressed him into 
			service as a barber, inviting him to chop off their long blond 
			tresses so they would look even more human. He was rewarded with a 
			flight to the moon (he brought back some strange rocks which were, 
			he said, moon potatoes).  
			  
			Finally, in August 1956, he met the boss 
			spaceman.
 A saucer landed in a field near Menger's home, and two men stepped 
			out of it.
 
				
				"Then a magnificent sight appeared in the doorway,' Menger 
			wrote. 'A tali, handsome man with long blond hair over his shoulders 
			stood towering at the entrance… Then he came toward me. But he 
			seemed to float or glide rather than walk."  
			This being was dressed 
			in, 
				
				'a radiant white ski-type uniform… the sleeves were full and 
			loose; the neckline was high, similar to that of a turtleneck 
			sweater.'  
			He wore a light blue, fluorescentlike cape fastened to his 
			shoulder with a gold pin in the shape of a wheel. His skin was 
			white, and his eyes 'were the color of goldenrod when it is ripe.' 
			His fingers were long and tapering.
 This superbeing gave Menger a message of love and truth in the
			grand tradition of the elemental's, then returned to his flying 
			saucer, and Sew oil to the stars.
 
 When Howard Menger courageously published his story (it was 
			privately printed in 1959), he was roundly cheered by one group of 
			cultists for having solved the UFO mystery and roundly condemned by 
			the equally fanatical scientific ufologists who believed in the 
			existence of extraterrestrial spaceships but could not believe that 
			anyone had ever been close to one. His business collapsed as he 
			gained a reputation for being a crack-pot, and his family fell 
			apart.
 
 If Howard Menger had lived in another age, he might have been looked 
			upon as great prophet and visionary - one of those privileged 
			individuals who consorted with the gods. Sculptors would have been 
			commissioned to carve mighty replicas of the superbeing. Poems and 
			songs would have been written about his experience and handed down 
			from one generation to the next.
 
 Unfortunately, Menger lived in 1956. He was laughed out of business.
 
			  
			His book earned a few hundred dollars from sales to the hardcore 
			cultists and was then forgotten. But it is a revealing record of the 
			mechanism of belief which is at work in these cases. If such things 
			could happen in 1956, then they may also have happened in 1056 and 
			556 B.C. There are in fact extensive legends suggesting that this 
			sort of thing has been happening to men since the beginning of 
			history. The long-haired, long-fingered ultraterrestrials have been 
			walking among us forever.
 Before we can understand this tangled maze, we must attempt to 
			understand something of the origins and complexities of human 
			history. We must try to ascertain how it all began, how the 
			ultra-terrestrials have influenced our course, and where it is all 
			leading us.
 
 Our scientists can only guess at how the universe itself came into 
			being. The two most popular theories are the Big Bang concept, 
			already discussed, and the Steady State theory that matter is 
			constantly replenishing itself and that the cosmos really has no 
			beginning or end. The beginning of the solar system and the birth of 
			the planets are a little easier to deal with. The commonly accepted 
			theory is that the planets are cooling masses of material ejaculated 
			from the sun.
 
 Two independent scientists, Dr C. J. Hyman and C. William Kinsman, 
			have developed a new Geocosmic theory based upon the new discoveries 
			outlined in earlier chapters, coupled with Velikovsky-like evidence 
			and speculations. They suggest that Earth once pursued the orbit now 
			occupied by Venus and that Mars was in the present
			Earth orbit.
 
			  
			This would explain the legends of early man, which 
			claimed that Earth days and years were once shorter than they are 
			now and that the human life-span was once considerably longer. 
			Ancient calendars carved in stone also indicate important 
			differences in the early Earth years. If the Earth began as a lump 
			of matter cast off by the sun, it may have first passed along the 
			orbit of Mercury before spiraling outward and settling into the 
			orbit of Venus. This could have happened five billion years ago.
 The cooling planet Earth could have reached the life support stage 
			hundreds of millions of years ago. and it could have been inhabited 
			while it was in the Venus orbit. If Mars was then in the Earth 
			orbit, it too could have supported life. But as it was pushed 
			further into space by the approach of Earth, the Martians either 
			died out or were forced to make radical biological adjustments to 
			their new environment.
 
 In a recent letter Kinsman also proposes that there was some efforts 
			to crossbreed Martians with earthlings.
 
			  
			He states: 
				
				If Mars was 'pushed' out there in our Permian times to make way for 
			Earth in our present orbits, its environmental change in climate in 
			this some three hundred million years would surely modify its 
			humanoids, because of the scarcity of air, water, and warmth, into 
			presumably a more scrawny physique no longer adapted to normal life 
			on Earth…    
				Presumably for millions of years they have been trying to 
			hybridize their fauna and flora with ours and to develop some sort 
			of humanoid to whom they could bequeath the advances which their 
			dying civilization had long since acquired. Success in this seems to 
			have finally come with the sudden hybrid appearance of Cro-Magnon 
			man some fifty thousand years ago.    
				They may have visited us 
			frequently and openly for such time as they could stand it, until a 
			few millennia ago (when men were still few and fearful). 
			If the Earth did begin in another orbit and did undergo the changes 
			postulated by these scientists, it may have been even more unstable 
			than it is now and cataclysmic occurrences would have been logical. 
			 
			  
			Velikovsky pointed out that human folklore has recorded many such 
			cataclysms, including a period when the entire earth was bathed in 
			total darkness for three or more days. The Earth may have followed 
			an elliptical orbit which carried it so far away from the sun that 
			it was plunged into darkness. Then it looped back and fell into the 
			present orbit.
 Elementals have constantly told occultists and UFO contactees that 
			mankind began on Venus and that orbital changes have taken place in 
			the past and will recur in the future. On April 24th, 1964, a farmer 
			named Gary Wilcox allegedly had a two-hour conversation with a pair 
			of faceless little men from a flying saucer in a field near Newark 
			Valley. New York.
 
			  
			Among other things, he said, they told him that 
			the Earth would soon be where Mars is now.1
 Many flying saucer books have followed the premise that the Earth 
			was originally seeded by beings from outer space. Man has always 
			assumed that the frequently observed parahumaus had to originate 
			from beyond our planet or even from beyond our solar system or 
			space-time continuum.
 
 Science writer Otto Binder's Flying Saucers Are Watching Us dealt at 
			length with the theories of an engineer named Max H. Flindt.
 
			  
			Flindt 
			proposed, 
				
				'that man is a hybrid from the union of ancient spacemen 
			and some earthly species of man-ape who existed, according to recent 
			anthropological finds, as long as two million years ago.' 
			More orthodox scientists have struggled for the past hundred years 
			to find a provable system of evolution to account for man's 
			appearance.  
			  
			The commonly accepted view is that man was a mere animal 
			for thousands of years, and he somehow suddenly developed 
			intelligence and consciousness and quickly evolved from a low hairy 
			animal to his present exalted status of low hairless animal. The 
			mythical missing link of the Sunday supplements is supposed to be 
			the animal that bridged the two orders of life. 
			  
			Is 
			
			the movie, 2001, 
			Arthur C. Clarke solved the problem by having a sudden outside 
			influence - the slab-like monolith - appear in the midst of a group 
			of apes. It led them to discover tools, namely clubs, and they began 
			bashing in each other's heads.
 There are really only three primary theories for the origin of man:
 
				
					
					
					The religious theory: man was created by some greater intelligence 
			through the manipulation of physical matter and energy.
					
					The cultist theory: man migrated to Earth from some other planet, or 
			he was seeded here by some other race, or he was produced when some 
			other race crossbred with earthly animals and produced the present 
			strain of Homo sapiens.
					
					The theory of evolution: a 
					series of random chemical and biological accidents took place over a period of millions of years, and 
			man slowly evolved from lower life forms. 
			1 See Dr. Berthold SchwarzTs psychiatric study of Mr. Wilcwt in UFO
			Percipients.
 
 
			Billions of people have believed and still believe in supernatural 
			creation.  
			  
			A few million accept Darwin's theory of evolution, and 
			only a few thousand are even willing to consider the seeded idea. 
			The real truth may be a combination of all three, Of the three, 
			evolution is actually the weakest and the most difficult to support. 
			Evolution adequately explains the development of living species, the 
			process of natural selection, and the other things, but it fails to 
			provide a rational and provable explanation for the process of 
			creation itself.  
			  
			Scientists shrug this off with limp statements 
			about how bolts of lightning struck puddles of chemicals and induced 
			life. But if such a lightning process were true, it should be still 
			continuing, and it should be easy to duplicate in our laboratories. 
			The fact that it is not a discernible continuing process (new 
			species are not constantly appearing) and that we have not managed 
			to duplicate it weakens the concept…
 The Japanese have myths and legends which claim that their islands 
			were first settled by beings who descended from the sky. These 
			stories are a part of the Japanese culture. The Eskimos believe they 
			were somehow flown to die Arctic circle in ancient times.
 
			  
			The natives 
			of the Sahara desert have folklore about blue-skinned people from 
			the sky who had such impact that certain tribes still dye their 
			skins blue in emulation of these ancient cosmic beings; Deep in the 
			Bayan-Kara-Ula Mountains of China there is a tribe of diminutive 
			people about four feet high. Hieroglyphs have been found in that 
			region (on the border of China and Tibet) by Russian archaeologists. 
			 
			  
			When translated, these records describe how members of
			the Dropa 
			tribe came to Earth in some kind of flying machine.  
			  
			The stone disks 
			bearing these inscriptions have been dated at about twelve thousand 
			years. Ancient graves have also been found there containing small 
			human bodies with huge craniums and underdeveloped skeletons.
 There is, in fact, a staggering amount of historical and 
			archaeological evidence to support the seeded notion, while the 
			evolutionists are obliged to fall back on a few fragments of fossils 
			and a mountain of conjecture.
 
 The concept of supernatural creation is wholly dependent upon the 
			religious texts and the testimony of the ultra terrestrials. The 
			story of Adam and Eve can be found in the ancient writings of the 
			Greeks, Syrians, Egyptians, Abyssinians, Hebrews, and many other
			ancient peoples. like the tales of the deluge and the Ark, the 
			Garden oE Eden is a universal myth. Unlike the deluge stories, it 
			seems to be largely allegorical.
 
			  
			Archaeologists digging in the 
			Middle East have found artifacts which indicate that Neanderthal, 
			Cro-Magnon, and modern men all existed during the same period. This 
			not only shoots down the theory of evolution, but it suggests that 
			modern man - a creature with a conscience and a consciousness - was 
			separate and distinct from primitive man.
 If we ever manage to assemble a more accurate history of Earth, we 
			may find that modern man is the descendant of the survivors of some 
			earlier civilization which existed thousands, even millions, of 
			years ago, and that he has no direct biological linkage with the 
			lower animals at all. We must not ignore the possibility that the 
			Earth was originally colonized by beings from some other point in 
			space.
 
			  
			Historians and archaeologists are troubled by the fact that 
			mankind seems to have appeared quite suddenly on this planet Ether 
			we were placed here, even stranded here, at some point between 
			thirty and seventy thousand years ago. or we were created in some 
			fashion millions of years after the Earth itself had been created 
			and had passed through many ages during which it supported different 
			kinds of non-human life.
 The process of creation is explained somewhat in the religious and 
			occult texts. We are told that the first man, Adam, was an 
			androgynous being directly linked with the supermind of the 
			universe. He was a temporary transmogrification of energy - an 
			ultra-terrestrial who became locked into a physical form. Once this 
			descent occurred, he was given a mate so that he could reproduce.
 
 The Earth was already inhabited by two distinct life forms. There 
			were primitive animals, which might have included cavemen as well as 
			lower beasts. Perhaps the cavemen were an earlier experiment which 
			was failing. There were also thousands, if not millions, of 
			nonphysical beings from the world of higher frequencies, who 
			occupied the Earth by sharing the same space with the planet.
 
			  
			These 
			beings may have been free from the greater intelligence (fallen 
			angels), or they may have been under the control of a lesser 
			intelligence. In any cases, the Earth was their personal playground. 
			They owned it.
 Now suddenly, a group (or several groups) of ultraterrestrials from 
			a higher plane descended to Earth. They were forbidden to do certain 
			things. We can't even guess what those things were. In the 
			scriptures Adam and Eve were forbidden to eat the fruit of the Tree
			of the Knowledge of Good and Evil. This was probably more symbolism, 
			and the true meaning is lose.
 
 A British scholar, Brinsley Le Poer Trench, has studied the ancient 
			scriptures carefully and produced two important books, The
			Sky-People and Men Among Mankind to explain his theories. He 
			describes and defines the people of the Serpent. These people may 
			have been the fallen angels or devils who later plagued Adam and 
			Eve. If they felt they were owners of the Earth, they may have 
			greatly resented this hew flock of ultraterrestrials, and they may 
			have conspired to lead the Adam and Eve group to destruction by 
			getting them to violate the orders of their overlord.
 
 A battle now takes shape. A lesser group of ultraterrestrials (UTs) 
			is in possession of the Earth. A bunch of newcomers invades the 
			planet, and perhaps their ruling intelligence has a plan - a very 
			long range plan - to wrest the earth from the owners. Masses of 
			energy can not fight with bombs, bullets, and arrows. They need a 
			physical battlefield and physical armies. The whole thing must be 
			played out like some gigantic chess game.
 
 The first step is to create the necessary physical army. Tactics 
			must be invented so that the physical army can overthrow the 
			nonphysical owners. The game becomes incredibly complex.
 
 If several different superintelligences were involved, then one group 
			of ultraterrestrials would descend or be materialized in Japan and 
			China, bearing the specific racial characteristics imposed upon them 
			by their overlord. Another overlord would plant his soldiers in 
			Africa; another would create Indians in North and South America; and 
			so on.
 
 In the beginning one superintelligence may have tried to utilize the 
			Neanderthal men as his physical army. Ultraterrestrials were sent 
			down the frequency scale to help guide the cavemen. To facilitate 
			communication between the UTs and the Neanderthal men, the tall, 
			blond, normally sexless UTs were made to more closely resemble their 
			primitive contacts. They were given sexes but were forbidden to participate 
			in the pleasurable rites of sex… the Tree of the Knowledge.
 
 The 
			
			Serpent People were sometimes able to control groups of cavemen 
			and managed to trick some of the TITs into breaking their chastity. 
			The UTs engaged in sexual intercourse with the cave-women.3
 
			  
			3 This crossbreeding between Adam (ultraterrestrial) types and lower 
			animals is suggested in Genesis 25:19-34, and relates a miraculous 
			birth. 
			  
			  
			This 
			produced strange responses in their materialized nervous system. 
 Emotions were born. Frequencies were changed. The 
			direct control of the superintelligence was driven from their 
			bodies. They were trapped on Earth, unable to ascend the 
			electro-magnetic scale and re-enter their etheric world. With the 
			loss of control they became animals, albeit highly intelligent 
			animals.
 
 Since the UTs memories were part of the greater intelligence.-the 
			loss of contact meant also the complete loss of their former 
			identity. They were locked on this planet, leaderless, in a totally 
			strange and hostile environment.
 
 The first UTs to be thus trapped became the first real men. They had 
			to learn to hunt and kill, to build fires and huts. They were lost: 
			the victims of the first battle between the Serpent People and the 
			ultimate intelligence.
 
 Now the Serpent People or Omega Group, attacked man in various ways, 
			trying to rid the planet of him. But the supers intelligence was 
			still able to look over man, and new, more tightly controlled UTs 
			were sent to offer advice and assistance. Earliest man was told in 
			carefully simplified ways of his origin and purpose. The 
			superintelligence became God and early man worshipped Him in 
			many ways and under many names.
 
			  
			God worked out new ways of 
			communication and control always in
			conflict with the Serpent People.
 Much is made of the fact that Adam and Eve were terrified by the 
			first night, indicating that they were unused to a world without 
			light. Perhaps as ultraterrestrials they were accustomed to total 
			vision or perception of all the frequencies; life on those higher 
			planes would be bathed in continuous radiation, and there would be 
			no night or day. No time.
 
			  
			Now Adam and Eve were not only trapped on 
			this miserable little planet, but they were also caught up in a 
			world that moved in a single direction through the field of time. 
			This would take some getting used to, even if they couldn't remember 
			their previous existence as UTs.
 Through intercourse with the existing cave people, the fallen UTs 
			produced the new races of man. They were the missing link. And in
			Isaac's barren wife Rebekah suddenly conceived, and the Lord said 
			to her. Two nations are in thy womb, and two manner of people shall 
			be separated from thy bowels; and the one people shall be stronger 
			than the other people; and the elder shall serve the younger.
 
			  
			Eebekah gave birth to twins and one, Esau,  
				
				'came out red all over 
			like an baity garment'.  
			Later Esau sold his birth right to Jacob.
 Many ways all three of our hypotheses for the origin of man became 
			correct. Evolution is involved. Extraterrestrial descent is 
			involved. Creation is involved.
 
 In some parts of the world the Serpent People successfully posed as 
			gods and imitated the techniques of the super-intelligence. This led 
			to the formation of pagan religions centered around human sacrifices. 
			The conflicts, so far as man himself was concerned, became one of 
			religions and races. Whole civilizations based upon the worship of 
			these false gods rose and fell in Asia, Africa, and South America.
 
			  
			The battleground had been chosen, and the mode of conflict had been 
			decided upon.
 The human race would supply the pawns. The mode of control was 
			complicated as usual. Human beings were largely free of direct 
			control. Each individual had to consciously commit himself to one of 
			the opposing forces. After that commitment was made voluntarily, the 
			chosen force could possess the individual to some degree. The UTs 
			very carefully explained this process to the early priests who 
			interpreted it and tried to pass it on to their followers.
 
			  
			The rites 
			of baptism were born.
 The main battle was for what was to become known as the human soul.
 
 Once an individual had committed himself, he opened a door so that 
			an indefinable something (probably an undetectable mass of 
			intelligent energy) could actually enter his body and exercise some 
			control over his subconscious mind. This soul was directly linked 
			with the superintelligence and with all similar souls, thus making 
			possible mental telepathy, prophetic dreams, and other wonders.
 
			  
			In 
			those thousands of cases in which this subconscious force lapsed 
			over into the conscious mind, we find destructive fanaticism and 
			obsession. If the controlling intelligence was Omega (antihuman), 
			the stricken individual suffers from insanity or commits criminal 
			actions, social disorders, and so on.
 If this soul abandons the living body, total disorientation could 
			conceivably result. The body might enter a mindless catatonic 
			trance. Persons with an advanced soul could consciously eject it 
			front their bodies for short periods and indulge in astral 
			projection. The body would appear to be dead, or almost dead, during 
			this period of desertion. In astral projection literature we are 
			told about a silver cord which seems to connect the free flying soul 
			with the sleeping body. If that cord is cut or broken, the soul 
			can't re-enter the body, and it dies or is possessed by an evil 
			force.
 
			  
			Astral projectionists claim that sometimes when they return 
			to their body,
			they find a dark elemental engulfing it, trying to possess it during 
			their absence, and they have to fight the evil thing off.
 The validity of astral projection is debatable, of course. But let's 
			suppose for a moment that it is a genuine phenomenon. If some people 
			can project themselves consciously and remember the experience, then 
			it is also possible that many others project their souls while 
			asleep. They're never aware that they're doing it. The liberated 
			souls fly about, perhaps rendezvousing with other souls to receive 
			orders or some programming process.
 
			  
			If the soul is some kind of ultrahigh frequency energy, then it could be visible to some 
			sensitive people as a blob of faint light in the night sky. In other 
			words, some UFOs could be astral travelers!
 Flying saucer contactees usually end up talking about souls and 
			reincarnation (Karma): The UFO entities try to convey the truth 
			about reincarnation to the people they approach. Not many of these 
			people are able to properly interpret what they have been told. 
			Several major religions, particularly in the Orient, are based upon 
			the principles of reincarnation.
 
			  
			In Tibet when a Dalai Lama dies, 
			the priests go out and scour the mountains searching for a small 
			child who possesses specific birthmarks and other things which 
			identify him as the reincarnated High Lama.  
			  
			Sometimes the search 
			goes on for years. When a likely prospect is finally found, several 
			religious and personal articles are spread before him. If the child 
			goes unerringly for those items which had been owned by the dead 
			Dalai Lama, he is declared the new ruler. This system works and has 
			been in use for centuries.
 There are hundreds of carefully investigated and authenticated cases 
			of reincarnation. As might be expected, a majority of these occur in 
			India and other countries where belief 
			
			in Karma runs high. Usually, 
			small children are involved. Such children recall completely their 
			previous life in a distant village, and when investigators take them 
			to that village, they recognize everything and everyone, have a 
			tearful reunion with their former family, and are even able to 
			describe in detail how they died.
 
 Actually, true reincarnation is impossible. Memory is stored by an 
			electrical system in the brain, and when the brain dies, all 
			memories are also cancelled out.
 
			  
			Our personalities, egos, emotional 
			structure, and memories are all part of the brain's complex 
			circuitry. The brain dies very quickly - as soon as the oxygen 
			supply is cut off. All of this circuitry dies with it, like a radio 
			being turned off. If the soul is merely a mass of high frequency 
			energy, then it would not retain either memory or personality.  
			  
			When 
			the body, or host dies, this mass
 of energy would be liberated either to rejoin the main intelligence 
			of which it is always a part or to find and possess a new host. It 
			would not carry along any memory of its previous body or life. 
			However, the computerlike superintelligence would have a complete 
			memory of that other life stored within it. It could feed that 
			information to another brain by
			
			channeling it through any soul at 
			random.
 
			  
			A person recalling a past life under hypnosis (there are 
			thousands of cases of this) might actually just be tuning his 
			subconscious into the central computer. There may be some subtle 
			need on the intelligence's part to bring about interest and 
			investigation into a specific past life. So the hypnotized person is 
			fed the information.
 In Oahspe we are told that all cases of reincarnation are the work 
			of mischievous spirits known as engrafters. An engrafter swoops down 
			on an uncommitted soul and possesses it, feeding a complete memory 
			of a past life into the brain.
 
 The main information passed along to contactees is simply that the 
			human body provides a host for a fragment of this indefinable soul 
			energy. The major religions have been telling us this for thousands 
			of years, pointing out that the human race supplies the shells for 
			souls. Man's ego has demanded that he embellish this truth by adding 
			the belief that his pitiful personality is worthy of preservation 
			and that his memories and personality go along with the soul.
 
			  
			The 
			Omega Group has made a game of this belief at millions of seances, 
			happily posing as myriad souls of the dear departed.
 Two or more intelligences are playing a game with us, vying for 
			complete control of our bodies and souls, according to all occult 
			and religious interpretations. It's a seesaw battle, and every 
			possible kind of deception and deceit is being employed by both 
			sides. They caa make us believe anything they want us to believe, 
			thanks to our swollen egos and flimsy brains.
 
			  
			They can make us see 
			anything they want us to see, thanks to our narrow field of vision 
			(we can only see a. .fragment of the electromagnetic spectrum) and 
			their apparent ability to manipulate energy and physical matter.
 The parahuman
			
			Serpent People of the past are still among us. They 
			were probably worshipped by the builders of Stonehenge and the 
			forgotten ridge-making cultures of South America. They directed us 
			to multiply and seed the earth. Their manifestations and 
			manipulations have generated thousands of cults, religions, and 
			frames of reference.
 
 In recent years hundreds of UFO contactees have been warned by the 
			long-haired Venusians that our atomic experiments will lead to 
			disaster. Could it be, as some have said, that atomic bombs not only 
			kill cities, but that they also kill or disintegrate souls?
 
			  
			Then this anti-atomic-bomb posture of the ultraterrestrials 
			could be defensive. The bomb at Hiroshima may have blown a hole in 
			some other world beyond out space-time continuum… and a lot of moon 
			food may have been lost in the baraain. 
			  
			  
			  
			CHAPTER TWELVE
 THE DEMISE OF 
			THE GODS
 
				
				'If flying saucers are real,' the 
				skeptics say, "why don't they 
			contact us?" 
			The startling truth, as carefully recorded by the ancient 
			historians, is that the ultraterrestrials have always been in direct 
			contact with millions of individuals and that they actually ruled 
			directly over mankind for many years. In recent centuries their 
			influence has become more subtle, but it is always there.
 According to the traditions of many isolated peoples, the first 
			great emperors in Asia were god-kings who came down from the sky, 
			displayed amazing superhuman abilities, and took over. There was a 
			veritable world-wide epidemic of these god-kings between 5000 and 
			1000 b.c.
 
			  
			The mighty Osiris and Isis walked into the Egyptian valley 
			out of nowhere and assumed command. The myths and legends of Greece, 
			India, and South America describe their rule. They were taller and 
			more imposing than the men of the time, with long blond hair, 
			marble-like white skin, and remarkable powers which enabled them to 
			perform miracles.  
			  
			They displayed brilliant judgment and wisdom and 
			exercised remarkable organizational abilities. In most cases they 
			chose to reside on the highest mountains and hills available, 
			commanding balls of fire and bolts of lightning and travelling about 
			the skies in wonderful chariots.
 In southern Europe Zeus and his court of phantom cohorts held forth 
			for centuries. In India a multitude of gods and demons appeared and 
			reappeared generation after generation. Others arrived on the scene 
			and made lasting contributions to folklore from Iceland to 
			Scandinavia. In Central America the legendary Quetzalcoatl appeared 
			among the Toltecs.
 
			  
			Me was a white man dressed in a long white robe 
			covered with tiny red crosses. He wore a great beard and according 
			to Toltec tradition introduced science and learning to the natives. 
			After many years of benign rule he simply vanished, promising to 
			return again one day. When Cortes, the Spanish conquistador, landed 
			in Mexico a thousand years later, the Indians greeted him with 
			delight, believing that he was Quetzalcoatl.  
			  
			He took advantage of 
			their superstition and sacked the Aztec empire.
 Deep in the wasteland of western 
			
			Australia the Aborigines still 
			cling to the ancient myths of the Wandjinas and regard as sacred the 
			petroglyphs carved into rocks depicting tall, robed figures.
 
			  
			The Wandjinas are supposedly a parahuman group who resided in Australia 
			thousands of years ago.
 Berosus, an ancient Babylonian priest, recorded the fascinating 
			legend of Cannes, a remarkable creature who came up out of the 
			waters of the Persian Gulf to educate early man.
 
			  
			This legend, 
				
				"more 
			nearly fulfils some of our criteria for a genuine contact myth", Dr 
			Carl Sagan states in his Intelligent Life in the Universe. 
				 
			Berosus 
			presumably, 
				
				'had access to cuneiform and pictographic records dating 
			back several thousand years before his time'.  
			His work was 
			translated into Greek and Latin and found its way into English in 
			1876. He quoted from Apollodorus, describing Oannes as a fishlike 
			animal capable of speaking to men.  
			  
			The account explains: 
				
				This being in the daytime used to converse with men but took no food 
			at that season; and he gave them an insight into letters and 
			sciences and every kind of art. He taught them to construct houses, 
			to found temples, to compile laws, and explained to them the 
			principles of geometrical knowledge.    
				He made them distinguish the 
			seeds of the earth and showed them how to collect fruits... When the 
			sun set, it was the custom of this Being to plunge again into the 
			sea and abide all night in the deep; for he was amphibious. 
			Moses, of course, had another kind of encounter when he climbed to 
			the summit of Mount Sinai and received orders and taws from the 
			entity who settled there in a glowing cloud.
 A central legend of 
			
			the Hopi Indians concerns the Kachina Clan: a 
			group of beings who were not people but 'spirits sent to give help 
			and guidance, taking the forms of ordinary people', according to 
			Indian historian Frank Waters.
 
			  
			The Hopi believe they came originally 
			from a Red City in the south and that their tribe was guided into 
			what is now the southwestern United States by the Kachina Clan. 
			These spirit beings taught the Hopis occult wisdom very similar to 
			the occult beliefs of the Europeans and Africans.  
			  
			Finally they 
			departed, saying, 
				
				The time for us to go to our far-off planets and stars has not come 
			yet. But it is time for us to leave you. We will go by our powers to 
			a certain high mountain, which you will know, where we will await 
			your messages of need…    
				We are a spirit people,
			and we will not be seen again by you or your people. But you must 
			remember us by wearing our masks and our costumes at the proper 
			ceremonial times. Those who do so must be only those persons who 
			have acquired the knowledge and the wisdom we have taught you… 
			The indigenous natives of the Americas, Africa, and the Pacific all 
			adopted ceremonial dress patterned after the garb of the 
			ultra-terrestrials, Just as the robes and trappings of the early 
			churches of the white man were patterned after the dress of the 
			angels and gods who allegedly visited them.  
			  
			Traditionally, only the 
			witch doctors and students of the arcane wisdom of the elementals 
			were permitted to wear these garments and masks. The carefully laid 
			out procedures for the ceremonies and rites of these early peoples 
			were all dictated by these parahuman spirits.  
			  
			For thousands of years 
			they quite literally had the entire human race dancing to their 
			tunes. The impact of these beings upon the human race is 
			indisputable. All human art began as part of our urge to pay tribute 
			to them. The arts of painting and sculpture, the arts of drama and 
			dance, and of course, the art of storytelling, were all products of 
			that urge.
 It has been impossible to adequately summarize even a fragment of 
			this land of material here. Perhaps someday some scholar will 
			systematically assemble all of these records and establish some 
			order out of the chaos. The evidence is not as flimsy as this kind 
			of summary might make it seem.
 
 Statues of strange. Oriental looking figures bearing a striking 
			similarity to the appearance of our contemporary Men in Black have 
			been found in the ruins of the 
			
			Olmec civilization in Mexico. We 
			really don't know very much about the Olmecs.
 
			  
			The first traces of their'Iost culture were uncovered in 1939, when archaeologist 
			Matthew Stirling found five gigantic basalt heads on the island of 
			La Venta. These heads weigh from twenty to thirty tons each and are 
			up to nine feet high. Each is wearing what looks like a football 
			helmet. Since then, cities and irrigation systems dating back to at 
			least 1200 b.c. have been discovered.  
			  
			An Olmec calendar carved into 
			the stomach of an eight-inch jade statue begins with the year 3113 
			b.c.  
				
				"It is a masterpiece of mathematical and astronomical 
			knowledge, and it was the Olmecs, not the Maya, who developed it," 
			Jeanne Reinart noted in Science Digest in September 1967. 
			Archaeologists have come up with an interesting theory for the 
			sexless Oriental-Eke statues. They suggest that the Olmecs 
			worshipped deformed children and that the statues represent
			Mongolian idiots.  
			  
			But would a people capable of creating a 
			masterpiece of a calendar worship abnormal babies?  
			  
			The statues also 
			feature a distinctive cleft in their foreheads, and this falls in 
			line with the third eye lore of European occultism, Tibetan beliefs, 
			and even the mysticism of the Hop! Indians. The third eye is 
			supposedly the part of the brain which is linked to ESP and cosmic 
			consciousness -or direct communication with God.
 The third eye symbol, an eye inside a triangle, is an ancient symbol 
			for the deity found in many cultures from Egypt to Micronesia. It 
			appears on the Great Seal of the United States atop the pyramid 
			(found on every dollar bill).
 
			  
			The Kachina Clan taught the Hopis that 
			an opening in the head existed so they could talk with God. At one 
			time trephination (cutting a hole in the skull) was a common practice 
			throughout the world, perhaps as part of some religious rite. 
			Hundreds of trephinated skulls have been found in Europe, Asia, 
			Africa, the Americas, and the Pacific islands.  
			  
			Many of them date 
			back to 3000 b.c. Some show signs of healing, indicating that the 
			patient must have survived what is even today an extremely delicate 
			operation. Three hundred and seventy such skulls have been found in 
			Europe, but the finest examples come from Peru. The very thought of 
			thousands - or even millions - of early humans voluntary submitting 
			to having holes bored in their skulls with primitive flint 
			instruments is enough to make anyone's flesh crawl.
 Some anthropologists speculate that trephination was used as a 
			treatment to get rid of possessing spirits. But the universality of 
			this very sophisticated operation makes this unlikely.
 
 Were all those people seeking to open the door in their heads so 
			they could communicate with the supernatural? If so, who or what 
			taught the entire human race this process? And why?
 
 In legend after legend from every part of the world we are told that 
			early man was primitive and stagnant until the appearance of the 
			god-kings. These mysterious beings introduced writing, laws, 
			agriculture, and perhaps even the rudiments of stone building and 
			medicine. The early peoples were so impressed and so grateful that 
			they dedicated much of their time and effort to preserving images of 
			the god-kings in great statues, temples, and monuments.
 
			  
			In fact, 
			many cultures left nothing behind except religious artifacts and 
			carvings lovingly detailing their encounters with the gods.
 Identical beliefs appeared simultaneously in all parts of the world. 
			Identical forms of writing suddenly came into practice among 
			cultures completely isolated from each other. The Egyptians were not
			the only ones who believed that the human body would one day be 
			resurrected whole and that therefore all earthly possessions should 
			be buried with it. Ancient tombs in China, Siberia, and South 
			America were also filled with relics for a future life.
 
			  
			How did this 
			relatively complex concept spread to the four corners of the Earth?
 Even the earliest of men were not so stupid that they could sustain 
			a belief century after century without some kind of evidence to 
			support it. Nor would they be so stupid as to expend their energies, 
			materials, and talents building great monuments to those beliefs 
			without such evidence. Yet the reasonably sophisticated peoples of 
			India and Greece believed wholeheartedly in their gods for thousands 
			of years.
 
			  
			Their records demonstrated that these gods appeared 
			frequently before mortal men. taught them, tricked them, offered 
			them hope and faith, and cultivated their religions and beliefs. 
			Temples were erected on the spots where the gods had stood from 
			Stonehenge to Delphi. Often the percipients were instructed to build 
			a temple on this spot.  
			  
			Gold (atomic number 79) has always played 
			an important role in all religions, and most religious buildings are 
			roofed with gold leaf from Buddhist temples to Muslim mosques and 
			Christian cathedrals.  
			  
			Could it be that the mysterious rays of the 
			ancients are somehow able to adjust more easily to 
			
			the frequency of 
			gold? On holy days a great part of the world's population gathers 
			under these golden roofs to pray and meditate and perhaps to have 
			their minds probed by some invisible concentration of energy,
 The modern cults and sciences have seized upon the god-king legends 
			to support their own beliefs and conclusions. Atlantologists prefer 
			to think that Quetzalcoatl and his kin were really from Atlantis. 
			The ufologists have churned out scores of books based on the premise 
			that spacemen visited Earth and gave mankind a helping hand in those 
			distant days.
 
			  
			It is quite true that the Kachina Clan and most of the 
			other parahumans claimed some relationship to other worlds and 
			far-off stars, particularly 
			the Pleiades.  
			  
			In all these legends there 
			is another persistent theme:  
				
				that the god-kings mated with mortal 
			women, impregnated them and thus started a royal lineage. 
				 
			Tradition 
			claims that 
			the bluebloods of royalty actually had 
			blue blood in 
			their veins in early history, perhaps as a result of this 
			crossbreeding. Even today some royal families suffer from hemophilia. The blood lacks the ability to coagulate and even a 
			small cut becomes a serious wound.
 The mating of ordinary women with supernatural beings is an integral 
			part of all religious lore. It is emphasized in the Bible.
 
 Some modern rulers such as the Emperor of Japan, still claim their 
			family can be traced all the way back to a god-like ancestor. The 
			pharaoh system in Egypt could have begun in this fashion with the 
			parahuman leader of the early Egyptians turning his rule over to a 
			human offspring. By 1000 b.c. most of the god-kings had withdrawn, 
			presumably going off to their legendary mountain hideaways.
 
			  
			Their 
			followers assumed, however, that their human descendants were 
			equally wise and possessed of magical powers. Being human, these 
			fallible kings often exploited the fears and beliefs of their 
			people. The later pharaohs successfully masqueraded as gods for 
			centuries. The earth had been divided up by the god-kings, each 
			ruling, even owning, a specific area.  
			  
			This ownership was passed on 
			to the human heirs, and for thousands of years a few dozen families 
			literally owned the entire planet. They intermarried and managed to 
			keep the system going until modern times. Although the king system 
			degenerated slowly, it did not really collapse until 1848.
 The god-kings did not put alt their eggs in one basket. They 
			established parallel systems of communication and control by 
			establishing priesthoods and strange secret cults and societies 
			whose main purpose was to perpetuate their esoteric teachings. But 
			again the flaws in man's basic character eventually surfaced. Greed 
			and the lust for power caused some of these groups to exploit the 
			populaces.
 
			  
			There were periods in history when some of these 
			priesthoods and societies even gained political control in Egypt and 
			elsewhere. It is probable that this happened in the burgeoning South 
			American cultures and may even have led to the downfall of some of 
			them.
 A key claim of the early priesthoods was their purported ability to 
			consult with the ultraterrestrials through the use of special 
			plates, amulets, and crystals handed down to them. These artifacts 
			were usually worn about the head and heart during religious 
			ceremonies.
 
			  
			In the apocryphal Protevangelion we are told that 
			Joachim, father of the Virgin Mary, visited a priest and said, 
				
				' "If 
			the Lord be propitious to me, let the plate which is on the priest's 
			forehead make it manifest." And he consulted the plate the priest 
			wore and saw it and behold, sin was not found in him.'  
			Such a plate 
			is described In Exodus 28:36.
 Early kings and dictators purportedly consulted with angels and 
			supernatural beings who appeared frequently to advise them. 
			Historical records assert that everyone from Julius Caesar to 
			Napoleon had meetings with mysterious parahumans who materialized 
			and dematerialized mysteriously.
 
			  
			The Sacred Crown of St Stephen is 
			supposed to have been delivered by an angel to a pope who permitted 
			Stephen I to be crowned King of Hungary with it in 1001.
 The mysterious Gypsies sometimes claim their amulets and crystal 
			bails were given to them by ultraterrestrials. Numerous modern 
			flying saucer contactees display tektites and pieces of quartz which 
			they say were given to them by Venusians, Mr Ralph Lael, a 
			businessman in North Carolina who once ran for Congress, visited a 
			cavern deep in Brown Mountain under the auspices of the space 
			people, he says, and was later flown to Venus. He was given some 
			chunks of crystal as proof of his claims.
 
 When Joseph Smith dictated the Book of Mormon to his wife, he sat 
			behind a screen with the gold plates, apparently translating them 
			with the crystalline devices he had found in the stone box.
 
 Modern UFO contactee writings are filled with enigmatic statements 
			about crystals and how they hold some key to the mysteries of the 
			universe. There are many interpretations of such statements, but no 
			one has managed to crack their true meaning. In the past twenty 
			years, however, crystals have suddenly assumed great importance to 
			our technology. We call them transistors.
 
 Although Bauwels and Bergier shrug off the UFO mystery in their 
			
			The 
			Dawn of Magic, they seem to subscribe to the cultist belief that 
			spacemen representing a superior technology once visited the Earth. 
			They offer their charming Cargo Cult Theory, speculating that early 
			man's religious rites were actually based upon their observations of 
			the strange behavior of the god-kings.
 
 A god-king manipulated a radio and talked into a stick (microphone). 
			Presto!
 
			  
			A fleet of aerial vehicles soon arrived with supplies. After 
			the departure of the god-kings, men tried to imitate them by 
			chanting into sticks too, and so prayer was born.
 This brings us full circle. The ultraterrestrials imitated the 
			appearance of man, and eventually man began to imitate them in his 
			rites and ceremonies. We made masks and costumes duplicating their 
			strange appearance. We hauled enormous rocks hundreds of miles and 
			carved replicas of their features for our temples and cities.
 
			  
			Where 
			civilizations of stone builders apparently committed themselves 
			entirely to the service of the god-kings and willingly sacrificed 
			thousands of their own people in bloody ceremonies on the sacred 
			hilltops in tribute to these beings. For many centuries human 
			sacrifices played an important role in the religion of all the 
			people of the Earth. In the Bible animal sacrifices are described. 
			 
			  
			Even Abraham led his son to a mountain and prepared to kill him in 
			sacrifice to the Elohim (the original biblical word, which is plural 
			and means
			gods; it has been given singular translation in the modem Bible).
 The early priesthoods wielded considerable power. Oracles and 
			mediums resided in the great temples, issuing accurate prophecies 
			(and many inaccurate ones). It was a time of miracles and magic. The 
			priests were the only educated men and as usual some were 
			unscrupulous enough to turn a neat profit from the beliefs of the 
			people.
 
			  
			But gradually the old tried-and-true methods for 
			communicating with the ultraterrestrials began to fail.  
			  
			According to 
			legend, there was great rivalry among the gods. False messengers 
			betrayed the believers and caused all kinds of mischief. And around 
			500 B.C. a new force began to make its presence felt among men.
 In India a wealthy young man named Siddhartha Gautama fell asleep 
			under a tree, so the story goes, and when he awoke, he was filled 
			with a great new philosophy - a new view of man's relationship to 
			the cosmos. He renounced all his worldly goods and set forth to 
			preach under the name of Buddha.
 
 Around that same time a Persian named Zoroaster underwent a similar 
			experience and founded a great religion. While in far-off China the 
			great philosopher Lao-tse created Taoism and reshaped the thinking 
			of the Orient along with another contemporary, Confucius. In the 
			Middle East several of the biblical prophets, including Zachariah 
			and Daniel, were conversing with supernatural entities and 
			undergoing illuminating experiences.
 
			  
			None of these men knew that the 
			others even existed. Many centuries would pass before their 
			independent ideas and teachings would spread and overlap. Yet in 
			time these men, all contemporaries between 600 and 500 b.c, changed 
			the philosophical and theological structure of the civilized world. 
			Because of them that century stands as a landmark in the history of 
			our planet.
 So the old priesthoods deteriorated, some were slaughtered outright, 
			and new beliefs were born. These beliefs centered around the 
			awareness that there was some force beyond the ultraterrestrials; 
			that mankind was only part of a larger pattern; and that individuals 
			were merely an extension of some distant, unknown intelligence.
 
			  
			The 
			stage was being set for a new conflict, a battle royal between the 
			old gods and this Cosmic Consciousness.  
			  
			Muhammad appeared a thousand 
			years later to lead the Arab people away from the old gods, rallying 
			his people with the chant,  
				
				'There is but one God, and that 
				God is Allah.' 
			Instead of simply disappearing under the wave of monotheism, the old 
			priesthoods went underground, becoming secret societies devoted to 
			preserving the teachings of the elementals and the secrets
			of communication. 
			  
			 There was already a tangled maze of such 
			societies, such as the Druids mentioned earlier, so the ultraterrestrials had plenty of followers even into the newly 
			enlightened age.
 The Romans were still worshipping their gods on Mount Olympus, and 
			the Hebrews were firm in their belief of 
			
			Jehovah. Then one day three 
			expensively robed gentlemen with Oriental features strode into the 
			court of King Herod and informed him that a most remarkable child 
			was about to be born somewhere in Judea. Meanwhile the angel Gabriel 
			visited Mary and told her she was to bear this child.
 
			  
			The three 
			Orientals made their way to Bethlehem, accompanied by a brilliant 
			glowing object in the sky.
 Joseph left Mary in a cave, according to the Protevangelion while he 
			went to seek a midwife to help with the birth. Then time stood 
			still!
 
			  
			Chapter Eight of the Protevangelion relates:  
				
				But as I was 
			going, [said Joseph] I looked up into the air, and I saw the clouds 
			astonished, and the fowls of the air stopping in the. midst of the 
			flight. And I looked towards the earth and saw a table spread and 
			working people sitting around it, but their hands were upon the 
			table, and they did not move to eat.    
				They who had meat in their 
			mouths did not eat. And they who lifted them up to their mouths did 
			not put anything in; but all their faces were fixed upwards. And I 
			beheld sheep dispersed, and yet the sheep stood stilt. And the 
			shepherd lifted up his hand to smite them, and his hand continued 
			up. And I looked unto a river and saw the kids with their mouths 
			close to the water and touching it, but they did not drink.' 
			Unbelievable though it may be, this paralysis of time is common in 
			UFO and psychic lore. It is almost as if the world is frozen like a 
			frame of a movie film projected on a screen. Time continues to flow 
			only for the percipient.
 When Joseph returned to the cave with a midwife, they found it 
			filled with blinding light. The Christ child was born.
 
 The birth, life, and death of Christ had been prophesied centuries 
			earlier. Brethren of the Qumran priesthood even established a 
			regular night-watch, scanning the skies of Judea in expectation of 
			some sign of the heavens. Although the exact birthdate of Christ 
			remains a controversy, most theologians and scholars believe that it 
			was sometime in the year 4 b.c.
 
			  
			That year, according to the 
			astrological records of the Qumran priests, 'a comet produced a 
			heavenly spectacle,' and there was a fiery conjunction of several 
			planets in the
			zodiacal sign of Pisces. Pragmatists naturally assume that the Star 
			of Bethlehem was that comet, and to followers of Velikovsky, it 
			might have been the comet Venus.
 Jesus appointed role seems to have been to try to lure the Hebrews away from Jehovah to worship the supermind of the cosmos, the God 
			of the Oriental Illumined Ones. In this he failed. The Jews had had 
			considerable experience with miracles and false angels, and they 
			viewed Christ with great suspicion.
 
			  
			The Romans who occupied Judea 
			were still worshipping their assortment of long-haired deities, so 
			they also frowned upon the activities of this strangely persuasive 
			man. However, the sequence of events surrounding the death of Christ 
			provided proof enough to sway many into Christian beliefs and lay 
			the foundation for the great Christian religions.
 An eclipse of the sun threw the land into darkness as Christ hung 
			suspended on the cross, A violent earthquake which claimed many 
			lives followed. Pontius Pilate, the Roman governor of Judea, later 
			collected the witnesses of these events and had them dictate to 
			scribes what they had seen. This record was sent on to Rome. Pilate 
			eventually committed suicide.
 
 The body of Christ was placed in a cave, according to the historical 
			records, and a huge stone was rolled in place to seal the entrance. 
			Roman guards were stationed there to keep watch, They testified 
			later:
 
 There was a great voice in the heavens, and they saw the heavens 
			open, and two men descend from thence with great light and approach 
			the tomb. And that stone which was put at the door rolled of itself 
			and made way in part; and the tomb was opened, and both young men 
			entered in. When therefore those soldiers saw it, they awakened the 
			centurion and the elders; for they too were hard by keeping guard.
 
			  
			And as they had seen, again they see three men come forth from the 
			tomb, and two of them were supporting one and a cross following 
			them.
 In other texts these two young men were described as wearing 
			brilliantly white costumes, and the soldiers were reportedly 
			paralyzed 'like dead men', unable to move a muscle while the body of 
			Christ was being removed.
 
			  
			Later 'the heavens again were seen to 
			open' and a certain man to descend and enter the sepulchre.
 This certain man remained behind, for when the soldiers and 
			followers of Christ approached the tomb, this being told them not to 
			be
			frightened and advised them that Christ had been taken or had 
			risen.1
 
			  
			1 Sources include: The Gospel of Nicodexnus: X; The lost Gospel 
			According to Peter: Verses 9 - 13, Upton Clary Ewing, TJte Prophet 
			of the Dead Sea Scrolls; The Report of Pontius Pilate, Governor of 
			Judea. to Tiberius Caesar in Rome and Dr. Hugh Schonfield, The 
			Passover Plot. The same story, very abridged, is found in the BiWe: 
			St. Matthew 28; St Mark 16; St, Luke i4; and St Job;i 20. 
			
 Here we have an extraordinary sequence of events and coincidences.
 
			  
			Natural catastrophes struck die exact area where Christ died, A 
			group of witnesses heard a sound in the sky. saw a brilliant light, 
			and were rendered immobile as two beings descended, entered the 
			tomb, and removed the body. One entity remained behind to make sure 
			that everyone knew what had happened. Later the ghost of Christ 
			appeared before his disciples to further explain the concept of 
			resurrection.  
			  
			A concept which, as has already been pointed out, can 
			be traced back to the early Egyptian civilization.
 Christ's ministry was brief, spanning only a few years. He travelled 
			only a few hundred miles and spoke to only a few thousand people. 
			Nevertheless, his impact upon human history is undeniable and 
			immeasurable. Buddha and Laotse changed, the whole texture of life 
			in the Orient, and then five hundred years later Christ wrought a 
			similar change in the West.
 
 A series of minor miracles, visitations, and supernatural 
			manifestations reinforced the beliefs of the early Christians, and 
			they willingly died in Roman circuses for those beliefs. Then 
			gradually the pure Christian concepts were absorbed into the 
			established god-king system. A succession of religious wars swept 
			the West, claiming the lives of millions.
 
			  
			Opportunists and 
			exploiters moved in as the Roman Empire collapsed (about a.d. 476), 
			and the Dark Ages began.  
			  
			The biblical records were suppressed, 
			censored, and distorted. Various churches openly controlled the 
			kings of Europe and manipulated political affairs. By this time 
			mankind had been misled so often by false prophets and mischievous ultraterrestrials that new encounters on any level were harshly 
			dealt with.  
			  
			When Joan of Arc [1412-31] rallied the French people 
			under the guidance of supernatural voices during the Hundred Years' 
			War, she was accused of sorcery and burned at the stake.
 Radical developments in science and philosophy which ran contrary to 
			the accepted cosmologies of the time were regarded as the work of 
			the devil. Galileo was imprisoned for daring to suggest that the 
			Earth revolved around the sun.
 
 European conquerors and missionaries went off to Africa, Asia, and 
			the Americas, wanton]? destroying whole civilizations (such as the 
			Incas) and deliberately disposing of their ancient records. Great 
			nations were plundered for gold. Great and noble cultures were 
			obliterated. A large part of man's past was forever wiped away. It 
			was humanity's darkest hour.
 
 But despite the tenor of the Inquisitions and the vicious oppression 
			by the monarchies, the secret cults and societies survived, and 
			fragments of the ancient teachings and beliefs were preserved.
 
			  
			The day of the alchemist was at hand It 
			finally came with stunning velocity in the nineteenth century.
 
 
			  
			  
			CHAPTER THIRTEENTHE SECRET OF THE AGES
 
 Does your next-door neighbor make strange noises behind drawn 
			shades late at night? Have you ever seen him wandering across a 
			darkened cemetery dressed in a long robe, carrying a candle?
 
			  
			Maybe 
			he is just plain crazy.  
			  
			Then again, maybe he is a member of one of 
			the thousands of secret societies and cults which still flourish 
			everywhere on this haunted planet. If these cults were not a 
			permanent part of the human condition it is highly unlikely that 
			Neil Armstrong and Buzz Aldrin would have left their footprints on 
			the moon. And it is equally unlikely that we would have been able to 
			watch the event on a screen painted with moving electrons in our 
			living rooms.
 Many of the true secret cults, are founded upon rites designed to 
			conjure up unearthly entities.
 
			  
			Over the centuries various fugitives 
			and defectors from these hidden organizations have published 
			fragments of these rites and beliefs. There are hundreds of 
			fascinating books available which spell out these strange truths. In 
			addition, there is a wealth of so-catled inspired literature 
			purportedly dictated by the entities themselves or produced through 
			automatic writing.  
			  
			The previously mentioned Oahspe is one such book 
			and was typed by a New York dentist, Dr John Ballou Newbrough, in 
			1880.  
			  
			It is an enormous work, offering a history of the human race 
			plus a complicated cosmology which amazingly has proven to be at 
			least partially valid. It describes, for example, the Van Allen 
			Belt, a belt of radiation encircling the Earth which was not 
			discovered until the advent of man-made satellites. It also contains 
			long chapters describing prehistoric secret societies.
 There are isolated groups of rather paranoid researchers who make a 
			hobby of investigating secret societies. Foremost of these are the 
			superbuffs who believe that a super-secret government runs the 
			entire world. The death rate of these researchers is unreasonably 
			high, so their paranoia is understandable. Factions of the 
			superbuffery overlap into ufology, the John Birch Society, and the 
			assassination investigators.
 
			  
			All fringe groups seem to overlap, even 
			though they tend to ignore, and are even opposed to, each other.
 Each secret society has its own vocabulary and explanations. Each 
			has developed a system of lessons and degrees to educate its members 
			slowly and lead them upwards to their own particular cosmic truth. 
			Some of these organizations are dedicated to the devil and his work. 
			Others are theologically oriented and aim at acquiring a closer 
			relationship with God.
 
			  
			The Orient is filled with such groups, 
			ranging from the esoteric cultists in the Himalayas to the secret 
			assassins of Persia and India. Advanced members of some of these 
			groups allegedly possess powers of telepathy and astral projection. 
			The lamas of Tibet are supposed to be able to whip up thought forms 
			and elemental at will through sheer force of mind.
 The Gipsies have a secretive habit of congregating on isolated 
			hilltops to meet and converse with materializations. The Voodoo 
			rites of Africa and Haiti also call upon such entities. In Voodoo 
			demonic possession seems to be commonplace, and the zombie myths may 
			have a solid basis in fact. Evil entities are supposedly called 
			forth by the feared Voodoo priests to perform sinister deeds.
 
			  
			Papa 
			Doc Duvalier, the late President of Haiti, maintained power by 
			fostering the belief that he directly controlled the Voodoo elementals. Witch doctors of Africa and Juju practitioners in South 
			America are also credited with the ability to summon up 
			ultra-terrestrials and put them to work.
 But the process works in reverse too, with the entities controlling 
			their masters. The literature on secret societies describes many 
			materializations of fearsome demons who frequently gave out orders, 
			directing the cultists to commit acts of murder and political 
			subversion. To disobey meant death, either at the hands of fellow 
			members or the entity itself.
 
			  
			Thus the ultraterrestrials are 
			presumably able to guide and control human events through evil men 
			lusting for power.
 A young Jordanian in California, Sirhan Sirhan, studied the Rosicrucian 
			doctrines of inspired treatments of mysticism. He practiced 
			self-hypnosis and automatic writing, perhaps hoping to find a way to 
			power and prestige. In any case, he ended up in a hotel kitchen with 
			a smoking pistol in Ms hand and Senator Robert F. Kennedy stretched 
			out at his feet.
 
			  
			At his trial Sirhan claimed he had no memory of 
			that fateful night after he entered the hotel. Witnesses said they 
			had seen him talking briefly with a swarthy man who may have been a 
			Mexican or an Oriental. While sitting in the courtroom, Sirhan spoke 
			quietly of seeing celestial beings.
 Fire usually plays an important role in secret rites. Rosicrucians 
			practice staring at a candle flame, trying to make the flame obey
			their will. In the rites of witchcraft the devil is said to 
			materialize in a bonfire, stepping forward to have sexual 
			intercourse with the witches. His penis, it is said, is always ice 
			cold.
 
 Sex is heavily intermixed with cuMst rites and beliefs, particularly 
			in black magic and witchcraft. Moon Children are supposed to be 
			produced when the devil or assorted demons have intercourse with 
			human females.
 
			  
			Apparently 
			
			John Parsons and L. Ron Hubbard tried to 
			produce a 
						Moonchild
			in 1946.  
			  
			Aleister Crowley fired off an angry 
			letter to the head of the American Magidc cult, saying,  
				
				"Parsons or 
			Hubbard or somebody is producing a Moon Child. I get fairly frantic 
			when I contemplate the idiocy of these louts…" 
			According to legend, 
			MoonChildren grow into exceptionally evil adults with extraordinary 
			powers. This does not apply of course to astrological Moon Children 
			born under the sign of Cancer (June 22-July 22).
 In ufology lore there exist several reports from different parts of 
			the world describing how young men were taken aboard flying saucers 
			and invited to have sexual intercourse with blonde space-women with 
			long fingers and Oriental features. This appears to be a variation 
			of the MoonChildren and succubus phenomenon so well known in 
			religious and occult lore.
 
 The reverse of this is the equally well-known incubus, or demon 
			lover, who forces his attentions on sleeping females. There are UFO 
			cases of this also. A California schoolteacher, Cordelia Donovan, 
			claims that in 1966 she met a man in a long white robe who kidnapped 
			her in a black Cadillac and gassed her.
 
			  
			When she awoke, she was 
			aboard a flying saucer, where she was raped by a well-endowed 
			spaceman.1  
			  
			1 The full details of her incredible story are related by Jan 
			Hudson, those Se*y Saucer People. 
			  
			  
			There are innumerable rumors of space babies being born 
			in England, Australia, South America, Mexico, and the United States. 
			Such stories have had great impact on some UFO cultists who fear 
			that the flying saucer fiends are engaged in a massive biological 
			experiment - creating a hybrid race which will eventually take over 
			the earth.
 Theologians and psychiatrists have been trying to cope with the 
			incubus-succubus phenomena for years, but no reasonable medical or 
			psychological explanation has been developed. Many cases can be 
			found in the psychiatric and occult literature, and author Brad 
			Steiger cites dozens in his two books, Sex and the Supernatural and 
			Haunted Lovers.
 
 The long-fingered, blond elementals have intruded into every aspect 
			of human existence, even including sex.
 
			  
			Male and female
			cultists have apparently been submitting their persons to these 
			lascivious spirits for millennia. They came to us first with the 
			flutter of angels' wings. Now they rape us aboard flying saucers. 
			The game remains the same, only the outward trappings have changes.
 Rites to rouse the elemental^ have endured century after century. If 
			they didn't work, they would have eventually been abandoned. 
			Apparently they do work for somebody… and those who have results 
			write more forbidden books to perpetuate the practices.
 
 There is Black Magic and White Magic. The Black Magicians supposedly 
			control, or are controlled by, evil entities. The White Magicians 
			summon up angels and good guys. Tradition has it that the two groups 
			have been in continual conflict throughout history, constantly 
			waging magical war upon one another.
 
 One of the standard rites for materializing an angel requires the 
			services of a child aged six to eight. An altar is set up, candles 
			are lighted, the child kneels, and the magician chants certain 
			prayers meant to call up the invisible forces around us. The 
			ceremony is repeated for three days near an open window.
 
			  
			The 
			elemental is said to appear at the window in a blaze of light, and 
			magicians are warned not to get too close, lest they come down with 
			nausea, actinic burns, and other ailments identical to those 
			reported by low level UFO witnesses.
 The descriptions of the gods of the ancient world often included 
			similar warnings. It was supposed to be dangerous, if not fatal, to 
			look directly at a god. Perhaps because some of these 
			materializations are composed of pure electromagnetic energy and 
			radiate massive doses of X-rays, gamma rays, and ultraviolet rays. 
			Such rays would produce the above medical effects.
 
			  
			Conjunctivitis, 
			an inflammation of the eyes, is a commonly observed effect among UFO 
			witnesses.
 Both the literature of the secret societies and the more readily 
			available general occult literature warn about the hazards of these 
			practices. Poorly informed, emotionally unstable practitioners can 
			be overwhelmed by the forces they unleash. The blundering amateur 
			wizard can become possessed or driven insane or experience elaborate 
			hallucinations for extended periods.
 
			  
			All kinds of weird 
			manifestations can descend on him, ranging from poltergeists to 
			violent physical attacks by invisible hands. These classic psychic 
			attacks are very similar to the problems suffered by some innocent 
			UFO witnesses and contactees after their sightings begin. The two 
			phenomena seem to be inexorably linked.
 Modern science, with its obsession about the physical universe
			and the physical laws which run it, is only about three hundred 
			years old. 80 per cent of all the scientists who ever lived are 
			living at this moment, although in truth, most of them are 
			technologists and engineers rather then pure scientists. But that's 
			a point too minor to debate. Science was successfully suppressed 
			throughout the Dark Ages and even into the seventeenth century 
			(remember Galileo).
 
			  
			But another kind of science did exist.
			The science of magic. 
			Ironically, magical beliefs of the past five thousand years are 
			based upon the same principles which rule modern scientific thought: 
			the study of atomic structure and electromagnetic energy. Astrology, 
			the forerunner of astronomy, was a highly advanced science thousands 
			of years ago. Some of the ancient calendars and , records are so 
			accurate and so detailed that there has been speculation that the 
			ancient astrologers may have had telescopes and ether sophisticated 
			instruments.
 
			  
			If they didn't, then they must have received some help 
			and guidance from someone who understood the structure of the 
			universe. The early astrologers were, of course, priests and 
			magicians. They systematically catalogued the visible objects in the 
			heavens, naming them, and interpreting their influence on man and 
			human events. Astrology became the first mathematical science.
 While the astrologers were putting mathematics to work, other men 
			were delving into the mysteries of the physical planet Earth, 
			cataloguing metals, elements, and chemicals, and learning how to 
			combine them into new forms. They were the alchemists: the 
			sorcerers' apprentices.
 
			  
			They dreamed of finding some way of turning' 
			lead into gold. During some periods in history the alchemists were 
			supported by kings, while in other periods they were the victims of 
			superstitious purges which forced them underground. Their secret 
			societies preserved and circulated hundreds of manuscripts which 
			were half science and half mysticism. Many alchemists first entered 
			the field after encounters with ultraterrestrials and became the 
			proud, if furtive, predecessors of men like Cyrus Teed.
 Men who were students of astrology, alchemy, and magic all at once 
			served as the educated elite during long periods of history, acting 
			as priests, scientists, and educators.
 
			  
			Some of them also belonged to 
			another elite group, 
			
			the master stonemasons, and they were able to 
			put their polyglot knowledge to work by designing the great stone 
			monuments and engineering the methods by which they were built. 
			  
			In 
			time these master stonemasons formed a fraternity to preserve their 
			occult secrets and to assist one another as they
			wandered from place to place seeking work. This was the beginning of 
			the Masonic Order. As the centuries passed, the Order expanded to 
			include businessmen, educators, and leaders.
 Although the modern Masonic movement is looked upon with some 
			suspicion by the various buff groups, the ufologists delight in 
			pointing out that most of the men who signed the Declaration of 
			Independence were Masons, as was Joseph Smith, founder of the Mormon 
			religion, Masonic lore has found its way into many of our 
			governmental symbols and institutions, including the Great Seal of 
			The United States which bears the slogan:
 
				
				Novas Ordo Sectorum, 'A 
			New Order for the Ages'.  
			The design for the Great Seal is supposed 
			to have been handed to Thomas Jefferson in his garden one night by a 
			mysterious stranger dressed in a cape with a hood over his head.
 The superbuffs have scuffled through history books to try to 
			pinpoint the origin and location of the fabled super-government and 
			the identities of its members. One group believes they are key 
			industrialists (particularly munitions makers) and bankers. Others 
			have produced dozens of books advocating anti-Semitism and claiming 
			that a secret inner circle of Jews has been working for generations 
			on a plan to take over the world.
 
			  
			One of the most vicious and most 
			successful racist books ever written came out of Russia in the last 
			century and is called The Protocols of the Elders of Zion. This 
			obvious hoax purports to be the Jewish master plan for gaining 
			control of the world's gold and the press. Oddly enough, Adolf 
			Hitler seems to have used Protocols as a guidebook in his bid for 
			power.  
			  
			Jewish cultists have fought back with their claim that a 
			Catholic conspiracy exists. Jesuit priests are a favourite target of 
			this group. It is a fact that the Jesuits (the Society of Jesus) 
			engaged in so many political conspiracies in the eighteenth century 
			that the Vatican was compelled to dissolve the order in 1773. 
			  
			It was 
			reestablished in 1814. Today the order is largely confined to 
			running schools such as Georgetown University in Washington D.C.
 Following World War II, men like J. Edgar Hoover and the late 
			Senator Joseph McCarthy gave impetus to the public paranoia over the 
			Communist Conspiracy. This was partly based upon the spread of left 
			wing beliefs during the social unrest of the 1930s, when 
			intellectuals and working men embraced, temporarily, the Communist 
			ideology. It was based partly upon Joseph Stalin's mad machinations 
			in the early days of the Cold War.
 
			  
			The gradual thaw that followed 
			Stalin's death and the public revelations of his outrageous purges 
			ultimately broke the Communist Party in the United States. The 
			numerous organizations and buff groups that had been dedicated to
			combating the partly real and partly illusory Communist threat began 
			to flounder and look around for a new cause.
 They found it when in his final speech as President, Dwight 
			Eisenhower issued a guarded warning about the growth of what he 
			termed 'the military-industrial complex.' The assorted buff groups 
			scurried back to the earlier literature on the super-government.
 
 They extended Ike's warning to include religion and came up with the 
			religious-military-industrial conspiracy - a plot against humanity 
			which supposedly included the churches - (notably the Catholic 
			church), the Pentagon, and the huge industries which were churning 
			out weapons that have never been used.
 
 By the end of the 1960s our social and political problems had 
			generated a whole maze of new supposed conspiracies. The extreme 
			right and left wings found themselves in the absurd position of 
			advocating the same beliefs and fears. Everything from sex education 
			to the fluoridation of water became an issue within the context of 
			their beliefs.
 
			  
			As they stumbled about searching for a new 
			explanation behind the universal madness, many of these groups, 
			ranging from the John Birch Society to our youth subculture - the 
			Hippie movement - rediscovered
			
			the Illuminati. The Communist 
			Conspiracy was nearly forgotten as everyone went after the 
			Illuminati.
 Do the Illuminati even exist? It is very unlikely.
 
			  
			The buff groups 
			have confused some of the earlier secret societies with the process 
			of mystical illumination. Illumined individuals, like water, tend to 
			seek their own level and associate with their own kind. Often they 
			withdraw from society altogether, the ascetics of India being one 
			example.
 There is another form of pseudo-Illumination, however, which is 
			actually a form of demonic possession and frequently produces 
			religious fanatics.
 
			  
			A majority of all the political assassinations 
			in history were committed by victims of this. 
				
					
					
					John Wilkes Booth and 
			his nine fellow conspirators are a prime example, as were Leon Czolgosz, who gunned down President McKinley in 1901
					
					the young 
			student who assassinated Archduke Franz Ferdinand of Austria in 
			1914, thus launching World War I
					
					most recently Benjamin Mendoza 
			y Amor, the Bolivian artist who attacked Pope Paul with a knife on 
			November 26,1970 
			Witnesses said that the latter would-be assassin 
			'looked like he was having an epileptic fit' - one of the classic 
			symptoms of possession.
 Some buff groups regard these maniacal killers as tools of the 
			sinister Illuminati who have been pressed into service by hypnosis 
			or some other brainwashing technique. They are quick to point out
			- that Jack Ruby pulled his gun and shot down Lee Harvey Oswald after 
			being triggered by an auto horn which suddenly beeped in the 
			basement of the Dallas police station. (No one has ever determined 
			who blew that horn or why.)
 
			  
			Ruby claimed to Ms dying day that he had 
			no memory of entering the police station or firing the shot. 
			  
			Like many major myths, the Illuminati legend began in the Orient. 
			Around 275 B.C., Asoka, the Emperor of India, is supposed to have 
			founded the supersecret society of the Nine Unknown Men.  
			  
			This group 
			was founded to collect, study, and protect the secrets of the 
			occult, science, alchemy, astrology, and psychology. As late as 1927 
			Talbot Mundy, a specialist in Oriental lore, was writing about the 
			mysterious Nine, implying that the society still existed and was 
			still running things from far behind the scenes.
 In the tenth century young men were enticed into Persia's cult of 
			the assassins by drugs and beautiful young ladies. Pounded by Sabah, 
			the old man of the mountains who was purportedly one of the mystic 
			Nine, the cult conducted a reign of terror which continued into this 
			century. It may in fact still exist. They had tremendous political 
			influence during various periods of history. The brainwashed, 
			dragged members of the cult carried out their orders blindly, even 
			when those orders were suicidal.
 
 A similar cult appeared in Afghanistan in the sixteenth century. 
			This was known as 
			
			the Roshaniya - the Illuminated Ones. like the 
			Hashishim assassin cult of Persia, the Roshaniya appears to have 
			been inspired by a. prophet in communication with the 
			ultra-terrestrials. It began as a mystical order which quickly 
			degenerated into a band of blind, drugged, mentally controlled 
			murderers.
 
			  
			They raised a lot of hell in Afghanistan for several 
			generations, and their secret teachings spread into Europe. The Alumbrados - the Illuminated Ones of Spain - appeared around 1600, 
			In France the Guerinets, another branch of the Illuminati, caused 
			some excitement in 1654. A professor of canon law at Ingolstadt 
			University in Bavaria, Adam Weishaupt founded the German Illuminati 
			in the seventeenth century.
 One of the stated purposes of the Illuminati was to take over the 
			world and establish a New Order that was basically anti-religious. 
			They wanted to get rid of the archaic god-king system and all the 
			tyranny that went along with it. This was naturally a very unpopular 
			concept with the established authorities, and great efforts were 
			made to track down and execute the members of the cult. By the late 
			1700s the movement had been effectively crushed.
 
 And the persistent legend of the Illuminati was born.
 
 They had tried at one point to infiltrate and take over the 
			Freemasons, and this gave rise to the still prevalent belief (in 
			some quarters) that the Masons are actually a wing of the Illuminati. 
			Following the American Revolution a vast amount of literature 
			appeared claiming that the United States was actually part of the 
			Illuminati Plot and had been founded by secret members of the cult. 
			The Bill of Rights was in fact a very radical document for the 
			period with its insistence that all men are created equal, that 
			there should be freedom of religion, and that the affairs of man 
			should be governed by men elected to office.
 
			  
			The Illuminati 
			Conspiracy attracted the same kind of attention in the early ISOOs 
			as the Communist conspiracy did in the 1950s.
 A French book, La Secte des Illumines, published in the 1790s 
			presented a description of the Illuminati initiation rites:
 
				
				On the day of his initiation, the 
				candidate was conducted through a long, dark passage into an 
				immense hall draped with black... Ghostly forms moved through the hall, leaving behind them a foul 
			odor… His clothes were .removed and laid upon a funeral pyre. Then 
			his pudenda [genitals] were tied with string…    
				Now five horrid and 
			frightening figures, bloodstained and mumbling, approached him and 
			threw themselves down in prayer. After an hour sounds of weeping 
			were heard, the funeral pyre started to burn, and his clothes were 
			consumed. From the flames of this 'fire' a huge and almost 
			transparent form arose, while the five prostrate figures went into 
			terrible convulsions. Now came the voice of an invisible hierophant 
			[priest], booming from somewhere below… 
			This was of course a typical magical rite - the rousing of an 
			elemental. Most of the secret cults of ancient and modern times are 
			centered around such rites.  
			  
			Most of them have preserved the same 
			truths throughout history with numerous variations. These same 
			troths were accepted by all the assorted priesthoods and religious 
			orders also, and all the early kings were trained to understand and 
			• accept them. They also formed the basis for the sciences of 
			astrology, alchemy, witchcraft, and Black Magic.  
			  
			Terminology differed from group to group; each had a different label for the 
			various aspects, but they all believed - and still believe - in 
			these basic supernatural facts.
 The first and most important secret that has been carefully guarded 
			and withheld from the public at large is that two or mere
 
 worlds exist, composed of different forms of matter but occupying 
			the same space. Fait of the teachings of all cults includes 
			elaborate definitions of these different forms of matter. When the 
			nonsensical terms are translated into modern terminology, it is 
			apparent that these teachings are concerned with advanced physics, 
			nuclear energy, atomic structure, and things which have only 
			recently been discovered by modern science.
 
			  
			Electrical energy is 
			also discussed at great length in terms of vibrations, and this 
			material can be easily translated into contemporary terms of wave 
			lengths and frequencies. Ancient man knew that smashing the atom 
			yields pure energy. He knew that human eyes could only see a tiny 
			portion of the electromagnetic spectrum (visible light), and he 
			believed that other worlds or realities existed beyond the 
			limitations of his sight.
 Spectre, the ancient word for ghostly apparition, sprang from 
			spectrum. Early peoples observed that these objects or entities were 
			able to reflect or cast off light wavelengths from the entire 
			visible spectrum from violet at one end to red at the other. They 
			knew they were seeing transmogrifications of electrical energy. 
			Countless modern UFO reports describe these same color changes. 
			UFOs often appear first as a purplish blob and then descend the 
			visible scale until they turn red, at which point they sometimes 
			solidify into seemingly material objects.
 
			  
			This process is fully 
			explored in the ancient literature.
 Dualism, particularly stressed in the Orient, separates the world of 
			the mind from the world of the physical. It is believed that the 
			human mind and consciousness are merely a part of a larger universal 
			mind and that with proper training and study we can learn to tap 
			that universal mind. On the simplest level the masses try to do this 
			with prayer.
 
			  
			On the more esoteric level of the cults it is taught 
			that the mind can be made powerful enough to manipulate atomic 
			energy and thus control the material world. One of the great secrets 
			is that if a man can learn to visualize, say a chair, and can form 
			every atom of that chair in his imagination, he can actually cause a 
			physical chair to materialize. Or working in reverse, he can 
			de-materialize a physical object.  
			  
			Such thought forms even include 
			animated entities. So the rites of magic are aimed at concentrating 
			the energy of human minds on a specific point in space and literally 
			wishing a being to appear. In theory the minds would be forcing 
			electrical energy to assume visible, physical form.
 The infringement of the other worlds beyond the visible is the 
			cornerstone of occult belief. The inhabitants of those other 
			dimensions can supposedly manipulate energy much more easily than we
			can. They can enter our dimension or reality and assume temporary 
			physical farm. Same can do this on their own. Others require the 
			assistance of human minds before they can materialize. The secret 
			cults have happily supplied this service for thousands of years. 
			Today there is a worldwide revival of witchcraft. Some American high 
			schools and colleges are even conducting courses in witchcraft.
 
			  
			The ultraterrestrials must be having a 
			field day.
 Early man was quite convinced that these invisible worlds existed. 
			This led him to the secret of the ages: the belief that mankind was 
			actually controlled by the inhabitants of these other planes or 
			dimensions. The modes of control became the chief concern of the 
			cultists, magicians, and priesthoods. Political and religious 
			structures were set up to facilitate that control, as they have 
			already pointed out.
 
 Dr Gordon Allen, an aerospace scientist, summarized a lifetime of 
			study into these matters in his book, Enigma Fantastique:
 
				
				The purpose today is identical to the purpose in the times of the 
			magician-scientists of ancient times, the purpose of the controlling 
			priesthood of the Egyptians, the Caesars, the Roman Catholic church, 
			the Inquisition. The ecclesiastic control of tie various ruling 
			families had for its purpose the rule of the people in their 
			material bodies on this earth-plane.
 A nation is said by Eastern philosophers to lie under certain occult 
			(or secret) controls. Nations who go to war on the earth-plane 
			reflect certain wars in Heaven.
 
 It is true that the Masonic founders of the United States knew of 
			this occult control and even something of their own mission. Ruling 
			families of Europe knew of this occult control and believed 
			themselves in power by divine right, but occult control was secret 
			and not discussed by historians or political writers until just the 
			last few years.
 
			All of this may be absolute nonsense, but we cannot overlook the 
			unhappy fact that these truths were completely believed for 
			thousands of years by the leaders of the world and therefore had an 
			appalling influence over human events and destiny.  
			  
			Bloody religious 
			wars were fought for centuries as the different religions attempted 
			to gain total domination of the known world.
 Even worse, man's own record of his early history was systematically 
			destroyed by the conflicting factions. The library at Alexandria, 
			Egypt, which housed thousands of years of history was sacked and 
			burned The remnants of early cultures were wantonly
 
 destroyed. And then we were given a new history, generously dictated 
			by the ultraterrestrials, and we bogged down in the Dark Ages for a 
			thousand years. The human race quite willingly turned itself over to 
			the ultraterrestrials.
 
 It was not until the nineteenth century that we began to claw our 
			way out from under occult rule. In 1848 the whole world exploded. 
			There were more than fifty major revolutions. Spiritualism was born 
			that year in Wayne County, New York, when two teenaged girls -the 
			Fox sisters - learned to communicate with a rapping poltergeist.
 
			  
			The 
			Communist Manifesto was published. Kings were dethroned. There were 
			major political assassinations just as mysterious as the murder of 
			President Kennedy. The first Woman's Suffrage Movement got underway 
			in Seneca Falls, New York. The whole world was suddenly in upheaval. 
			A host of brilliant inventors and scientists suddenly appeared 
			simultaneously, and the great Industrial and Scientific Revolutions 
			got underway. (Thomas Edison was born in 1847.)  
			  
			Mankind hurtled into 
			a fantastic hundred-year period that saw the rapid development of 
			steam-boats, railroads, aeroplanes, and finally the atomic bomb. 
			Social structures everywhere were suddenly revised.
 Ironically, the feared goals of the seventeenth century Illuminati 
			have now become a reality to millions of people. Red China and the 
			Soviet Union have gone to an extreme, suppressing religion and 
			carving out totalitarian states that appear to be steps towards 
			robotizing the human race.
 
 But the technological advances and the conflict of political 
			ideologies are insignificant when compared to the amazing revolution 
			of the mind which has taken place - almost unnoticed - in the past 
			decade. The secret cults of the past have been replaced by the eerie 
			mysticism of the LSD cults and the Hippie movement Young people 
			everywhere are turning to witchcraft and Black Magic and engaging in 
			a sophisticated form of occultism which attempts to link their minds 
			with the Cosmic Consciousness.
 
 It is easy to see why some buffs and cults are viewing all this with 
			alarm and trying to blame the mythical Nine Unknown Men or 
			Illuminati. 
			Anyone who studies history carefully can detect the presence of some 
			outside influence - an influence that has largely been detrimental, 
			even sinister. Yet the ancient gods and the modern Brothers from 
			space have come to us in a benevolent guise. They have never 
			practiced what they preached.
 
 To support our outrageous hypothesis we must make two basic
			assumptions:
 
				
					
					(1) That the ultraterrestrials are teal in some manner 
			and are not merely a psychological phenomenon or myth 
					(2) That the UTs have a need for communicating with us. 
			If such a need exists, 
			then it would be logical for them to create secret societies or even 
			a whole race of people to carry out their wishes   
			To be truly 
			effective, such a race would have to be clannish and aloof from the 
			societies in which it moved. They would, undoubtedly, be so strange 
			and furtive that outsiders would soon surround them with legends and 
			nonsense.
 A group like this does exist. They are spread all over the world. We 
			call them Gypsies. The ultimate secret society.
 
 Nobody really knows where the Gypsies come from, not even the 
			Gypsies themselves! Some tribes have advanced the notion that they 
			somehow came from the sky. We do know that no Gypsies existed before 
			their sudden appearance in Europe in the fourteenth century. They 
			identified themselves as Dukes of Egypt.
 
			  
			They quickly established 
			themselves as remarkable magicians and clairvoyants and were 
			regarded as the fulfillment of EteMel's prophecy,  
				
				'I shall scatter 
			the Egyptians among the nations'.  
			Their talents for sorcery and 
			fortune-telling led to the creation of a whole body of myth. Even 
			the modern Washington seer, Jeane Dixon, claims that a wandering 
			Gipsy lady presented her with her first crystal ball when she was 
			eight.
 Gypsies have their own language, which is derived from Hindi and 
			Tibetan. They apparently have no racial ties with the Egyptians at 
			all but probably came from India and Afghanistan originally. In 
			February 1968 a Gipsy tribe established a government-in-exile in 
			Paris to demand payment of reparations from the Germans for what 
			they suffered in World War II, claiming that four million Gypsies had 
			perished in Hitler's death camps. They also announced their plans to 
			re-establish Romanistan where Somaliland is today.
 
			  
			They even sought 
			United Nations recognition.
 An estimated two million Gypsies now live in the United States, so 
			they outnumber the surviving Indians by a large margin. But they are 
			a silent minority, remaining by themselves, keeping their children 
			out of public schools, and suffering constant persecution without 
			complaint.
 
			  
			Gypsies do not use the mails or telephones, yet when a 
			prominent Gipsy dies, the word seems to spread instantly, and tribes 
			from all over the country converge for the funeral. They pay no 
			income taxes, even though some tribes seem to have accrued 
			considerable wealth and ride about in big black Cadillacs.
 The Gipsy religion is a curious mixture of witchcraft, Black Magic, 
			and elementalism. Periodically, all the Gypsies will spring into 
			their
			Cadillacs in the middle of the night and drive off to some isolated 
			forest or hilltop where, according to reliable sources, they 
			converse with materializations. Gypsies also have a curious habit of 
			turning up in Window areas during UFO flaps.
 
 Morris K. Jessup caused the Gypsies to become part of the UFO lore 
			in the 1950s, when he received a series of strange letters from one 
			Carlos Allende. A couple of these letters were released to the UFO 
			buffs and have been a source of controversy ever since, In 1955 a 
			paperback copy of Jessup's The Case for the UFO arrived in the mail 
			at the Office of Naval Research (ONR).
 
			  
			The pages of the book were 
			covered with marginal notes penciled in by three different hands. 
			These comments indicated that the anonymous writers were extremely 
			knowledgeable in UFO matters and made a number of pointed references 
			which suggested they were Gypsies. Although Jessup himself dismissed 
			the annotations as some kind of hoax, the ONR was so impressed that 
			they had the whole book retyped and reproduced with the marginal 
			notes printed in different colors.  
			  
			The reproduction was prepared 
			for the Navy by the Varo Corporation in Garland, Texas. One of Allende's letters to Jessup, dated January 13th, 1956, was 
			postmarked in Gainesville, Texas, which is about sixty miles north 
			of Garland. Only a few hundred copies of this Varo ' edition were 
			printed, and they were carefully distributed to a select few within 
			the Navy. Since it has always been almost unobtainable, very few UFO 
			buffs have ever even seen this interesting document.
 The annotations discuss the Great Ark (which supposedly circles 
			Jupiter and has already been discussed) and try to answer some of 
			the questions Jessup raised in his book. Jessup was found dead in 
			his automobile in Dade County Park near Coral Gables, Florida, on 
			April 20,1959 -an apparent suicide.
 
			  
			But Carlos Allende has gone marching on.
 A fantastic array of Allende imposters have turned up over the years 
			to bedevil and bewilder the UFO buffs. He has managed to turn up in 
			several different states at the same time. All kinds of letters and 
			phone calls have been received by buffs in his name. Those who claim 
			to have met him describe him as a swarthy man of Cuban or Spanish 
			extraction. He rides around in a black Cadillac, of course.
 
			  
			Until 
			the late 1960s Allende was nothing more than a myth bandied about in 
			very limited UFO buff circles. Then author Brad Steiger obtained a 
			photostated copy of the Varo edition and used it as the basis of an 
			article in Saga magazine. He was instantly inundated with new 
			Allende letters and even a letter from a woman claiming to be 
			Allende's widow.
 In 1969 a man claiming to be Carlos Allende visited the Lorenzens, 
			who operate the civilian UFO research group, APRO, in Tucson, 
			Arizona. He presented them with an original copy of the Vaio 
			publication. How he managed to acquire the copy was not determined. 
			(The real Allende, if there is a real Allende, would not have had 
			access to a copy.)
 
 Other mystery men of the Allende type have haunted the UFO 
			researchers for years. La the early 1960s a man calling himself 
			Zdeen Alexander toured the United States, amusing some flying saucer 
			enthusiasts and terrifying others. He answered to the usual 
			description. Some buffs claimed he was able to disappear in front of 
			their eyes. He visited prominent ufologists in New York and offered 
			to finance a newsstand UFO publication. In California he predicted 
			the appearance of UFOs in Santa Barbara, and those predictions came 
			true. After shaking everyone up, he simply dropped from sight.
 
 The next mystery man appeared in Boulder, Colorado, during tie 
			Colorado University UFO research project. He arrived in a 
			chauffeur-driven Cadillac, inarched straight into the office of Dr 
			Edward U. Condon, head of the project, and announced that he was Mr 
			Dixsun and represented the Seventh Universe. He was, of course, a 
			swarthy little man wearing dark glasses. He offered to help Dr 
			Condon contact the space people, provided he received a substantial 
			amount of money. Condon was not exactly enthused, so Mr Dixsun got 
			into his Cadillac and drove off to rendezvous with Mr Alexander and 
			Mr Allende.
 
 It is likely that some of these characters were actually Gypsies 
			playing some little game of their own. Many of these hoaxes were 
			very complicated and expensive, and the perpetrators obviously had 
			both imagination and a sense of humor. Flying saucer enthusiasts are 
			notably lacking in these qualifications. But why would anyone bother 
			to spend inordinate amounts of time and money contriving and 
			executing elaborate pranks against random cultists?
 
 The answer seems to be that believers have always been dished up 
			manifestations which appeared to support their beliefs.
 
			  
			Believe in 
			the devil and he will appear, the old saying goes. An even older 
			saying, dating back to the dawn of history, states that those whom 
			the gods wish to destroy they first make mad.
 An ancient madness is overtaking the human race in these closing 
			years of the twentieth century.
 
				
				'Why don't they contact us?' the skeptics ask. 
			It might be better for us to ask,  
				
				'Why didn't they leave us alone?'
 
			  
			  
			  
			PART THREE 
				
					
						
						Alice laughed. There's no 
						use trying,' she said, 'one can't believe impossible 
						things.''I daresay you haven't had much practice,' said the 
						Queen. 'When I was younger' I always did it for half an 
						hour a day. Why, sometimes I've believed as many as six 
						impossible things before breakfast.'
 - Lewis 
						Carroll
 
						Through the Looking Ottos 
			
 
			CHAPTER FOURTEEN'HELLO, 
			CENTRAL - GIVE ME GANYMEDE'
 
 High on a bleak mountainside 6,000 feet above sea level outside of 
			Colorado Springs, Colorado, a weird looking tower Jutted 135 feet 
			into the air in the summer of 1899.
 
			  
			It was designed and erected by a 
			tall, gaunt man named 
			Nikola Tesla - the now forgotten genius who 
			perfected alternating current and whose many contributions to our 
			electrical age are almost inestimable. Thomas Alva Edison walked 
			away with most of the glory, and Tesla ended up a burnt-out 
			eccentric alone and ignored in a dingy Manhattan hotel room.  
			  
			But 
			while the spark was in him it shed a blinding glare.1
 
			1 See Joihn J. 'Neil's Mogtaphy. Prodigul Genius, Neville Spearman.
 
			
			That summer, using thirty thousand dollars given to him by Colonel 
			John Jacob Astor... Nikola Tesla was experimenting with radio. He 
			had built a powerful transmitter and receiver and was trying to 
			develop a method for broadcasting electrical energy through the air 
			to eliminate the need for expensive wiring systems. Energy that 
			could run motors and light lamps. He succeeded at least partially, 
			for the lights and equipment in his later laboratories worked 
			without wiring.
 
 Thousands of miles away a young man named Marconi was also toying 
			with batteries and coils. That summer Marconi managed to broadcast 
			the letter V (three dots and a dash) to a crude receiver operated by 
			his assistants less than fifty miles away. These were the only 
			operable radios on the planet Earth.
 
 But somewhere there must have been a third transmitter.
 
 One night while Tesla was working alone in his mountain lab, his 
			equipment suddenly came to life, and he received an apparently 
			intelligent signal, though indecipherable. I was familiar, of 
			course, with such electrical disturbances as are produced by the 
			sun, Aurora Borealis, and earth currents,' he later wrote, 'and I 
			was as sure as I could be of any fact that these variations were due 
			to none of these causes. The feeling is constantly growing on me 
			that I had been the first to hear the greeting of one planet to 
			another.
 
 Tesla became the first scientist to intercept the mysterious 
			intelligently organized radio waves which permeate our planet and 
			have
			baffled generations of scientists. He was a very odd man. sexless, 
			and mystical.
 
			  
			In 1900 he told a reporter,  
				
				'We cannot even with 
			positive assurance assert that some of them [ultraterrestrials] 
			might not be present here in this our world in tie very midst of us. 
			for their constitution and life manifestations may be such that we 
			are unable to perceive them.' 
			He amplified this in 1921 when American Magazine quoted him: 
				
				During my boyhood I suffered from a particular affliction due to the 
			appearances of images, which were often accompanied by strong 
			flashes of light. When a word was spoken, the image of the object 
			designated would present itself so vividly to my vision that I could 
			not tell whether what I saw was real or not… Even though I reached 
			out and passed my hand through the image, it would remain fixed in 
			space. 
			Two years after 
			
			Tesla's Colorado experiments, Marconi broadcast the 
			letter S (three dots) across the Atlantic, and a new era of 
			communications was born.  
			  
			From the very beginning radio operators 
			throughout the world received signals which no one could identify or 
			understand. Some of these signals were so strong they seemed to be 
			originating only a mile or two from the receiver, and they drowned 
			out all other signals.  
			  
			The only identifiable thing about these 
			enigmatic messages was the repetitive transmission of the letter v. 
			Marconi reported that stations of his company on both sides of the 
			Atlantic picked up these pirate signals even before World War I. la 
			1921 Marconi stated flatly that he believed that the signals were 
			coming from another civilization from somewhere in space.
 By the time 1924 rolled around signals from Mars were a popular 
			theme in the Sunday supplements, and when the orbit of Mars brought 
			it close to the earth in 1924, a well organized program was set up 
			to intercept any possible transmission. Most of the major radio 
			stations and ham rigs around the world deliberately fell silent and 
			listened.
 
			  
			Dr David Todd, head astronomer at Amherst College, set up 
			a gadget known as the Jenkins Radio-Camera at a naval observatory. 
			(Jenkins was a pioneer TV experimenter.) Mars crept closer, and 
			everyone waited. On August 24, 1924 (note the date), amateur, 
			military, and government radio stations closed down their 
			transmitters. They were not disappointed. Freak signals of 
			unidentifiable origin were reported by awed listeners all over the 
			world. Dr Todd's apparatus whirred and clattered, and a long strip 
			of
			photographic tape poured out of it.  
			  
			When the tape was developed, it 
			displayed, 
				
				'a fairly regular arrangement of 
				dots and dashes along one side,' according to The New York 
				Times, 'but on the other side at almost evenly spaced intervals 
				are curiously jumbled groups, each taking the form of a crudely 
				drawn human face.' 
			The Jenkins device was technically incapable of producing drawings.
 This amazing experiment hit the headlines everywhere, and hundreds 
			of amateur radio operators submitted reports of what they themselves 
			had picked up. Since there were very few commercial stations at the 
			time and most amateurs were operating crude, homemade equipment with 
			very limited capabilities, we have another mystery here. Those freak 
			signals had to be exceptionally strong.
 
			  
			There was no possibility of 
			a worldwide hoax, yet it did seem that the signals had to be of terrestrial origin. But from where and by whom ?
 These signals continued to be received throughout the 1920s and 
			1930s. Dr Hugh Mansfield Robinson conducted one set of experiments 
			with a set of high-powered receivers in 1921.
 
			  
			He received intelligent signals on the 
			thirty-thousand-meter wave-length and Ernest B. Rogers, the engineer 
			in charge of the test,  
				
				'felt compelled to state that they 
				were of extraterrestrial origin, as there were no sending 
				instruments of that power on Earth.' 
			An amateur radio astronomer named Grote Reber reported receiving 
			strong dot-and-dash signals from space in 1939.  
			  
			He had built a 
			thirty-foot dish antenna in Wheaton, Illinois {just outside of 
			Chicago), and said he often listened to the signals for eight hours 
			at a time. They seemed to come from one specific spot in the sky.
 Radio astronomy was then in its infancy and signals were being 
			detected from both Venus and Jupiter. But these appeared to be 
			statidike natural phenomena covering a wide part of the band. 
			Professor Hermann Oberth, the German rocket pioneer, worked with 
			radio telescopes and suggested that intelligent signals were coming 
			from the distant stars of 
			
			Epsilon Eridani and 
			
			Tau Ceti, both of 
			which are about eleven light years away.
 
			  
			He based his calculations 
			on his erroneous assumption that the signals were sporadic (they are 
			constant) and were only received every twenty-two years, thus taking 
			eleven years to go out and another eleven to be returned.
 If the true nature of the central phenomenon is electromagnetic, and 
			if the earth is constantly being bathed in rays or beams of energy 
			under intelligent direction, then these manifestations are hardly 
			surprising. These signals could have existed long before we 
			developed the devices necessary to intercept them. Once we had the
			necessary equipment, the source of the signals adjusted the 
			frequencies so. we could heat them.
 
			  
			It - or they - are also able to 
			play havoc with our communications at will… and there is evidence 
			that this is happening.
 During the ghostflier wave over northern Europe in the 1930s, 
			isolated people in Norway and Sweden picked up enigmatic broadcasts 
			on their shortwave sets, purportedly the ufonauts chattering back 
			and forth over the airwaves, often in broken Swedish. The 
			Scandinavian press speculated that Germany or the Soviet Union might 
			be responsible for the broadcasts, but so evidence of this ever came 
			to light.
 
 In countless modern UFO eases witnesses have claimed they received 
			strange guttural voices and dot-and-dash signals on car radios, TV 
			sets, and telephones while flying saucers hovered overhead. 
			Citizens' Band (CB) radios also have a habit of picking up these 
			signals in flap areas. On many occasions these voices and sounds 
			have been emitted by loudspeakers which were turned off or weren't 
			even connected.
 
 A loudspeaker consists of an electromagnet which vibrates a cone of 
			paper or stiff cloth. When the cone vibrates, it naturally vibrates 
			the air and produces audible sound waves. Theoretically, a beam of 
			electromagnetic energy on a very low frequency (VLF) could activate 
			the magnet.
 
 In January 1954, people throughout the Midwest allegedly heard a 
			strange voice coming from turned -off radios.
 
			  
			The voice stated in a 
			dull monotone:  
				
				'I wish no one to be afraid, although I speak from 
			space. But if you do not stop preparations for war, you will be 
			destroyed.'  
			Sven stranger, the same kind of message delivered by the 
			same kind of voice was supposedly picked up by the equipment at 
			London airport that month.
 George Hunt Williamson, an anthropologist, claimed he was present 
			when an amateur radio operator established contact with another 
			world in the summer of 1952. Here's Williamson's account of that 
			experiment:
 
				
				This test was of such a nature that if the messages were a hoax, 
			they would have been revealed as such immediately… He sent a 
			question over his transmitter [to the space people], and he received 
			an answer. Without any warning he quickly switched to 160 meters and 
			asked another question.    
				To his surprise an answer was soon 
			forthcoming! Any radioman knows that no power on Earth would have 
			enabled any operator to know where he was
			switching to! Even if Mr R. had told the other operator that he was 
			going to switch to 160 meters, still they would not have found him 
			on that band until after the question had been asked.    
				And of course, 
			they couldn't have answered the question if they hadn't heard it! 
			Williamson spent a lot of time probing around the ancient ruins of 
			South America before he suddenly vanished without a trace in the 
			early 1960s.
 At a flying saucer buffs' convention in Giant Rock, California, in 
			1954 one speaker informed the audience:
 
				
				The entities of the spaceships and saucers can and do read the mind 
			of a radio operator, exchanging communications. They know when he is 
			several yards from his set and will give him time to reach it before 
			they signal… In one case involving something in the nature of mind 
			reading at a distance, these entities gave the answer to a 
			discussion going on in a room and not taken up or referred to on the 
			radio. 
			Quite a few amateur radio operators have joined the ranks of the UFO 
			contactees in recent years, perhaps because all night they sit 
			surrounded by equipment radiating powerful magnetic fields which can 
			somehow be utilized by the phenomena.  
			  
			On August 3rd, 1958, ham 
			operators throughout the United States reportedly picked up a 
			strange broadcast on the seventy-five-meter international band. A 
			male voice claiming to be 'Nacoma from the planet Jupiter' warned 
			his listeners that the atomic bomb tests could lead to disaster.  
			  
			He 
			spoke for two-and-a-half hours in English, German, Norwegian and his 
			own language, described as kind of musical gibberish. 
				
				'It was the most powerful signal ever picked up,' one account said. 
			There was plenty of time during the broadcast for hundreds to listen 
			in, and radio operators called in friends and neighbors and phoned 
			long distance to relatives in other states.' 
			The Federal Communications Commission later denied any knowledge of 
			the broadcast.
 The far-off, far-out planet of Korendor checked in on a warm night 
			in July 1961.
 
			  
			An eighteen-year-old radio buff, Bob Renaud, was, 
				
				"browsing around the shortwave bands' in his home in a little town 
			in Massachusetts, when 'suddenly from the loudspeaker came a very 
			high pitched beep-beep-beep'. He was annoyed by it, he said, and 
			tried unsuccessfully to tune it out. 'It stopped,' he wrote later, 
			"but
			was replaced by a soft, warm, crystal clear feminine voice that 
			said, 'Bob, we'd like you to stay on this frequency for a while."' 
			This space lady identified herself as linn-Erri (like the demons and 
			angels of yesteryear, the space people are fond of names containing 
			double letters).  
			  
			Over the months that followed she dictated endless 
			treatises on what was wrong with us and what was right with her 
			world. The Renaud story quickly fell into the pattern of all the 
			earlier contactees. At 2 a.m. on the morning of December 22nd, 1962,a 
			car drove up in front of his house, according to his story, and 
			three rather normal looking men invited him to hop in.  
			  
			They drove 
			him to ay isolated field where they demonstrated an antigravity 
			device which lifted a huge boulder a hundred feet in the air. Then 
			they pointed another gadget at it, and it disintegrated in a Dash. 
			Later they conducted him on a tour of a secret underground UFO base 
			in Massachusetts and even took him for a little flight in a flying 
			saucer.
 Following the Korendians' instructions, Renaud claims he rebuilt a 
			TV set so that he could receive outer space TV shows. When 
			linn-Erri's face appeared on the screen, she turned out to be a 
			beautiful blonde, 37-22-26. She appeared to be eighteen or nineteen 
			years old but admitted to being seventy-four 'which in our society 
			is the prime of life'.
 
			  
			(Renaud's TV set probably operates on the 
			same non-principle employed by the celebrated Psionic Machine of 
			Thomas G. Heir-cnymous which was promoted by Astounding Science 
			Fiction for some years. If the parts are removed from, the Psionic 
			Machine, it continues to work anyway because it apparently operates 
			on some psychic force, like Ouija boards and dowsing rods do.)
 Another ham radio operator was swallowed up by the contactee 
			phenomenon on January 30th, 1965. Towards midnight on January 29th 
			George M. Clemins, mayor of Monterey, California, and several other 
			people reportedly saw a brilliantly illuminated spherical object 
			hovering over Monterey Bay. It appeared to slowly descend out of 
			sight on the other side of the bay. Two hours later a 
			forty-five-year-old TV repairman named Sidney Padrick shut down his 
			ham radio rig and decided to take a stroll before going to sleep.
 
			  
			On 
			Manresa Beach directly opposite Monterey he heard a loud humming 
			noise and saw a strange machine shaped like 'two real thick saucers 
			inverted.' He was none too happy about this apparition, he admitted, 
			and so he turned and started to run away. 
				
				'Do not be frightened,' a voice reportedly boomed from the object 
			'We are-not hostile.' Mr Padrick kept running. 'We mean you no harm. 
			You are welcome to come aboard.' 
			Padrick stopped and considered, feeling slightly bewildered and 
			foolish.  
			  
			A door slid open, he said, and he cautiously approached it. 
			The voice urged him on. He stepped into a small room about six by 
			seven feet, where he was greeted by a medium-sized man with very 
			pale skin.  
			  
			He had, Padrick noted, a very sharp nose and chin and 
			unusually long fingers.  
				
				'His hands were very clean. The fingernails 
			looked as if somebody had just given them a manicure.'  
			Padrick said: 
				
				They wore two-piece suits with no buttons or zippers that I could 
			see. The bottom section actually included shoes - it looked like 
			boots which continued on up to the waistline without any break 
			around the ankles, just like a child's snowsuit.    
				They had soles and 
			heels similar to ours -I could hear them walking with a 
			"thump-thump" sound on the rubbery-like floor. The collar had a very 
			pretty design on it - it came down to a V in the front, and the 
			neckpiece, right around his neck, had a braid of some kind on it, 
			very pretty. 
				  
				It had colors, but I can't tell you what they were, 
			because they weren't colors that I had ever seen before… much more 
			beautiful than ours. 
			When Padrick asked for the man's name, he was told,  
				
				'You may call me Zeeno.'  
			Although the witness didn't know it, the Greek word for 
			stranger (xeno) is pronounced zee-no. Being a technician, Padrick 
			was able to supply a detailed description of the interior of the 
			craft and was nonplussed when Mr Zeeno showed him a room 'similar to 
			a chapel'.   
			The color effect in that room was so pretty that I almost fainted 
			when I went in. A mixture of beautiful colors - I can't describe 
			it. There were eight chairs, a stool, and what appeared to be an 
			altar.  
			  
			Zeeno said,  
				
				'Would you like to pay your respects to the 
			Supreme Deity?'    
				I didn't know how to accept it… I'm forty-five years 
			old, and until that night I had never felt the presence of the 
			Supreme Being, but I did feel Him that night.
 After taking a short flight in the object, Padrick claimed he was 
			returned to the beach where he had been picked up. He reported his 
			experience to the Air Force immediately and was later interviewed 
			for three hours by officers from the nearby Hamilton Air Force Base. 
			They wanted an account of it, word for word,' he said in a later 
			telephone interview.
   
				'I told them exactly what happened.
			They were the first to hear it. There were certain details which 
			they asked me not to talk about publicly; but I think in telling it 
			everything should be disclosed. I can see no reason for anything 
			being held back. The Air Force didn't want me to say that Zeeno told 
			me the space people had no money.    
				They did not want me to disclose 
			the type and shape of the craft because they said that would 
			indicate the Air Force was not doing its duty. I told them I could 
			see no reason for that either. I know the Air Force believed it - I 
			know it from the standpoint that they did a lot of checking down 
			here in the area. They were here for quite some time after the 
			incident.    
				They didn't want me to divulge the saucer's means of 
			communication or power. [Padrick was led to assume that the object 
			was powered by light waves or magnetic rays].    
				Also, the man's name… 
			they didn't want me to repeat that… because "It didn't mean 
			anything."' 
			Reporters found that Sid Padrick was backed up by everyone who knew 
			him.  
			  
			He was highly regarded as an honest man and was not a religious 
			fanatic or UFO nut. Ironically, the hardcore UFO cultists rejected 
			his story out of hand because of the unpalatable religious 
			overtones.  
			  
			Everyone else, including the Air Force, took him very 
			seriously.
 Radio amateurs continue to receive strange messages from somewhere. 
			Ham operators in flap areas have cautiously reported all kinds of 
			manifestations, including the materialization of entities in their 
			radio shacks. It is common for UFO contactees to hear alien voices 
			delivering personal messages to them from their ordinary home 
			receivers.
 
			  
			A number of people even claim that images of the spacemen 
			have appeared suddenly on their TV sets and addressed them directly. 
			The rapid increase of such cases since 1965 suggests that a new game 
			may be in the making. It sounds like a cliché science fiction plot, 
			but a time may come when a general message to the human race may 
			suddenly spurt from every receiver on Earth in every language. 
			Wouldn't that be a kick in the teeth!
 During World War I very low frequencies (VLF} were briefly 
			experimented with. These are very long radio waves which require a 
			specially built receiver. In the last few years VLF stations have 
			quietly been constructed all over the world, although there are only 
			a few commercial receivers on the market, and very few hams have VLF 
			equipment. Most of that is of World War I vintage.
 
 The U.S. Navy maintains several gigantic installations which cost 
			millions of dollars and serve the announced purpose of communicating 
			with our atomic submarines throughout the world's seas
			(VLF can penetrate underwater).
 
			  
			To give some idea of their size, the 
			largest commercial broadcasting station allowed puts out fifty 
			thousand watts of power. The Voice of America has conventional 
			stations which broadcast five hundred thousand watts. Yet the Soviet 
			Union has a VLF station, EWB in Odessa, which is pouring out five 
			million watts! And the U.S. VLF station at Cutler, Maine, is putting 
			out two million watts. There are now 150 VLF stations all over this 
			planet, and aside from a few atomic submarines and a bevy of spies, 
			there's no one to listen.
 What are all these stations broadcasting?
 
			  
			Well, station WWV 
			transmits nothing but time signals…if anyone needs to set a watch. 
			Teletypes are used by many stations exclusively. The teletype signal 
			sounds somewhat musical, like bagpipes, over a loudspeaker. Voice 
			transmission on the lower VLF channels is very difficult for a 
			variety of reasons and not much of it is being done.  
			  
			Yet some 
			amateurs with VLF equipment have reported picking up guttural, 
			unintelligible voices at the very bottom of the scale around six 
			KiloHerz. 
				
				'All manner of strange (and often unexplained) radio sounds and 
			signab mysteriously appear on VLF receivers,' noted the Radio-TV 
			Experimenter, April-May 1967. (That issue gives details on how to 
			build a VLF receiver for a few dollars.) 
			The government is currently turning hundreds of square miles of 
			Wisconsin into a massive VLF antenna, causing quite an uproar in 
			that state.  
			  
			Everytime the VLF transmitter is cranked up, telephones 
			for miles around go amok with false rings and strange noises. In 
			fact, many of the telephone problems currently plaguing the United 
			States can probably be blamed on VLF experiments. These very long 
			waves of electromagnetic energy can and do seriously affect 
			equipment operating in the lower ranges of the spectrum.
 Another culprit is the National Security Agency, the James Bondish 
			organization that runs the CIA. We maintain a twenty-four hour 
			message service to our agents around the globe via VLF. These 
			messages are broadcast in code on the higher VLF channels. A voice 
			endlessly rattles off six-digit numbers. When the Cuban government 
			arrested Humberto Carrillo Colon, an alleged CIA spy, in September 
			1969, they found a unique VLF transceiver in his possession.
 
			  
			Cuban 
			counterspies claimed they had been monitoring his transmissions for 
			months and had broken the CIA code. Copies of Colon's alleged 
			messages were released to the Havana newspapers and reprinted in 
			Communist propaganda organs in the United States. A number of 
			oddities are buried in the dense text of these purported communiqués 
			with the CIA. In April 1969, Colon is supposed to have
 reported a conversation with a Cuban official: 'On the way to the 
			hotel he told me that I would be witness to something historical. 
			THAT WITHIN SIX MONTHS THERE WOULD BE NO MORE MONEY.' (Capitals were 
			used in the published quote). He allegedly saw 'something strange, 
			like a whale or large fish, that was no such thing, more like a 
			minisubmarine or something like that' at Varadero.
 
			  
			On October 8th, 
			1968, during a visit to Holgiun, he reported: "About 8.30 I saw a 
			shooting star. First I saw a. red light on the horizon very fast 
			from right to left. I don't know what it was. I also saw a shooting 
			star… I wasn't even drunk.'
 If the published reports are true - and of course, there is always 
			room for doubt - then it would seem that CIA agents have been 
			instructed to report anomalies and aerial phenomena.
 
 In recent years voices calling off numbers on VLF channels have 
			frequently been intercepted by conventional equipment when weather 
			conditions were right. Tape recorders, sound movie projectors, TV 
			sets, and even public address systems have been picking up these 
			signals.
 
			  
			For some reason, public address amplifiers in churches in 
			England and the United States (such as the All Saints Roman Catholic 
			Church in Portland, Oregon, and the St Laurence Church in Cambridge, 
			England) have been especially prone to this type of interference. 
			Listeners usually conclude they are hearing broadcasts of taxicab 
			companies.  
			  
			Actually, taxi companies use a much higher frequency, and 
			their signals are not likely to be picked up by low frequency 
			equipment, TV, incidentally, uses FM (frequency modulation) for 
			sound, and it should be nearly impossible for a TV set to intercept 
			any other signal.
 At the other end of the radio spectrum on the ultra-high frequencies 
			(UHF) reserved exclusively for space satellites and manned-space 
			flight communications, there has also been a plague of anomalous 
			radio-signals. Back in November 1957, shortwave listeners everywhere 
			were baffled by a strange tonal pattern which was broadcast next to 
			the 20.00S frequency used by the two Russian satellites.
 
			  
			Both the 
			Soviet Union and the United States announced emphatically that the 
			signals were not related to the satellites.  
				
				'It isn't classified,' 
			an FCC spokesman declared. 'We just don't know what it is.' 
			They never found out either.  
			  
			The signals were much stronger than 
			those being broadcast by Sputniks I and II, they were worldwide, and 
			they were picked up by stations at times when the satellites were 
			out of range on the other side of the world.
 During his fourth pass over Hawaii in MA-9 (Faith 7) on May
			15th, 1963, astronaut Gordon Cooper's voice transmission was 
			suddenly interrupted and drowned out by "an unintelligible foreign 
			language transmission" on the channel reserved for space flights - a 
			frequency which few if any amateurs are equipped to broadcast on.
 
			  
			If 
			the signal came from the ground, it had to come from Hawaii (VHF and 
			UHF are highly directional), but the FCC never arrested a Hawaiian 
			ham for the hoax, NASA recorded that transmission, a voice grunting 
			and speaking rapidly in a language that has never been identified.
 Later space shots have been repeatedly troubled by these anomalous 
			transmissions. The broadcasts from our astronauts circling the moon 
			in 1968 and 1969 were often interrupted by strange noises. Anyone 
			listening to those NASA transmissions closely heard things like 
			Indian war whoops and strange music.
 
			  
			Because the space channels are 
			highly directional, these odd insertions had to come from space or 
			from specially equipped planes flying directly over the directional 
			dish antennae used to pick up the astronaut's transmission. NASA has 
			been uneasily silent about its investigations into these problems.
 All of the American astronauts and Soviet cosmonauts have seen and 
			photographed unusual lights and objects in space. The final report 
			of the Colorado University UFO study devotes a full chapter to the 
			unexplained astronaut sightings.
 
 The late Frank Edwards, a famous radio newsman and author of flying 
			saucer books, made much of the weird radio signals that had been 
			received in Uppsala, Sweden, in 1961, the same area where the ghostflier broadcasts had been received in 1934-6. A group of young 
			radio enthusiasts had built tracking equipment and receivers that 
			could pick up the high frequencies employed by the American and 
			Soviet space programs.
 
			  
			As soon as they had their equipment in 
			operation, they picked up an extended (it lasted seven days and 
			nights) series of broadcasts, apparently from orbiting manned space 
			vehicles. These were in Russian and were taped and translated. A 
			hapless pair of cosmonauts was presumably lost in space.  
			  
			They 
			discussed the critical situation they were in and wearily concluded,  
				
				'The world will never know about it anyway…' 
			They were wrong. Other amateur tracking stations in Italy and Alaska 
			were also tuned in. according to Edwards.
 Edwards' conclusion was that the Russians had secretly sent two 
			cosmonauts into space, and they had been killed. There is one 
			problem. The Soviet space program was nowhere nearly advanced 
			enough for such an effort in 1961. Yuri Gagarin bad made his
 
 historic orbital flight - the world's first - only one month before 
			the signals were received. The next manned flight would require 
			months of preparation. The Soviets could not and would not have 
			Attempted a two-man mission at that point in their program. It is 
			much more probable that the radio transmissions were the work of out 
			mysterious radio hoaxsters.
 
 We can offer many other examples of complicated and seemingly 
			pointless radio hoaxes. A frantic distress signal swept the Pacific 
			early in 1968 and was received by marine radio stations and ships at 
			sea. The signals were triangulated and the exact position of a 
			purportedly distressed freighter was determined. Following the law 
			of the sea, several ships in the vicinity changed their courses and 
			rushed to the aid of the sinking vessel.
 
 There was one slight hitch. The freighter in question was safely 
			docked in the harbour at Calcutta, India, and the would-be rescuers 
			found nothing but empty ocean.
 
 A few months later the atomic submarine Scorpion vanished in the 
			Atlantic in the section popularly known as the Bermuda Triangle. 
			Once again mysterious radio signals were received by several ships 
			and naval stations and were triangulated, pin-pointing the exact 
			position. These signals were broadcast on the VLF frequency reserved 
			for atomic submarines and used the secret code names employed by the 
			Navy.
 
			  
			Planes and rescue vessels rushed to the spot and found 
			nothings In December, 1968, the Navy issued a statement announcing 
			that the Scorpion had finally been located hundreds of miles away 
			from the spot where the signals had presumably originated. The 
			signals were denounced as a hoax.
 What kind of hoax? Did some practical Joker load some rare VUF 
			equipment into a small boat after somehow stealing a copy of the 
			Navy's secret code book? Did he then sail out into the middle of the 
			Atlantic, broadcast his false signals, and then somehow sail back, 
			managing to elude the planes and rescue ships on the way?
 
 Anomalous radio broadcasts also played a baffling role in the 
			assassinations. Four minutes after President Kennedy was shot in 
			Dallas. Texas, in 1963, someone was broadcasting on the police hands 
			in Dallas, offering a description of Lee Harvey Oswald. This was 
			long before the police had even heard of Oswald or had any reason to 
			think that he might have been implicated in the assassination. None 
			of the regular police dispatchers had broadcast that alarm. Who did? 
			The question remains unanswered.
 
 Immediately after the Rev. Martin Luther King was shot in
			Memphis, Tennessee, in April 1968, a phony broadcasting the police 
			band sent all the police rushing to the wrong side of town, while 
			the alleged killer went off in the other direction unhindered.
 
 Our radio pranksters are a fact, not a myth. They operate in all 
			languages and are obviously equipped with rare, specialized 
			transmitters so powerful they can drown out all conventional 
			signals. Their enterprises are usually pointless, sometimes harmful, 
			never explainable. It must be a very expensive operation , ..if it 
			is purely terrestrial. But many of these incidents smack of the 
			mischievous work of our ultraterrestrials.
 
 Our phantom broadcasters have also zeroed in on super sophisticated 
			scientific equipment. At 4 am. on the morning of April 8th, 1960, 
			the great dish antenna of the radio telescope at Green Bank, West 
			Virginia, swept across the skies and focused upon the predetermined 
			target: Epsilon Eridani and Tau Ceti. This was Project Ozma, the 
			search for intelligent signals from outer space, headed by Dr Otto 
			Struve and Dr Frank Drake.
 
			  
			They tuned their equipment to 1420.4 
			megacycles (they had calculated that communication over vast stellar 
			distances would be most feasible at this wavelength -the frequency 
			of hydrogen). Eureka! Even before they could switch on their 
			loudspeakers a powerful signal blasted in, •knocking the needles off 
			the dials,' as Drake put it. They received a very strong series of 
			pulses, about eight per second, so uniform that they had to come 
			from an intelligent source.
 After recovering from their initial excitement, the scientists 
			re-checked every part of their equipment but could find nothing 
			wrong. The signals lasted for about five minutes and then stopped 
			abruptly. Later the Naval Research Laboratory revealed that its 
			staff had been listening to these same signals for the past six 
			months.
 
 Two weeks later the men at Green Bank tuned into the signals again. 
			This time they carefully moved their antenna away from the two stars 
			as they listened, and they found the signals continued to come in 
			loud and clear. This proved that the transmissions were not coming 
			from a star but were very probably of local, terrestrial origin from 
			some unknown but amazingly powerful transmitter.
 
 Rumors that secret radar experiments were responsible for the 
			signals proved unfounded. Radar does not use that wavelength, does 
			not pulse eight times per second, and could not affect the highly 
			directional radio telescope.
 
 A trio of Soviet scientists, Gennady B. Sholomitsky, Nikolai S. Kardashev and 
			I.S. Shklovskü, won world-wide headlines in 1965, 
			when they announced that they had received radio signals from
			beacons of some supercivilization in space.
 
			  
			Later other radio 
			astronomers discovered that these signals were coming from 
			fantastically huge stars labeled quasars, the furthest out of all 
			known objects in the universe. The signals are apparently natural 
			radio propagation. The Russians later retracted their theories 
			about the civilization, causing the UFO buffs to howl 'Cover-up!' 
			once more.
 In 1967 Dr Drake and other scientists working at the Arecibo, Puerto 
			Rico, radio-telescope installation detected waves of hissing and 
			static coming from four different points. Experimentation revealed 
			numerous other invisible sources of radio waves in space and these 
			objects have been tagged pulsars. The current theory is that pulsars 
			are the hardcore remnants of a supernova which has collapsed 
			inwardly and is made up of densely packed neutrons.
 
			  
			So far it seems 
			that the magnetic fields of the pulsars are one trillion times 
			greater than the Earth's. The sky may be filled with these things, 
			and if any should ever happen to wander into our solar system^ 
			things could become very uncomfortable on this planet.
 Sadly, the United States lags far behind in radio-telescope research, 
			Germany, Britain, Holland, Australia, and even Argentina and Israel 
			are building bigger and better instruments to probe into these new 
			mysteries.
 
 Meanwhile mankind is unwittingly overloading or overcharging the 
			Earth's atmosphere with all kinds of magnetic and radio waves. As 
			the man-made electromagnetic field increases, it clashes with the 
			natural magnetism of the Earth. The result is that apparatus 
			dependent on small magnetic fields (such as generators, computers, 
			and tape recorders) are now being thrown askew by these larger 
			blankets of incompatible electro-magnetism.
 
 Nikola Tesla calculated that the Earth's natural fields lie at a 
			frequency of about 150 kilocycles. Perhaps when there is an 
			interchange between the Earth's fields and the rays or fields coming 
			in from stellar sources such as pulsars, an overcharge develops in 
			some areas, indulging power failures and malfunctions of electronic 
			equipment.
 
			  
			One of the few really secure facts in ufology is that 
			there have been hundreds of power failures simultaneous with the 
			appearance of unidentified flying objects. The popular notion that 
			UFOs cause power failures could be erroneous. It is possible that 
			the appearance of UFOs and the accompanying power failures could in 
			some cases be the result of this cosmic energy exchange.
 During the great Northeastern Blackout of 1965 several local power 
			companies completely independent of the affected main power grid 
			also failed. Interestingly, while normal AM radio frequencies
			continued to operate that night, short wave and VLF transmission and 
			reception in the affected regions were hopelessly jammed with 
			static. This alone indicated that an extraordinary electromagnetic 
			condition existed.
 
			  
			Following the big blackout. New York's Con Edison 
			power company quietly installed expensive magnetic shielding devices 
			around key equipment and new, heavily shielded cables were 
			introduced in sensitive areas. Since 1965 Bell Telephone Company has 
			been switching from overhead lines to more expensive, heavily 
			shielded cables buried under the ground.
 In the summer of 1970 all the electronic gear in the video tape 
			studios of Waddell & Reed, Inc., in Kansas City, Missouri went 
			haywire,
 
				
				'Something made our equipment completely sensitive to everything 
			around us,' the manager of the studio, Mrs Kevin Eisenbrandt, told 
			the Kansas City Star (August 5th, 1970).  
			The nearby Commerce Bank 
			experienced similar problems with their computers and electronic 
			gear at the same time. Experts called in to investigate were 
			baffled.
 In far-off Noebbet, Denmark, a sawmill closed down in October 1970, 
			economically ruined 'by mysterious forces that have blown out fuses 
			by the thousands, bulbs by the hundreds, and electric motors by the 
			dozen'. Hans Nielsen, the owner, told reporters that the 
			disturbances began eighteen months earlier.
 
			  
			Scientists and 
			technicians measured twenty-nine thousand 'lightning-like electrical 
			discharges in mill installations in one day'. The bursts occurred 
			even when all electricity to the mill was cut off.
 Incidents such as these are on the increase. Electromagnetic 
			pollution is becoming a serious worldwide problem. Another more 
			grisly aspect of the phenomenon, death by lightning, is also on the 
			rise. A worldwide wave of lightning deaths took place in August and 
			September 1970. In a number of cases the fatal lightning bolts 
			lashed out of a clear, cloudless sky.
 
 Satellites whizzing around the Earth have detected a powerful beam 
			of VLF energy being projected intermittently from a specific area of 
			empty ocean near Antarctica. This has inspired scientific 
			speculation that the Earth may be broadcasting natural radio waves 
			into space on the same order of the waves coming from Jupiter and 
			Venus.
 
 A few years ago newspapers carried a puzzling report from Greenland, 
			describing how a group of scientists there had discovered a massive 
			object buried deep in the ice. It supposedly broadcast a
			strange radio signal at regular intervals. This odd report was never 
			verified, and nothing further was ever published about it.
 
 One of the persistent UFO rumors of the early 1950s claimed that an 
			unnamed scientist in Washington had in his possession a tiny box 
			which had been extracted from a 'crashed flying saucer in New 
			Mexico'. According to the rumor, the box emitted a loud beep every 
			fifteen minutes and so one could figure out what it was made of or 
			how it worked.
 
 Radio itself is supposed to have been one of the secrets of the 
			ancient mystical societies: a closely guarded means of communication 
			between members. A form of primitive crystal sets was allegedly used 
			by the brothers of the Rosenkreuz (Rosy Cross
			- the Rosicrucians) centuries ago. It is even possible - there is no 
			way of knowing for sure - that the mysterious plates and amulets 
			used by ancient priests may have been crystal sets of some sort, 
			tuned to some secret mountain transmitter.
 
 We do know that the atmosphere of our haunted planet is overloaded 
			with electrical energy today, ranging from manmade radio signals on 
			every frequency to mysterious, patterned signals from some unknown 
			source.
 
			  
			While our scientists have been tuning their 
			multimillion-dollar equipment into remote hisses and squeaks from 
			distant stars, hundreds, if not thousands, of ham radio operators 
			and teenagers with homemade coils and condensers have been listening 
			with awe to the wild, unidentifiable, and obviously intelligent 
			signals radiating from and around our own planet.  
			  
			These signals ejdst. They existed from the moment Tesla first tuned into them 
			accidentally. If the present trend continues, more and more people 
			will be hearing these strange voices and signals from their radios 
			and TV sets in the future. We live in a world ruled by electro-magnetism, 
			and there is every indication that someone - the Earth's phantom 
			Inhabitants - learned to utilize these forces long ago.  
			  
			In time we 
			may learn to separate the natural static and the CIA codes from the 
			truly enigmatic waves that are flowing all round us. 
			  
			  
			  
			CHAPTER FIFTEEN
 WHERE IS 
			EVERYBODY GOING?
 
 Strange things happen on the twenty-fourth of die month. People 
			vanish.
 
			  
			On October 24th, 1593, a Spanish soldier standing guard in 
			Manila in the Philippines suddenly disappeared. Twenty-four hours 
			later he found himself in Mexico City, some nine thousand miles from 
			Manila, without any idea how he had managed to travel so far so 
			fast. We could dismiss the seemingly factual historic account of 
			this case if it weren't for the disturbing fact that such things 
			continue to happen on a regular basis.
 On October 24th. 1967, Bruce Burkan, nineteen, found himself sitting 
			in a bus terminal in Newark, dressed in a cheap, ill-fitting suit 
			with exactly seven cents in his pocket.
 
			  
			He didn't have the foggiest 
			notion what he was doing there, not could he remember anything that 
			had happened during the previous two months. On August 22nd, 1967. 
			Burkan and his girlfriend went to a beach at Asbury Park, New 
			Jersey. He left her later to go and put a coin in a parking meter. 
			He was wearing nothing but a bathing suit. When he failed to return, 
			his friend went looking for him. She found his locked cat where he 
			had parked it.
 Burkan's family held a well publicized search for him, but not a 
			single clue turned up. Finally they conducted a funeral service in 
			his memory, giving him up for dead. After his reappearance on 
			October 24th, tie young man told reporters, There's one thing that 
			really bothers me. I have fiery red hair. Where was I that despite 
			all the publicity no one recognized me?"
 
 On August 15th, 1967, seven days before Burkan's still unexplained 
			disappearance, a thirty-seven-year-old research scientist named Paul 
			T. MacGregor left his office at the Polaroid Corporation in Boston. 
			Massachusetts, and started out for Camp Kirby to join his 
			vacationing family. He never got there. One month latex he walked 
			into a police station in Buffalo, New York, and told them he didn't 
			know who he was.
 
			  
			His identity was traced through the labels of his 
			clothes and the inscription on his wedding ring. Doctors at the 
			Meyer Memorial Hospital examined him and said they were convinced 
			that he was suffering from amnesia.
 Who 01 what had met him on that Massachusetts highway that night and 
			caused Ms mind to shut off the past?
 
 Despite all the movie and soap opera plots that have revolved around 
			amnesia, a simple blow on the head rarely induces the condition. The 
			traditional medical explanation is that an overwhelming emotional 
			trauma is the cause of most amnesia. A man murders his wife in a fit 
			of rage, and then his mind wipes out his entire memory.
 
			  
			A child sees 
			his dog run over by a car and erases the painful memory by blotting 
			out that entire period of his childhood. Skilled psychiatrists can 
			Spot this form of amnesia and cope with it. But most of the amnesia 
			cases induced by paranormal happenings, such as encounters with 
			fairies or flying saucers, are not so easily diagnosed and dealt 
			with. The nature of the trauma is never fully determined.
 Every July there is a sudden rash of new amnesia cases in the 
			national press, coincidence with the traditional July peak of UFO 
			sightings. Thousands of people who have been exposed to psychic 
			phenomena and UFO manifestations have suffered lacunar amnesia; that 
			is, they find they are unable to remember a short period of time 
			before, during, or after their experiences.
 
			  
			Others appear suddenly 
			in different parts of the world, sometimes knowing who they are but 
			baffled that they are suddenly so far from home. A Londoner suddenly 
			finds himself in South Africa. A girl from Cleveland awakes to 
			discover she is in Australia. An unemployed Swedish milkman suddenly 
			finds himself on a golf course on a remote island resort for the 
			very rich.
 A woman in Allentown, Pennsylvania, soberly related this strange 
			story; she said she and her husband maintained a small summer 
			cottage in the Pocono mountains, a mere thirty-minute drive from 
			their home. One Saturday morning in July 1966, the young couple got 
			into their car and started out for the cottage. As they drove along 
			the Pennsylvania Turnpike, which seemed strangely devoid of traffic 
			that day, they saw a large circular object in the sky ahead of them. 
			It looked as if it was going to land directly on the turnpike, she 
			said.
 
			  
			Her husband, mildly alarmed, pulled over to the edge of the 
			road and stopped. They watched as the object, a shiny metallic thing 
			with large black spots or windows, flew very low over their car. 
			Then it was suddenly gone. Her husband started the car again, and 
			they drove on to their cottage. It was not until after, they arrived 
			at their destination that they looked at their watches. It was 1.30 
			pm. They had started out at 9.30 am. For some reason which neither 
			of them could understand, it took them four hours to make a drive 
			that normally took thirty minutes!
 On a warm night early in August 1966, a Philadelphia policeman named 
			Chester Archey, Jr., set out on a routine patrol in North 
			Philadelphia. He drove instead through that door into the unknown.
 
			  
			Archey, a veteran of fifteen years on the force, suddenly found 
			himself in Pennsauken, New Jersey, where he became involved in a 
			minor accident as he drove around in confusion.  
				
				"I don't have an 
			idea how I got there," Archey protested at a police hearing later. 
			"I don't even know where Pennsauken is!" 
			In occult and UFO lore there are hundreds of reports of this 
			phenomenon. 
			  
			It also seems to work in reverse. Witnesses claim that 
			they drove or even walked incredible distances - sometimes hundreds 
			of miles - in incredibly short periods of time. It is as if they 
			crossed over into another dimension where time and space have a 
			different relationship.
 There is also a peculiar cloud phenomenon connected with some of 
			these 
			teleportations, or transferences.
 
			  
			According to the newspaper Diario de Córdoba, a well-known Argentine businessman suffered a 
			strange distortion of time and space in 1959. He reportedly got into 
			his brand-new car one morning in the city of Bahia Blanca, 
			Argentina, and started to drive away from his hotel, when a strange 
			cloud seemed to envelope his vehicle. The next thing he knew he was 
			standing alone on a deserted spot in the countryside.  
			  
			He hailed a 
			passing truck and asked the driver to take him to Bahia Blanca. 
			Looking at him as if he were some kind of maniac, the driver 
			explained that they were in Salta. Bahia Blanca was over a thousand 
			kilometers away. He drove the befuddled businessman to the nearest 
			police station, and they called the police in Bahia Blanca.  
			  
			The 
			police later called back and confirmed that the businessman's car 
			was still outside the hotel with its engine running. Strangest of 
			all, only a few minutes had elapsed from the time the man had first 
			climbed into the car - yet he had somehow been transported over a 
			thousand kilometers.
 Bahia Blanca is a busy Window area and has been the site of many 
			strange psychic and UFO reports in recent years. In May 1968, Dr 
			Gerardo Vidal and his wife said they were driving outside the city 
			when their auto was caught up in dense fog, and they lost 
			consciousness. They came to on a strange road. Their watches had 
			stopped, and the surface of their car was badly scorched.
 
			  
			They soon 
			learned that forty-eight hours had passed, and they were now in 
			Mexico, many thousands of miles north of Bahia Blanca!
 On March 4th, 1968, a leading Japanese newspaper, Mainkhi, carried 
			an unbelievable story about an automobile disappearing in
			Ml view of a crowded highway. The reporting witnesses were three 
			officials of the Fuji Bank on their way to the golf course at 
			Ryugazaki. As they drove outside of Kanamachi, they said they saw a 
			black car ahead of them going in the same direction.
 
			  
			Aside from the 
			driver, they could see an elderly man in the back seat reading a 
			newspaper. 
				
				'Suddenly a pug of something gaseous, like white smoke or 
				vapor, 
			gushed from somewhere around the black car, and when this cloud 
			dispersed (a matter of not more than five seconds), the black car 
			had vanished,' the newspaper account said. 
			The trio of witnesses were so shaken by the incident that they 
			stopped and reported it to the police, and so another inexplicable 
			oddity was added to our bulging files.  
			  
			Could that car in Japan have 
			been taken by the same unknown force that transported the Argentine 
			businessman a thousand kilometers? Could the same force have been at 
			work when British Wing Commander J. Baldwin flew into a cloud and 
			never came out again during the Korean War? Other pilots in his 
			formation scoured the area but could find no trace of their 
			commander or his plane.  
			  
			Was it the same kind of cloud that literally 
			devoured a whole regiment of British soldiers near Sulva Bay, 
			Turkey, in 1915?  
			  
			An entrenched group of men later signed affidavits 
			swearing they had watched the One-Fourth Norfolk Regiment march into 
			a peculiar brown cloud that hugged the ground in their path and that 
			none of them reappeared on the other side. After a few moments the 
			cloud rose up and flew away, the witnesses reported, joining a group 
			of similar clouds which then sailed off against the wind. No one 
			from that regiment was ever seen again.  
			  
			Eight hundred men gone -or 
			taken - from the face of the earth!
 On August 4th, 1968, Gradela del Lourdes Jimenez, eleven, was 
			playing outside her home in Cordoba, Argentina, when she too was 
			caught up in one of these mysterious clouds.
 
				
				'I wanted to go back indoors and watch TV,' she told reporters from 
			the newspaper Cordoba, 'and then just as I was about to turn around… 
			a white cloud, like mist, appeared on the front path.  
				  
				It gradually 
			came towards where I was, and then I could no longer see the other 
			houses, and I couldn't move or call out to Mummy… And after that… I 
			don't know anything more… until I found myself on a square where 
			there were lots of people and lots of little boys…' 
			She knocked at a nearby house, and the residents turned her over to 
			the police. How had she travelled from a Cordoba suburb to the Plaza España in the heart of the city?  
			  
			Mr Gordon Creighton, a retired 
			British consular officer, collected the reports and translated
			them for Flying Saucer, Review, September-October 1970. He reports 
			that the child suffered fits of weeping and cold chills following 
			the incident.
 There are periodic waves of disappearances which create brief 
			sensations in the newspapers and are quickly forgotten. No one ever 
			manages to find out where these people have gone. In 1912 five men, 
			all unrelated, disappeared unaccountably in a single week in 
			Buffalo, New York. Montreal, Canada, had a wave of missing persons 
			in July 1883, and again in July 1892.
 
 Children vanish more frequently than any other group. We're not 
			talking about ordinary runaways. In August 1869, thirteen children 
			vanished in Cork, Ireland. No sign of kidnapping or foul play. That 
			same month there was a wave of disappearing children in Brussels, 
			Belgium. Another group of youngsters melted away in Belfast in 
			August 1895.
 
			  
			And again in August 1920, eight girls (all tinder 
			twelve years of age) disappeared forever in Belfast.
 The latter part of the nineteenth century produced several classic 
			disappearances. On Thursday, September 23 rd, 1880, a fanner named 
			David Lang took a few steps into an open field near Gallatm, 
			Tennessee, and vanished instantaneously in front of several 
			witnesses, including Judge August Peck. Where did he go? A long and 
			thorough search of the field never produced an answer.
 
			  
			Five years 
			later on Thursday, April 23rd, 1885, another farmer named Isaac 
			Martin walked into a field near Salem, Virginia, and like David 
			Lang, dissolved into nothingness.
 Christmas Eve (a twenty-fourth, naturally), 1889, an eleven-year-old 
			boy named Oliver Larch joined the legion of the missing when he went 
			outside his home near South Bend, Indiana, to get a pail of water.
 
			  
			His family heard him cry out,  
				
				'Help! Help. They've got me!" 
				 
			His 
			footprints led fifty feet away in the fresh snow and then stopped. 
			His bucket lay a few feet beyond that point. There were no other 
			marks of any kind. It was as if Oliver larch had been scooped into 
			the sky off the face of the earth.
 This type of sudden, inexplicable disappearance still takes place. 
			In the summer of 1969 a seven-year-old boy named Dennis Martin was 
			whisked away in Great Smoky Mountains National Park in Tennessee. 
			One second he was walking along with Ms father and other relatives, 
			the next second he was gone. Every stone and crevice was searched. A 
			massive hunt was launched with more than fourteen hundred people 
			looking under every bush. The boy was never found.
 
 Children began to disappear in the city of Villa Velha, Brazil, 
			early
 
 in December 1969, according to Brazilian correspondent Eduaido 
			Keffel of the German magazine Die Bunte llhstriette, March 24th, 
			1970. Within a few weeks a minor mystery had exploded into a 
			frightening epidemic. Scores of youngsters, ail between the ages of 
			nine and fifteen and all from poor families (ruling out any ransom 
			motive), vanished without a trace.
 
			  
			The police in the state of Espirito Santo rallied their forces and began a massive search for a 
			sinister kidnapping ring. But they had no leads. The disappearances 
			seemed random, were not ordinary runaways, and none of the children 
			knew each other or shared a common school.
 Then in February 1970, four of the missing youngsters reappeared 
			separately. Two were stumbling about the streets blindly, suffering 
			from amnesia. The other pair were able to remember fragments of 
			their adventure, but their stories were as bizarre as a James Bond 
			tale. They had been stopped on the street, they said, and offered a 
			ride in a large American style limousine (quite a treat to a poor 
			Brazilian youngster).
 
			  
			Once they were in the car, they were given a 
			cigarette {apparently drugged) and they lapsed into unconsciousness. 
			One returnee recalled that he awoke in a small hut, tied hand and 
			foot, when a stranger entered, freed him, and told him how to find 
			the nearest police station. An eleven-year-old girl identified as Vani said her kidnapper was a woman named Laura. Laura fed her 
			sweets and then took her to a field where an aeroplane was waiting. 
			 
			  
			Vani began to scream and fuss, and surprisingly Laura gave her some 
			money and returned her to her viliage.1
 
			1 Jessup discussed the case of the teleported Spanish soldier 
			mentioned at the opening of this chapter in his book The Case for 
			the UFO. Among the annotations in the later Vato edition there was a 
			pointed description of bow the soldier had made so much trouble that 
			they decided to let him go. 
			  
			
			Most of the Brazilian victims were boys, although a few girls were 
			included. Once the kidnapping wave received publicity, a number of 
			youths had narrow escapes, fleeing the big cars and their mysterious 
			occupants when they were offered a lift. Local police never caught 
			up with these cars and speculated they were dealing with some kind 
			of slavery ring.
 
 Actually, children have been disappearing in large numbers for 
			centuries all over the world, and most of these cases have remained 
			unsolved. In the Middle Ages it was popularly believed that fairies 
			and leprechauns frequently stole children away. The Indians of North 
			and South America also have many myths and stories about children 
			being kidnapped by the little people.
 
			  
			The notion that parahumans kidnap children is deeply entrenched in every culture. In 
			more recent times Gypsies have often been accused of kidnapping.
 The celebrated Pied Piper of Hamelin, Germany, is more than just a 
			charming children's story. A stranger actually did appear in Hamelin 
			in the Middle Ages, and he lured away 1,50 children never seen 
			again. The event is still commemorated with an annual festival in 
			Hamelin.
 
 In a.d. 1212 a teenaged boy in France, Stephen of Cloyes, began to 
			hear voices which inspired him to collect together fifty thousand 
			children for the pathetic Children's Crusade. They marched off to do 
			battle with the infidels and disappeared en masse. The popular 
			explanation is that they were all seized by slavers.
 
 One of the first colonies to be established in the New World - the 
			Roanoke Island colony begun in 1585 off the coast of what is now 
			North Carolina - disappeared magically, Virginia Dare, the first 
			child of European descent to be born on this continent, was among 
			the missing.
 
			  
			The local Indians were not hostile and were as 
			befitted 
			by the vanishing colony as the explorers who came searching for it.
 Another entire village, a remote Eskimo settlement in northern 
			Canada, lost its entire population sometime in August 1930. The 
			Northwest Mounted Police found the village abandoned, but its thirty 
			inhabitants had left behind their food, clothing, kayaks, rifles, 
			and dogs. Since no Eskimo is likely to travel very far without his 
			precious rifle or his dog, the police were baffled.
 
			  
			A two-week 
			investigation of the area failed to yield any clues. Strangest of 
			all, a grave on the edge of the village had been opened, and the 
			body was gone. Grave robbing is an unspeakable crime among the 
			Eskimos, and it is very unlikely that they dug up the body and fled 
			the village, leaving behind their weapons, tools, food, and their 
			dogs.
 At the other end of the world in Antarctica an American scientist 
			vanished without a trace on May 7th, 1965. He was Carl Robert Disch, 
			twenty-six, and he was assigned to the Byrd Station, operating 
			equipment to investigate VLF radio noises for the National Bureau of 
			Standards.
 
			  
			He set out to walk from his hut to the main station a 
			short distance away, following a hardline that was strung as a guide 
			for the path between the two points. When he failed to appear after 
			forty-five minutes, the other scientists went out searching for him 
			in tracked vehicles.
 If Disch had fallen and was lying in the snow,' Ron Sefton the 
			leader of the Byrd Station explained to William J. Perkinson of the 
			Baltimore Sun,
 
				
				'the huskies would have seen him long before the 
			searchers did. Similarly, if he had fallen and was covered by 
			drifting
			snow, the dogs would have sighted the mound and rushed out to 
			investigate it. That's the way huskies are.' 
			The search went on for three days and covered a thirty-five-mile 
			area around the hut.  
			  
			Disch's own dog, 3 husky called Gus, 
			disappeared shortly afterwards. Some of the searchers claimed they 
			saw mysterious lights and heard engine noises in the distance. 
			Antarctica is, of course, uninhabited except for a handful of 
			international scientists who work very closely with one another.
 Aeroplanes, ships and submarines have also disappeared by the 
			hundreds. In quite a few cases the missing ships or planes were 
			later found, mysteriously abandoned by their crews. One of the first 
			and most celebrated of these incidents took place on July 24th, 
			1924, whith Lt W.T. Day and Pilot Officer D.R. Stewart went off in 
			a single-engined biplane for a routine patrol over the Arab desert.
 
			  
			A search party found their plane the next day, parked on the desert 
			and completely intact, in excellent working order. There was 
			gasoline in the tack, and no sign of trouble or violence. The 
			footprints of the two men were clearly visible in the sand. They had 
			taken a few steps away from the plane - and then the footprints 
			ended abruptly, like young Oliver Larch, they had taken a stroll 
			into thin air.
 An Italian ufologist, Alberto Fenoglio, reported rumors of a 
			similar disappearance in the Soviet Union in 1961. A small mail 
			plane was reported missing but was quickly located in perfect shape 
			near the remote town of Tobolsk, Siberia. 'Everything on board - 
			engine, radio, mailbags, etc. - was in perfect order,' Fenoglio 
			stated. "The tank contained fuel for two hours of flight The four 
			passengers had vanished without a trace. A distance of about three 
			hundred feet from the aircraft there was a huge, clearly defined 
			circle on which the grass was all scorched and the earth depressed.'
 
 Over fifty pilots and men of the United States Air Force have lost 
			their lives or disappeared suddenly while pursuing unidentified 
			flying objects. Their deaths have been officially documented. Their 
			names and the peculiar circumstances surrounding these tragedies 
			have been released to a bewildered and sometimes disbelieving press 
			and public. Some of these incidents involved aerial-collisions with 
			invisible objects.
 
 On June 11th, 1938, the Chicago Daily News described the crash of a 
			U.S. Army bomber outside of Delaware, Illinois. Nine men were killed 
			after what one ground witness described as a 'sudden crash in 
			midair'. Crash with what? No one knows.
 
 Three more pilots died on June 8th, 1951, when four jets crashed 
			simultaneously near Richmond, Indiana. Another four jets came to a
			strange end near Lawrenceyi Ue, Georgia, cm December 3.1955.
 
			  
			The 
			tower operators at the Dobbins Air Base heard one of the pilots 
			exclaim,  
				
				"We can't miss it".  
			Moments later all four planes came 
			diving out of the clouds in flames.
 After a thorough study of the debris of a Jetliner which crashed 
			outside Calcutta on May 2nd, 1953, the British Ministry of Civil 
			Aviation announced that it had 'collided with a fairly heavy body'. 
			Witnesses said that there was no other plane near the doomed 
			airliner when it 'seemed to stop short in midair' and crashed.
 
 A B-47 smacked into something solid in October 1955, and only one 
			man survived. He was quoted in the newspaper accounts as saying that 
			the plane was 'struck in midair', and the jolt was so terrific he 
			thought they had struck the ground. The crash took place near 
			Lovington, New Mexico, and authorities said there were no other 
			planes in the vicinity. One ground witness did claim, however, that 
			a ball of fire appeared near the plane just before the crash. A 
			couple of weeks later, another B-47 met with an identical fate in 
			Texas. Witnesses said they saw 'a ball of fire with sparks shooting 
			out of it' just before the plane went down.
 
 Are there invisible things haunting our airways, endangering planes, 
			pilots, and passengers?
 
 Ufologist Jerome dark uncovered an extraordinary item from an old 
			1939 newspaper.
 
				
				"On a day in late summer, 1939j a military transport 
			left the Marine Naval Air Station in San Diego, California, for a 
			routine flight to Honolulu," Clark wrote in Flying Saucer Review. 
			"About three hours afterwards several urgent distress signals 
			sounded from the plane and then silence. Later the craft came 
			limping back to execute an emergency landing. When Air Station 
			personnel entered the plane, they found every man of the crew, 
			including the co-pilot who had lived long enough to pilot the craft 
			back to its base, dead of unknown causes." 
			Each of the bodies carried large, gaping wounds, and the outside of 
			the ship was similarly marked. Air Station men who touched parts of 
			the craft came down with a mysterious skin infection.
 One of the most puzzling aspects of the whole affair was that the 
			.45 automatics carried by the pilot and copilot as service pieces 
			had been emptied, and the shells lay on the floor.
 
			  
			A smell of rotten 
			eggs pervaded the atmosphere inside the plane… Mysterious skin 
			infections and rotten egg odors [hydrogen sulphide] are phenomena 
			familial to all UFO researchers, It would seem
			that the transport was attacked - apparently without provocation - 
			by some sort of strange aerial intruder.
 Air Force records show that one of the first cases of an 
			electromagnetic effect took place over Iwo Jima on August 28,1945, 
			when a C-46's engines failed as three UFOs maneuvered around it In 
			those days military men called UFO's Foo Fighters.
 
			  
			The Foo Fighters 
			baffled both Allied and Axis pilots over Germany and Japan in the 
			final days of the war. Bomber crews were also reporting constant 
			appearances of little green men who invaded their planes and caused 
			all kinds of mischief. The press labeled them Gremlins and the 
			popular conclusion was that the crews were merely hallucinating 
			because of the high altitude and thin atmosphere. Since then there 
			have been thousands of little green men reports from all over the 
			world. They are now an integral part of the flying saucer lore.
 People in Florida were also watching aircraft in the autumn of 1945, 
			the common assumption being that the objects were some kind of new 
			secret weapon. Then on December 5th, 1945, one of the most famous 
			disappearances in aviation history occurred.
 
			  
			Five TBM Avenger 
			torpedo bombers took off from Fort Lauderdale Naval Air Station on a 
			routine training mission. Fourteen men were aboard. Although the 
			weather was perfect, the flight soon ran into some kind of trouble. 
			Radio contact with the base ended abruptly. A Martin Mariner flying 
			boat carrying a crew of thirteen was sent up to find the missing 
			Blight 19. Twenty minutes after it took off radio communications 
			with it also ended abruptly.
 Altogether, twenty-seven men and sis planes completely disappeared a 
			few miles off the Florida coast that afternoon. An extensive search 
			by land, sea, and air was conducted for weeks afterwards. It was one 
			of the biggest searches in history, and it failed to turn up a 
			single piece of debris... not even an oil slick.
 
 The disappearance of Flight 19 and the rescue plane marked the 
			official beginning of the Bermuda Triangle mystery, In the 
			twenty-five years since, a total of seventeen planes have vanished 
			in the lozenge-shaped area southwest of Bermuda, carrying with them 
			a total of 190 people. A number of ships, together with their entire 
			crews, have also melted away there forever.
 
			  
			Such incidents can be 
			traced back as far as 1846. Ivan Sanderson, who has made a study of 
			this phenomenon, believes there are at least six of these vile 
			vortices, as he calls them, spaced evenly around the world. The 
			Devil's Sea off the coast of Japan, for example, has swallowed up so 
			many ships that fishermen carefully sail around it.
 The Navy took the disappearance of Flight 19 very seriously.
 
			  
			In 
			January 1946, a group of Naval Intelligence officers were ordered by 
			President Truman to form an investigative body called the Central 
			Intelligence Group. This was the forerunner to the CIA. In the 
			spring of 1946 the CIG participated in a series of secret hearings 
			in Washington. The wives and relatives of tie missing men were flown 
			to Washington to attend the meetings. Since then most of these 
			people have refused to discuss the subject at all.  
			  
			But one mother of 
			a missing man did confide to a researcher Art Ford, the famous disc 
			jockey who has made a hobby of investigating the Flight 19 case, 
			that she believed her son was still alive 'somewhere… maybe in 
			space'.
 During 1965-6 the National Bureau of Standards mounted special 
			microphones and instruments along the coastline facing the Bermuda 
			Triangle to try to pick up sounds that might lie above the range of 
			human hearing. They succeeded in recording odd whispering sounds of 
			unknown origin. The Navy quietly conducted a new search of the 
			Triangle in 1967, spending over five million dollars to search the 
			ocean floors with special research submarines and devices. As usual, 
			they failed to find any trace of the missing planes and ships and 
			were unable to come up with any new explanation for the mystery.
 
 Sanderson's cautious theory about the vile vortices, as expounded in 
			his book Invisible Residents, is that these areas are plagued with 
			magnetic and gravitational anomalies. Maybe the planes fell up!
 
 In the summer of 1970 a giant Soviet cargo plane carrying supplies 
			to earthquake-stricken Peru disappeared south of Greenland Planes 
			from several countries searched the area for days and failed to find 
			a trace of it. That September three adventurers set out in a balloon 
			from New York, hoping to cross the Atlantic. They too vanished and 
			repeated searches could not locate their supposedly un-sinkable 
			gondola.
 
 Everyone has heard of the Marie Celeste, the ship found floating 
			crewless in the Atlantic in 1872. There have been scores of similar 
			finds. Usually such ships are completely intact, often with food 
			cooking on the stoves and the galley tables set for dinner. The 
			crews and passengers simply abandon ship, leaving all their personal 
			effects behind, Five such ships were found adrift in the Bermuda 
			Triangle area during June-July 1969.
 
 In the spring of 1969 a British sailor named John Fairfax was 
			crossing the Atlantic alone when he reportedly observed two 
			brilliant lights on the horizon. They separated and flew higher into
			the sky.
 
			  
			As be watched, fascinated, he claims he entered a 
			motionless trancelike state.  
				
				'It was more than just seeing them,' he 
			related afterwards.    
				'It was this force. It was as though they were 
			saying to me: "Do you want to come with us?" And I was fighting it 
			and saying back: "No, no, nol" It was like telepathy, like being 
			hypnotized." 
			After the objects swooped away, Fairfax realized for the first time 
			that the cigarette he was holding had burned his fingers.
 In January 1970, another ship drifted ashore at the island of 
			Trinidad, It was the Sta Filomena and had accommodations for seven 
			persons. There was no one on board.
 
 A C-46 loaded with five tons of meat disappeared over the Caribbean 
			in April 1970. The usual fruitless search was conducted.
 
 Submarines too have shown a tendency to vanish in tightly spaced 
			waves or eyries. Back in 1939 before World War II got underway, four 
			subs vanished in four months. They belonged to Japan, the United 
			States, Great Britain, and France. During the week of January 21st, 
			1968, both a French and Israeli submarine disappeared without a 
			trace in the placid Mediterranean.
 
			  
			They were hundreds of miles apart 
			when they performed a disappearing act almost simultaneously. 
			Searching parties reported unidentified flying objects in the area, 
			and one group of would-be rescuers detected a metal object and 
			thought they had found one of the missing craft But the object 
			scooted away and was never explained. Since then four more subs 
			belonging to the United States, England, and France have vanished. 
			The most recent, the French Eurydice. was swallowed up on Wednesday 
			March 4th, 1970, in the Mediterranean, Somebody seems to be 
			collecting submarines.
 People, planes, ships, submarines, and even automobiles are 
			constantly disappearing suddenly and inexplicably all over this 
			haunted planet of ours. Naturally, these mysteries have attracted 
			the flying saucer researchers, and two ufologists apparently joined 
			the missing voluntarily on November 11th, 1953.
 
			  
			Wilbur J. Wilkinson 
			held a responsible position with the Hoffman Radio Corporation in 
			Los Angeles and according to his wife, 
				
				'had tape recordings of 
			conversations with men from other planets who landed here in 
			saucers'.  
			The den in his home was lined with UFO photographs and 
			weird symbols and formulations, supposedly passed along by Ettle men 
			from the planet Maser who were preparing to invade Earth. 
			Wilkinson's partner, Karl Hunrath, claimed to have information about 
			landed saucers and talked his friend into renting an aeroplane so 
			they could try to find it.  
			  
			They took off from the Gardenaj 
			California
			airport with a three-hour supply of gasoline. That was the last 
			anyone saw of them. A widespread search failed to turn up either the 
			plane or the two men.
 At least one eyewitness claims to have seen a UFO seize a plane in 
			midair and carry it off. Eugene Metcalfe of Paris, Illinois, has 
			signed a notarized affidavit avowing that on Wednesday, March 9th, 
			1955, he was watching a jet fighter shoot across the sky, when 
			suddenly a gigantic object 'shaped like a call bell' descended over 
			it.
 
			  
			This object, Metcalfe said, literally swallowed up the 
			fast-moving jet 'as easy as a hawk would a chicken' and then 
			disappeared upwards with its prey. A fighter and its pilot were 
			reported missing in the region that day!
 In earlier times the ultraterrestrials
			
			established religions among 
			men which, while they seemed benevolent, introduced the practice of 
			making human sacrifices to the gods. This barbaric sacrificial rite 
			was common throughout Europe, Asia, the Pacific, and South America 
			for thousands of years. Only the finest specimens of the tribe were 
			accepted for sacrifice - beautiful young virgins and muscular young 
			men.
 
			  
			In most cultures the victims volunteered. It was in fact a very 
			high honor.  
			  
			They were feted before they were led to a high holy 
			place or the top of a pyramid. In some cultures they were taken to a 
			sacred island and left there. They were always gone the next month 
			or year when the tribe returned with new sacrificial victims.
 Physical sacrifice continued into biblical times and persisted in 
			some cultures until only a few centuries ago. The brutal 
			inquisitions of the Middle Ages claimed more millions of victims and 
			included mass disappearances of people who were presumably hauled 
			off to some dungeon never to be seen again. Robed and hooded men 
			pounded on doors in the middle of the night and dragged away whole 
			families.
 
 The record shows that the ultraterrestrials have a need for physical 
			human beings. Once they were quite open in demanding specimens to 
			serve that need. Times have changed though, and their methods are 
			more subtle. Thousands of people disappear annually without a trace 
			(not counting the hundreds of thousands who are fleeing the law, 
			creditors, and spouses).
 
			  
			They once exploited the human race in the 
			guise of benevolent gods living on hilltops; they now exploit us 
			through the modern myth of extraterrestrial visitors from distant 
			stars.
 Perhaps the planet Earth is nothing more than a gigantic farm, We 
			unfortunately are the crop.
 
 
			  
			  
			  
			CHAPTER SIXTEENTHE REVOLUTION 
			OF THE MIND
 
 The new man is living amongst us now I He is here I' Adolf Hitler 
			declared. *I have seen the new man. He is intrepid and cruel. I was 
			afraid of Mm.'
 
 Hitler's Germany was a phenomenon that will be studied by scholars 
			for centuries to come. This mad genius created the ultimate secret 
			society. He exhumed all the ancient symbols - the swastika was an 
			old Oriental symbol - and gathered around him a fascinating 
			assortment of perverts and, yes, Black Magicians.1
 
			  
			The skull and 
			crossbones adorned the uniforms of the dread Gestapo.  
			  
			A double 
			lightning bolt was the symbol of his Storm Troopers. Each man had it 
			secretly tattooed out of sight under his armpit. (Rioters at the 
			Democratic Convention in Chicago in 196S were puzzled when the 
			Chicago police forced them to strip to the waist and raise their 
			arms so their armpits could be explored. Were the cops looking foe 
			SS agents?)
 Hundreds of books about the Nazi movement have been written since 
			World War II, many of them authored by intimates of Hitler and 
			members of the Nazi inner circle. One recurrent theme in this 
			literature is Hitler's mediumship and apparent demonic possession. 
			His strange epileptic-type fits were classic manifestations of 
			possession.
 
			  
			Dr Achille Delenas wrote,  
				
				'A person close to Hitler told 
			me that he wakes up in the night screaming and in convulsions. He 
			calls for help and appears to be half paralysed… He utters confused 
			and unintelligible sounds, gasping, as if on the point of 
			suffocation.' Often when fully conscious.    
				Hitler would suddenly cry 
			out,  
					
					'He is here! There! In the 
					corner'.  
				He would point to empty 
			space, apparently seeing entities that no one else could see. 
				 
			Was it 
			madness? Or was Adolf Hitler haunted by, even directed by, ultraterrestrials?
 It is known that many men in Hitler's inner circle were members of 
			the ancient Rosicrucian-style
			
			order Thule, a secret society that 
			is supposed to have had its beginnings in Thule, Greenland, in 
			ancient times. Himmler, Hess, and other prominent figures in the 
			Nazi party spoke privately of strange goals: of creating a New Order 
			in which the masses would be robotized to serve a select inner circle, who 
			in 
			turn would serve undefined supernatural forces.
 
			  
			Dr Joseph Goebbels, 
			Hitler's brilliant minister of propaganda, won his PhD with a thesis 
			on The Spiritual and Political Undercurrents of the Early Romantics. 
			 
			  
			In 1925 he wrote,  
				
				"I want to be an apostle and a preacher".
				 
			He 
			became instead an apostle to the strangely mesmeric little 
			ex-corporal who set out to rule the world. like his boss, Goebbels 
			had an incredible sense of history and the ability to sway the minds 
			of large groups of people.  
			  
			Hitler, it is said, had such imposing 
			presence and such a brilliant, decisive, seemingly logical mind that 
			when generals and officials barged into his office prepared to argue 
			with him about issues and decisions, they left cowed and awed, 
			convinced he was the greatest man alive.
 All kinds of kooks and cultists were welcomed into the Nazi inner 
			circle. Many of them suffered from messiah complexes, convinced 
			that Hitler was going to save the world rather than destroy it. 
			Vidkun Abraham Quisling, the Norwegian traitor, is a minor bat 
			typical example. Quisling's father was a clergyman who had visited 
			with angels and written books about them.
 
			  
			In 1929, Quisling himself 
			published About the Matter That Inhabited Worlds Outside Ours and 
			the Significance Caused by It to Our Philosophy of Ufo. Later he 
			wrote another massive book called Universismus, which summarized his 
			cosmology and outlined a new religion. He founded the Norwegian Nazi 
			party in 1933 and served as Premier during the German occupation of 
			Norway, after virtually handing the country to Hitler on a platter. 
			 
			  
			He was executed at the end of the war. 
				
				'After Quisling was imprisoned in 1945, he was convinced that he 
			would have been able to reach the acme in all sections of art and 
			science," Dr G. Langfeldt wrote in the Psychiatry Digest in May 
			1970. 'Of interest with respect to his paranoid ideas is that during 
			the trial Quisling maintained on several occasions that he believed 
			in a new world of God to come to this earth and that this 
				faith had been the driving force in all his actions.' 
			Quisling, like Hitler, was dominated by an overpowering sense of 
			historical mission and, having failed in that mission, degenerated 
			into a babbling lunatic. ,
 European Gypsies were rounded up by the Nazis and slaughtered as we 
			have already noted. Hitler also maintained all-out war against 
			scientists and philosophers who did not conform to his own beliefs 
			and cosmology. Nazi gangs burned down the archives of Rudolf 
			Steiner's Anthroposophical Society and attempted to wipe out his 
			life's work. (Sterner was a major philosopher and student of the 
			occult
			who made many outstanding contributions to human knowledge.)
 
			  
			Books 
			were wantonly destroyed, and the leading thinkers and intellectuals 
			of Europe were either killed or driven into exile.
 In his drive for world domination Hitler created a scientific 
			establishment which developed new rocket weapons, revolutionary 
			aircraft (such as jets), and worked towards atomic fission. The 
			influence of this new science changed the world forever in the 
			1940s. One direct result was our voyage to the moon aboard craft 
			designed by men trained in the laboratories of Nazi Germany.
 
 In retrospect the Nazi era was a repetition of the earlier patterns 
			of history. It is a pattern which will undoubtedly be repeated 
			again, perhaps in the not-too-distant future.
 
 One facet of Hitler's madness was demonic obsession with liquidating the Jews. Actually, Ms racism was much broader than 
			anti-Semitism. To him all races were inferior to pure German stock. 
			He sought to create a super race which could run a worldwide 
			government. And his fixation with the Jewish question was Ms urge to 
			invalidate the ancient prophecies and thus alter the whole history 
			of the future.
 
 This brings us to the sticky and highly unscientific subject of 
			prophecy. From the beginning the ultraterrestrials have presented 
			man with a fairly complete outline of his future and Ms destiny. On 
			one level, millions of individuals have received precise predictions 
			of future events in their own lives through mediums, oracles, and 
			prophets who communicated with ultraterrestrials.
 
			  
			On another level, 
			every major culture has attempted to preserve their prophetic 
			teachings by carving them in stone or sealing them in tombs and 
			caves (as the Dead Sea Scrolls). All of these occult and religious 
			records from all parts of the world offer essentially the same 
			predictions. The Bible's Revelation of St John is an outstanding 
			example. It explains to us that the final war, Armageddon, will 
			begin in the Middle East after the Jews have resettled In their 
			ancient homeland. Obviously, if Hitler's evil crusade had succeeded, 
			Israel would never have been created, and Armageddon would have been 
			averted.
 Nostradamus, a French physician in the sixteenth century, composed 
			many verses' which have since proved to be precise predictions of 
			events which came centuries after his death (he even described the 
			rise and fall of Napoleon).
 
			  
			One of his most quoted prophecies is: 
				
				The year 1999, seventh month.A great King of Terror will come from the skies,
 … Around this time Mars to reign for the good cause.'
 
			Oriental armies will sweep across the world, according to many of 
			these prophets.  
			  
			Even the Hopi Indians have a tradition that great 
			hordes will invade North America from the Orient. The number 666 is 
			stressed in the Bible and many other works. Invert it and you have 
			999.The Bible states repeatedly that all kinds of wonders will 
			appear in the sky before the end comes. Man has been warned to be 
			wary of false prophets and not to go into the desert to meet them.  
			  
			Scores of modern UFO contactees have had their encounters in remote 
			desert areas. 
			  
			All religions promise that the end of mankind will come suddenly, 
			like the thief in the night. Some refer to this event as the Second 
			Coming, the reappearance of Christ, the Harvest. The Hopis call it 
			the Purification. To take the sting out of this threat - and the 
			destruction of all humanity must be regarded as a threat - 
			religious, interpreters have presented it as a step upwards towards 
			the immortality of the individual soul.  
			  
			But if science is on the 
			right track, if the soul is merely an extension of some giant energy 
			field in the sky, then the process is more in line with the moon 
			food concept of the Oriental philosophers. Withdrawal of these 
			extensions or controls of the supermind of the cosmos would mean 
			that the individual would be absorbed into it and cease to exist as 
			a separate physical unit.  
			  
			Ego, personality, and memory, being 
			properties of the physical body, would be left behind.
 There are two fundamental forms of religion:
 
				
					
					(1) the worship of 
			elemental's and supernatural manifestations, already discussed 
					(2) the awareness of and submission to the supermind of the cosmos. The Cosmic Consciousness. 
					 
			Buddhism is the best example of the 
			latter. The former concentrates on worshipping manifestations, while 
			the latter is devoted to understanding the whole.
 We are witnessing a worldwide phenomenon today: mass illumination of 
			millions of people, particularly young (under thirty) men and women 
			in all walks of life. This process is quite well understood but 
			never openly discussed in the mass media. In 1900 a Canadian 
			psychiatrist, Dr Maurice Bucke, published the first Important study 
			of the subject, Cosmic Consciousness.
 
			  
			Illumination is basically a 
			sudden, overwhelming insight into the whole structure of the cosmos 
			and man's relationship to it. Suddenly, for a few brief seconds the 
			percipient understands everything with incredible clarity.  
			  
			In some
			cases the process occurs over a long period in the form of short 
			flashes of insight which gradually add up. In others it takes place 
			instantaneously with the percipient seemingly bathed in a reddish 
			glow or caught in a beam of brilliant white light cast down from the 
			skies (thus we have the ancient phrase, 'He has seen the light").
 No one is ever exactly the same after an illuminating experience. 
			Mediocre men become great leaders, preachers, statesmen, scientists, 
			poets, and writers overnight! Others divorce their wives, quit their 
			jobs, and embark on new careers which catapult them into unexpected 
			prominence. Some fear for their sanity at first because the 
			experience is so overwhelming. Some are unable to cope with it and 
			disintegrate into various kinds of fanatics.
 
 Illumination often accompanies UFO sightings, particularly when the 
			witnesses are caught in a beam of light from the objects. Their IQ 
			later skyrockets, and their lives change appreciably. But as in all 
			aspects of the general phenomenon, there seem to be other forces 
			Imitating this process and producing false Illuminism.
 
			  
			Young people 
			experimenting with LSD and other hallucinogens sometimes have 
			experiences which they believe are contacts with the Cosmic 
			Consciousness but which ultimately prove to be destructive. Charles 
			Hanson is a good example of this. Some LSD users do, however, appear 
			to undergo a pure form of Illuminism, but it is likely that they were 
			already illumination prone and would have had the experience 
			eventually anyway.
 Psychic abilities appear to be hereditary, and this includes 
			illumination. Many people attracted to metaphysics spend years of 
			their lives following the secret teachings, meditating, and 
			disciplining their minds in an effort to gain godhead (another term 
			for mystical illumination). More often than not they only succeed in 
			opening themselves up to possession and hallucinations similar to 
			those incurred by the use of psychedelic drugs or the practice of 
			Black Magic and witchcraft.
 
			  
			Today's young people are rapidly gaining 
			firsthand knowledge of the phantom world of demons and ultraterrestrials as a result of such efforts.  
			  
			The Hippie 
			underground newspapers and comic books are now filled with a new 
			lore of demons and demigods as well as much inside information on 
			the cosmology of the super-mind. Dr Timothy Leary started the 
			stampede to illumination and the Cosmic Consciousness in the late 
			1950s with his LSD experiments. Today the drug scene is a very 
			important part of the youth subculture, much to the alarm and 
			confusion of the over-forty crowd.
 The notorious musk festival at Woodstock in the closing days of
			the last decade was actually a mass illumination experience. The 
			seemingly schizophrenic and destructive philosophy being touted by 
			today's young people is in fact identical to the program of the 
			Illuminati three centuries ago.
 
			  
			A revolution of the mind is taking 
			place almost unnoticed and certainly undeciphered by the older 
			population and their Establishment. There is a worldwide movement 
			against violence and war (the cornerstone of civilization over these 
			past several thousand years).
 Another offshoot of the process is the rapid decline of organized 
			religion. People who have attained direct personal contact with the 
			Cosmic Consciousness (or who at least believe they have attained 
			such contact) have no need for the rites and trappings of the 
			old-time religions. There is no need to go to church when your own 
			head is your church. The fear of death and the promise of 
			immortality have always been one of the main appeals of all 
			religions.
 
			  
			But as Dr Bucke noted in his study, one of the effects of 
			illumination is the complete elimination of the death fear. The 
			percipient suddenly understands with convincing clarity that he is 
			merely part of the larger whole and that he is assured of 
			immortality because his consciousness, the actuating mechanism of 
			his physical body, survives as a part of the supermind.  
			  
			The Bible 
			thumper's concept of heaven and hell is quite different from the illuminated's insight into the cosmic structure.  
			  
			This is not a 
			movement towards atheism, as many horrified adults believe. 
			According to the young people, it is instead a movement away from elementalism and the many misinterpretations the ultra terrestrial 
			manifestations have inspired.
 Within a few years many of our present orthodox beliefs may seem as 
			archaic and ridiculous as the belief in Zeus. This movement towards 
			a higher truth has been predicted for a thousand years. In Catholic 
			lore the last pope will be an apostate who will supervise the 
			decline of the church. He will be named Peter, as was the first 
			pope. The prophecy states that the final pope before Peter will be 
			assassinated. In 1967 the Vatican removed the Throne of St Peter 
			from the basement, dusted it off, and put it on display for the 
			first time in centuries.
 
 The birth, life, and effect of Moses, Christ, and others were 
			predicted well in advance. In these times we have been subjected to 
			a new series of prophecies which extends beyond the earlier 
			prophecies describing the days before Armageddon and the ultimate 
			Harvest.
 
			  
			Jeanne Dixon and several other seers claim that the 
			anti-Christ was born somewhere in the Middle East on February 5th, 
			1962.  
			  
			He will, they say, rise up and attract a huge following in the 
			1980s and will
			lead a large segment of humanity into the crisis-filled 1990s. There 
			was a massive conjunction of planets on February 5th, 1962, and 
			Oriental astrologers caused considerable excitement with their 
			claims that the world would come to end on that day.
 Arthur C Clarke, the British scientist, studied the UFO phenomenon 
			in the early 1950s and summarized his findings in 1953 in the form 
			of an astonishing novel, Childhood's End. He visualized the flying 
			saucers as part of the psychic system of our environment, peopled by 
			giant, winged beings remarkably similar to 
			
			the strange Mothman 
			allegedly seen by hundreds of people in the Ohio Valley during 1966-67s.
 
 He described a last generation of children endowed with heightened 
			psychic abilities and the total 
			
			Cosmic Consciousness.
 
			  
			While the 
			Overlords silently watch from their flying saucers, this final 
			generation suddenly merges into a single vast unit of energy and 
			ascends to join the supermind of the cosmos. Their development is 
			completed. They have reached the climactic stage of cosmic evolution 
			- a form of intelligent energy which no longer needs the physical 
			shell and all of its accoutrements.
 Close observers of today's youth subculture, from Dr Leary to R. 
			Buckroinster Fuller, detect the tremulant beginnings of such a last 
			generation among those born after 1945. As they came of .age in the 
			1960s a whole new cycle began. The Beatles really got the ball 
			rolling with a cultural upheaval that is still continuing. Fantastic 
			changes in political and occult belief have occurred almost 
			overnight.
 
			  
			Anyone who reads the daily newspapers can see that we are 
			headed at breakneck speed into a new society with a whole new set of 
			values. If the present trends continue, the decade of the 1970s will 
			be filled with violence and confusion as the restructuring takes 
			place on every level of society. The process is visible behind the 
			Iron Curtain and in China also.
 The year 1848 really marked the beginning of this massive collective 
			overhaul of our planet. We now seem to be in the final stages of 
			something -something of cosmic proportions. In order to play out the 
			prophesied game, the ultraterrestrials will need to create a new 
			Hitler. The men who will confront him and hopefully defeat him are 
			presently sitting on floors in Greenwich Village, Paris, and Hong 
			Kong, stoned on pot and tripping out on LSD.
 
			  
			At least two American 
			presidents, Abraham Lincoln and John F. Kennedy, showed all the 
			signs of having undergone illumination. Winston Churchill and
			Charles de Gaulle were also likely candidates, as were Gandhi and 
			possibly the late Gamal Nasser of Egypt. But there ate no apparent 
			Illuminati on the world scene at the moment.  
			  
			It is certain, though, 
			that they will appear at the appropriate moment.  
			  
			They always have.
 
 
 
			
 
			
			The sexual revolution is another key part of all this, for sexual 
			repression and frustration have always been a basic cause of 
			violence, peculiar social attitudes, and destructive psychoses.
 
			  
			Fools that we are, we have always been in the habit of electing 
			misfits to lead us - from Julius Caesar, who was an epileptic, to 
			Adolf Hitler. Hitler's peers tried to crucify Sigmund Freud when he 
			first dared to suggest this. But history demonstrates that he was 
			right. We have followed an insane course for thousands of years. 
			 
			  
			Once we took our finest young men to the top of a pyramid and cut 
			out their hearts with pomp and ceremony. Today we send them off to 
			battlefields. Once they happily climbed the pyramid under their own 
			power. Now they are rebelling. They are questioning the system that 
			wants their heart.  
			  
			The real hope of mankind may be that the system 
			will break down or be drastically altered in the few years before 
			our unknown Arab hears a voice in Ms head, dons a red cape, and 
			gallops into the United States to free the Hopi Indians.
 The members of WOW are still watching as they have always done, 
			probably with considerable amusement.
 
			  
			The ultraterrestrials are 
			still running about in their black suits and a thousand other 
			disguises, whispering in our ears, setting race against race, and 
			nation against nation. Our modern witch doctors, the scientists, are 
			planting atomic bombs in known earthquake faults on the floor of the 
			Pacific to see what will happen.
 Great civilizations blossomed and died here before us. Others will 
			certainty come after us, unless we leave the planet in such a 
			polluted, radioactive state that it will be rendered unlivable for 
			physical beings.
 
 But even then we will have left our imprint behind. Thousands of 
			years from now real visitors from some distant star may enter our 
			solar system. They may stand upon our barren moon and look down at 
			the burnt-out cinder that was once Earth, and they may find a metal 
			plate among the craters.
 
			  
			It will puzzle their scientists because 
			obviously the moon is uninhabitable and has never been settled. The 
			plate will be just another erratic for their museum. They'll forget 
			about it and never try to decipher the cryptic lettering.  
			  
			The 
			lettering that states,  
				
				'We came in peace for all mankind'. 
			
			Back to Contents 
			  |